— OGLE SZZEO [9218 ALISHSAINN VIHOLOIA THE LIBRARY of VICTORIA UNIVERSITY Toronto Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2008 with funding from Andrew W. Mellon Foundation https://archive.org/details/hippocrateswitheO8hippuoft THE LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY FOUNDED BY JAMES LOEB EDITED BY G. P, GOOLD PREVIOUS EDITORS T. E. PAGE E. CAPPS W. H. D. ROUSE L. A. POST E. H. WARMINGTON HIPPOCKAEES ΝΠΠΙ LCL 482 HIPPOCRATES VOLUME VIII EDITED AND TRANSLATED BY PAUL POTTER HARVARD UNIVERSITY PRESS CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS LONDON, ENGLAND 1995 Copyright © 1995 by the President and Fellows of Harvard College All rights reserved Ayr. 69:2 Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Hippocrates. (The Loeb classical library) Vol. 8 with an English translation by Paul Potter. ISBN 0-674-99531—-7 1. Hippocrates — Translations into English. 2. Medicine, Greek and Roman. Ill. Potter, Paul, 1944- . IV. Title. V. Series. PA3612.H65 1923 610 23-—12030 Typeset by Chiron, Inc, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Printed in Great Britain by St Edmundsbury Press Ltd, Bury St Edmunds, Suffolk, on acid-free paper. Bound by Hunter & Foulis Ltd, Edinburgh, Scotland. CONTENTS INTRODUCTION BIBLIOGRAPHY NOTE ON TECHNICAL TERMS PLACES IN MAN GLANDS FLESHES PRORRHETIC I PRORRHETIC II PHYSICIAN USE OF LIQUIDS ULCERS HAEMORRHOIDS FISTULAS INDEX 103 127 167 213 295 317 339 377 390 409 INTRODUCTION The ten treatises in this volume fall naturally into three groups.! The works in the first group Places in Man, Glands, and Fleshes are monographs, each presenting a general account of the origin, structure, and function of particular parts of the human body, along with comments on distur- bances of function and the origin of diseases. All three writers make effective use of observations drawn from common experience and from clinical practice, and of ex- planatory hypotheses deriving ultimately from contempo- rary philosophical thought, in constructing their systems. The two books of Prorrhetics contribute to the art of prognosis, the prediction of disease outcome. Prorrhetic I is a collection of 170 short independent chapters which enumerate clinical signs and give their prognostic values in specific diseases. Individual cases are sometimes men- tioned, and the writer occasionally poses questions. Pror- rhetic II is a monographic treatment of the art of medical prediction, beginning with an account of its usefulness, its limits, and its frequent abuse, and then going on to a 1 The individual works are analysed in more detail in their particular introductions. INTRODUCTION detailed discussion of how the practitioner can best understand and profit from the signs that appear in a large selection of specific diseases. The third group consists of five practical manuals on specific facets of Hippocratic surgical practice. Physician outlines professional behaviour, and gives instructions on setting up an office and on the performance of bandaging, incising, and cautery. Use of Liquids discusses the exter- nal application of fresh water, salt water, vinegar and wines. Ulcers lays down the principles and practice by which external lesions are to be evaluated and healed. Haemorrhoids and Fistulas summarize the pathology and treatment of haemorrhoids and condylomas, and of fistula in ano and its complications, respectively. Manuscript Tradition A = Parisinus Graecus 2253 XI c. V =Vaticanus Graecus 276 Xile: M = Marcianus Venetus Graecus 269 X/XI c. I = Parisinus Graecus 2140 ΧΙΠ ec. H = Parisinus Graecus 2142 Ha (older part)? XII/XIII c. Hb (newer part) XIV c. R = Vaticanus Graecus 277 XIV c. Recentiores = approximately 20 manuscripts XV/XVIc. The stemma codicum appearing as Fig. 1 provides an overview of the interdependencies among the manuscripts containing the works in this volume. This is not, however, 2 Folios 46, 49, 55-78 and 80-308; see A. Rivier, Recherches sur la tradition manuscrite du traité hippocratique “De morbo sacro,” Berne, 1962, pp. 97 ff. 2 INTRODUCTION Fig. 1: Stemma Codicum Archetype(s) » Μ Α ν Ha I Hb - Ry se c e n t i O it INTRODUCTION to suggest that the ten treatises share the same transmis- sion: for in fact A, V and M, even in their original com- plete states, each contained only a selection of the Hippo- cratic Collection; furthermore M subsequently lost 72 leaves of text from between the folios now numbered 408 and 409, some time after I had been copied from it in the middle of the thirteenth century. For the treatises we are concerned with here, then, the independent witnesses are as follows: Places in Man AV Physician V Glands V Use of Liquids A Fleshes V Ulcers M Prorrhetic I I Haemorrhoids 1 Prorrhetic II I Fistulas I Prorrhetic I and II, Haemorrhoids and Fistulas were all among the treatises contained in the section of M now lost. They also happen to occupy the newer part of Paris- inus Graecus 2142, Hb, which derives from I rather than from M directly (as Ha does), and thus possesses no inde- pendent textual authority. 3See H. Kuehlewein and J. Ilberg, Hippocratis Opera Omnia, Leipzig, 1894, vol. 1, xx. BIBLIOGRAPHY Editions, Translations and Commentaries HIPPOCRATIC COLLECTION Hippocratis Coi ... octoginta volumina ... per M. Fabium Calvum, Rhavennatem ... latinitate donata ..., Rome, 1525. ( = Calvus) Omnia opera Hippocratis ... in aedibus Aldi & Andreae Asulani soceri, Venice, 1526. ( = Aldina) Hippocratis Coi ... libri omnes ... [per Ianum Corna- rium], Basel, 1538. ( = Froben) Vidus Vidius, Chirurgia ὁ Graeco in Latinum conversa. . . nonnullis ... commentariis, Paris, 1544. ( = Vidius) Hippocratis (οἱ... opera... per Ianum Cornarium ... Latina Lingua conscripta, Venice, 1546. ( = Cornarius) Hippocratis (οἱ ... viginti duo commentarii ... Theod. Zvingeri studio & conatu, Basel, 1579. ( = Zwinger) Stephan. Manialdus, Hippocratis chirurgia ... graece... latinitate ... commentar. illustr., Paris, 1619. (= Manialdus) Magni Hippocratis ... opera omnia ... latina interpreta- tione & annotationibus illustrata Anutio Foesio..., Geneva, 1657-62. ( = Foes) Magni Hippocratis Coi opera omnia graece & latine edita . industria & diligentia Joan. A. Vander Linden, Lei- 5 BIBLIOGRAPHY den, 1665. (= Linden) Hippocratis Coi et Claudii Galeni Pergameni ... opera Renatus Charterius ... edidit, Paris, 1679. ( = Chartier) Hippocratis opera omnia ... studio et opera Stephani Mackii... , Vienna, 1743-49. ( = Mack) J. F. K. Grimm, Hippokrates Werke aus dem griechischen ..., Altenburg, 1781-92. (= Grimm) C. G. Κύμη, Magni Hippocratis Opera omnia ..., Leipzig, 1825-27. (= Kiihn) Fr. Adams, Genuine Works of Hippocrates translated from the Greek, London, 1849. (= Adams) E. Littré, Od¢euwres completes d Hippocrate, Paris, 1839-61. (= Littré) Ch. Daremberg, Oeuvres choisies d’Hippocrate, second edition, Paris, 1855. (= Daremberg) F. Z. Ermerins, Hippocratis ... reliquiae, U trecht, 1859-64. (= Ermerins) C. H. Th. Reinhold, Ἱπποκράτης / Ψευδωνύμως Ἵππο- κράτεια, Athens, 1865-67. ( = Reinhold) J. E. Petrequin, Chirurgie d’Hippocrate, Paris, 1877-78. ( = Petrequin) R. Fuchs, Hippokrates, siémmtliche Werke. Ins Deutsche iibersetzt ..., Munich, 1895-1900. ( = Fuchs) J. L. Heiberg, Hippocratis ... De medico ... De liqui- dorum usu ..., Corpus Medicorum Graecorum I 1, Leipzig and Berlin, 1927. (= Heiberg) R. Joly, Hippocrate, ... De l'usage des liquides, Budé V1(2), Paris, 1972. ( =Joly) R. Joly, Hippocrate, Des lieux dans Vhomme, Du systéme des glandes, Des fistules, Des hémorroides, ... Des chairs... , Budé XIII, Paris, 1978. ( = Joly) BIBLIOGRAPHY OTHER AUTHORS I. E. Drabkin, Caelius Aurelianus On Acute Diseases and On Chronic Diseases, Chicago, 1950. ( = Caelius) Max Wellmann, Pedanii Dioscuridis ... De materia med- ica, Berlin, 1906-1914. ( = Dioscorides) E. Nachmanson, Erotiani Vocum hippocraticarum collec- tio, Gothenburg, 1918. ( = Erotian) E. Nachmanson, Erotianstudien, Uppsala, 1917. (= Nachmanson) C.G. Kiihn, Claudii Galeni Opera omnia ..., Leipzig, 1825-1833. (= Galen) Ch. Daremberg and Ch. E. Ruelle, Oeuvres de Rufus d’Ephése, Paris, 1879. ( = Rufus) General Works Gerhard Baader and Rolf Winau (edd.), Die hippokrati- schen Epidemien. Verhandlungen des V° Colloque International Hippocratique, Stuttgart, 1989. (= Sud- hoffs Archiv, Beiheft 27) Louis Bourgey, Observation et expérience chez les médecins de la Collection hippocratique, Paris, 1953. L. Bourgey and J. Jouanna (edd.), La Collection hippo- cratique et son réle dans histoire de la médecine. Col- loque de Strasbourg, Leiden, 1975. S. ΒΥ], “Les dix deriéres années (1983-1992) de la recherche hippocratique”, Centre Jean-Palerne: Lettre d’informations, no. 22 (May 1993), pp. 1-39. B. Celli, Bibliografia Hipocrdtica, Caracas, 1984. Hans Diller, Kleine Schriften zur antiken Medizin, Berlin/New York, 1973. Ludwig Edelstein, “Hippokrates”, in Paulys Real-Ency- BIBLIOGRAPHY clopddie der classischen Altertumswissenschaft, Sup- plement 6, Stuttgart, 1935. (cols. 1290-1345) Gerhard Fichtner, Corpus Hippocraticum. Verzeichnis der hippokratischen und _ pseudohippokratischen Schriften, second edition, Tiibingen, 1990. Hellmut Flashar (ed.), Antike Medizin, Darmstadt, 1971. (Wege der Forschung, vol. 221) M. D. Grmek (ed.), Hippocratica. Actes du Colloque hippocratique de Paris, Paris, 1980. Mirko D. Grmek, Les maladies a Vaube de la civilisation occidentale, Paris, 1983. Beate Gundert, “Parts and their Roles in Hippocratic Medicine”, ISIS, vol. 83 (1992), pp. 453-465. William Arthur Heidel, Hippocratic Medicine. Its Spirit and Method, New York, 1941. Robert Joly, Le niveau de la science hippocratique, Paris, 1966. Robert Joly (ed.), Corpus Hippocraticum. Actes du col- loque hippocratique de Mons, Mons, 1977. Jacques Jouanna, Hippocrate, Paris, 1992. Pedro Lain Entralgo, La medicina hipocrdatica, Madrid, 1970. Volker Langholf, Medical Theories in Hippocrates. Early Texts and the ‘Epidemics’, Berlin/New York, 1990. Frangois Lasserre and Philippe Mudry (edd.), Formes de pensée dans la Collection hippocratique. Actes du IV° Colloque International Hippocratique, Geneva, 1983. G. E. R. Lloyd (ed.), Hippocratic Writings, Harmonds- worth, 1978. lain M. Lonie, The Hippocratic Treatises “On Genera- tion” “On the Nature of the Child” “Diseases IV”. A Commentary, Berlin/New York, 1981. BIBLIOGRAPHY J. A. Lépez Férez (ed.), Tratados hipocraticos. Actas del ΠΕ Colloque International Hippocratique, Madrid, 1992. G. Maloney and R. Savoie, Cing cents ans de bibliogra- phie hippocratique. 1473-1982, Quebec, 1982. Gilles Maloney and Winnie Frohn, Concordance des oeuvres hippocratiques, 5 vols., Quebec, 1984. (Repr. Hildesheim, 1986) Paul Potter, Short Handbook of Hippocratic Medicine, Quebec, 1988. Paul Potter, Gilles Maloney and Jacques Desautels (edd.), La maladie et les maladies. Actes du VI° Colloque Inter- national Hippocratique, Quebec, 1990. Wesley D. Smith, “Galen on Coans versus Cnidians”, Bulletin of the History of Medicine, vol. 47 (1973), pp- 569-585. Owsei Temkin, “Der Systematische Zusammenhang im Corpus Hippocraticum”, Kyklos, vol. 1 (1928), pp. 8—43. Antoine Thivel, Cnide et Cos? Essai sur les doctrines médicales dans la Collection hippocratique, Paris, 1981. Supplementary bibliographical information is to be found in the introductions to the individual treatises. NOTE ON TECHNICAL TERMS The following terms require some explanation as they cannot be rendered simply and precisely into English. amoaTacts/apostasis: the process of recovery from a dis- ease is often associated with the collection and removal of morbid humours (peccant material) from the ailing part of the body, an apostasis. Cf. Regimen in Acute Diseases (Appendix) 39: “All diseases are resolved through either the mouth, the cavity, or the bladder; sweating is a form of resolution common to them all.” The moment of this resolution by apostasis generally represents the disease’s crisis”. €\xos/helkos : the meaning of the term is wider than any single English term, and includes any discontinuity of tissue, whether internal or external, inflamed or livid, traumatic or spontaneous; possible translations include “sore”, “ulcer”, “wound” or simply “lesion”. The Hippo- cratic treatise traditionally named Ulcers (περὶ ἑλκῶν) is in fact an account not of the pathological phenomenon “ulcer” in the strict dictionary sense, but rather of surface lesions of all types. kowAty/cavity: generally the thorax and/or abdomen is meant, but more frequently the gastro-intestinal tract. 10 TECHNICAL TERMS Anything a person feels to be “high up” or that involves nausea or vomiting is imagined to be in the “upper cavity”, anything felt to be “low down” or that has a rela- tionship to defecation is in the “lower cavity”. The term “cavity” can also be applied to other hollows in the body, e.g. in bones. hreypaivew/phlegmainein: either “to form phlegm”, “to swell up”, or “to become inflamed”; in many passages it is impossible to tell which of these three is meant. dé/vessel: generally a blood vessel, whether artery or vein, but occasionally some other tube such as the ureter. ll PLACES IN MAN INTRODUCTION Erotian lists this work in his preface among the thera- peutic works, and includes thirty-two words from it in his Glossary +; four of these glosses cite Bacchius of Tanagra, suggesting that the treatise was already considered Hip- pocratic by the third century B.c.” Galen’s Glossary contains several words referable to Places in Man, five with explicit references (ws) ἐν τῷ περὶ τόπων τῶν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον." Galen also quotes many times from the treatise in his other writings, often however without naming his source.* Caelius Aurelianus’ (fifth century) Latin translation of Soranus’ Chronic Diseases refers directly to ch. 22 of Places in Man in discussing the treatment of sciatica: “Hippocrates in his book On Places employs cupping without scarification. He also prescribes the drinking of hot drugs.”° The continued visibility of Places in Man in the Middle Ages is attested by its citation by the Byzan- ! Erotian p. 9; see Nachmanson pp. 331-39. 2 Erotian A58, 78, K18 and M9. 3 Galen vol. 19, 74 ἀλαΐα φθίσις: 19, 103 θηρίον; 19, 107F. κάμμορον; 19, 114 κρημνοί; and 19, 118 λεπτά. 4 For a detailed study of Galen’s ambivalent attitude to Places in Man see Schubring pp. 61-70. 5 Caelius pp. 920f. 15 PLACES IN MAN tine excerptor of Rufus of Ephesus’s Names of the Parts of the Body.® Places in Man is organized as follows: ile 2-8: 9-15: 16-40: 41--46: 47: Introduction Human anatomy and physiology, with particular emphasis on the brain and organs of sensation, the blood vessels and cords, and the bones and joints. Fluxes and their causes: the seven cardinal fluxes from the head to the nostrils, ears, eyes, chest, spinal marrow, vertebrae, and joints. The origin and treatment of specific diseases: e.g. pleurisy, internal suppuration, consump- tions, sciatica, dropsies, fevers, jaundice, malig- nant ulcer, and angina. These chapters vary widely in form and content, lacking the more regular pattern (name; symptoms; course; prog- nosis; treatment) followed in Affections, Dis- eases I-III and Internal Affections. General principles of medicine: e.g. the roles of “similars” and “opposites” in disease causation and treatment; the modes of action of medica- tions; the meaning of “good luck” in medical practice. Diseases of Women. Throughout its somewhat irregular course, Places in Man exhibits a unity of viewpoint and purpose centred around a number of principles enunciated in its early chapters: (i) The best medical treatment is that based upon an ® Rufus p. 235; see also Schubring pp. 7Of. 16 PLACES IN MAN understanding of how diseases arise in the body. (ii) This understanding begins with a knowledge of normal structure and function, followed by an acquain- tance with disease processes and mechanisms. (iii) All parts of the body are interrelated and inter- dependent. Diseases often migrate from one part to another. (iv) Fluxes of internal fluids play a central role in dis- ease causation. (v) Disease processes often commence from some excess or imbalance of temperature, moisture, or particu- lar substance. (vi) No simple rules exist by which a physician can know in each case how to act; variability of individual constitution, climate, and geography all affect health and disease. Places in Man is included in all the standard collected editions and translations, including Zwinger, and has been the object of a number of special studies,’ of which the two most recent are: K. Schubring, Untersuchungen zur Uberlieferungsgeschichte der hippokratischen Schrift “De locis in homine”, Berlin, 1941° (= Schubring); and Robert Joly’s Budé edition. Joly includes in his introduc- tion a detailed study, with references, of the many ques- tions that have occupied the attention of scholars regard- ing the treatise: unity of authorship; medical theories; philosophical parentage; relation to other Hippocratic works: school affiliation. ? It is on Joly’ edition that mine for the most part depends. 7 See Littré vol. 6, 275. 8 This work is particularly useful for its discussion of the indirect transmission. 9 Pp. 11-32. 7 VI 276 Littré TEPI TOMQON TON KATA ANOPOTION 1. Ἐμοὶ δοκέει ἀρχὴ μὲν οὖν οὐδεμία εἶναι τοῦ σώματος, ἀλλὰ πάντα ὁμοίως ἀρχὴ καὶ πάντα Ὁ, ΄ὔ΄ Ν 4 : ΩΝ 5 «ες , τελευτή: κύκλου yap γραφέντος ἀρχὴ οὐχ εὑρέθη. καὶ τῶν νοσημάτων ἀπὸ παντὸς ὁμοίως τοῦ σώμα- Ν Ν / Ν 4 / Ν τος, τὸ μὲν ξηρότερον, πεφυκὸς νόσους λάζεσθαι καὶ A ΄ Ν Ne ὃν e Ν Ν᾽ Ν > μᾶλλον πονέειν, TO δὲ ὑγρὸν ἧσσον: TO μὲν yap ἐν A a ΄ ΄ s Ν >] ὃ ΄ Ν δ᾽ τῷ ξηρῷ νόσημα πήγνυταΐ τε καὶ οὐ" διαπαύει, τὸ 5 lal ε ἴω ἴω ᾿ς A , 5, pA ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ διαρρεῖ, καὶ TOU σώματος ἄλλοτε ἄλλο μάλιστα ἔχει, καὶ ἀεὶ μεταλλάσσον ἀνάπαυσιν ποιέει καὶ θᾶσσον παύεται, ὥστε οὐ πεπηγός. Τοῦ δὲ σώματος τὰ μέλεα ἕκαστα τὸ ἕτερον τῷ ΕΣ nN » ¢ A ἑτέρῳ, ὁπόταν ἔνθα ἢ ἔνθα ὁρμήσῃ, νοῦσον Tapav- / / ε / ἴω »“ Ν «ε Ἂν Lal τίκα ποιέει, ἡ κοιλίη TH κεφαλῇ, καὶ ἡ κεφαλὴ τῇσι Ν Ν A ’ Ν a Pr “ Ἂς σαρξὶ καὶ τῇ κοιλίῃ, καὶ τἄλλα πάντα οὕτω κατὰ ο ε aA aA ‘\ λόγον [ὥσπερ ἡ κοιλίη TH κεφαλῇ, καὶ ἡ κεφαλὴ et ἈΝ) Ν Ν A / 9 ¢ Ν ΄ ε ΄, τῇσί τε σαρξὶ καὶ τῇ κοιλίῃ]. ἡ γὰρ κοιλίη ὁκόταν «ες Ν 4 ὑπεκχώρησιν μὴ ποιέῃ τὴν μετρίην, καὶ ἐσίῃ ἐς αὐτήν, ἄρδει τῇ ὑγρότητι τὸ σῶμα τῇ ἀπὸ τῶν / A / “ Ν ε ε ’ 3 Ἂς σιτίων τῶν προσφερομένων: αὕτη δὲ ἡ ὑγρότης ἀπὸ 18 PLACES IN MAN 1. Now in my opinion, there is no beginning point of the body, but rather every part is at the same time both beginning and end, in the same way that in the figure of a circle, no beginning point is to be found. Likewise, dis- eases arise from the whole body indifferently, although the drier component of the body is disposed to become ill and to suffer more, the moist component less. For whereas any disease that occupies a dry part is fixed and unremitting, one in a moist part flows somewhere else and generally occupies different parts of the body at different times; through constantly changing, it has inter- ruptions and goes away sooner, and so it is not fixed. Every part of the body, on becoming ill, immediately produces disease in some other part, the cavity? in the head, the head in the muscles and the cavity, and so on in the same way [as the cavity in the head and the head in the muscles and the cavity]. The cavity, for instance, when material enters it and it does not make a corre- sponding evacuation downwards, floods the body with moisture from the ingested food. This moisture, being ἃ See the note on technical terms above, following the gen- eral introduction. 1 οὐ om. V. 2 Del. Ermerins. 19 2 i 8 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ANOPQOTION A 4 > / > Ἂς Ν ε τῆς κοιλίης ἀποφρασσομένη ἐς τὴν κεφαλὴν ὧδοι- 4 > Ve ον 5 Ν Ἂς 5 ἊΝ > ’ πόρησεν ἀθρόη: καὶ ἐς τὴν κεφαλὴν ἐπὴν ἀφίκηται, / A A lal a οὐ χωρευμένη ὑπὸ τῶν τευχέων τῶν EV TH κεφαλῇ, ca e a“ , Ν / A A Ν > \ pel ἡ av τύχῃ, Kal πέριξ τῆς κεφαλῆς, Kal ἐς TOV > ΄ ὃ Ν a ef ΄ 1 ἈΝ ΤᾺ Ν > ἐγκέφαλον [διὰ λεπτοῦ τοῦ ὀστέου]: Kai ἡ μὲν ἐν A > "ὦ > 4 ε ὡ Ν Ἂς > 4 ‘\ τῷ ὀστέῳ ἐνδέδυκεν, ἡ δὲ περὶ TOV ἐγκέφαλον διὰ A A a λεπτοῦ τοῦ ὀστέου: καὶ ἣν μὲν ἐς τὴν κοιλίην πάλιν > ΄ aA / A > t/ a 9. MF, ἀφίκηται, TH κοιλίῃ νοῦσον ἐποίησεν: ἣν δ᾽ ἄλλῃ πῃ / ” lal 4 ‘\ 5 4 σ΄ τύχῃ, ἄλλῃ νοῦσον ποιέει, καὶ τάλλα οὕτως, ὥσπερ τοῦτο, τὸ | ἕτερον τῷ ἑτέρῳ νοῦσον ποιέει: καὶ κάλ- “ ,ὔ΄ an λιστον οὕτως εὐτρεπίζειν τὰ νοσεόμενα διὰ τῶν τὰς © an νούσους ποιεύντων: οὕτω yap ἂν κάλλιστα τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ νοσεομένου τις ἰῷτο. Τὸ δὲ σῶμα αὐτὸ ἑωυτῷ τωὐτόν ἐστι καὶ ἐκ τῶν αὐτῶν σύγκειται, ὁμοίως δὲ συνεχόντων, καὶ τὰ ἊΝ cal Xx , Ν Ν / Ν Ν σμικρὰ αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ μεγάλα καὶ τὰ κάτω καὶ τὰ A ‘\ » ’΄ A 4 > ‘\ ἄνω: Kat εἴ τις βούλεται τοῦ σώματος ἀπολαβὼν uA lal 4 / A ‘\ A μέρος κακῶς ποιέειν TO σμικρότατον, πᾶν TO σῶμα > A , > = ‘ ΄ “ αἰσθήσεται τὴν πεῖσιν, ὁποίη ἄν τις ἢ, διὰ τόδε ὅτι τοῦ σώματος τὸ σμικρότατον πάντα ἔχει, ὅσα περ ‘ Ν aA A » ἣν» ἊΝ καὶ τὸ μέγιστον: τοῦτο δ᾽ ὁποῖον ἄν τι πάθῃ τὸ σμι- κρότατον, ἐπαναφέρει πρὸς τὴν ὁμοεθνίην ἕκαστον Ν Ν ε A » ΄ », Ν > Ν πρὸς τὴν ἑωυτοῦ, ἤν τε κακόν, HV τε ἀγαθὸν ἢ" καὶ ὃ Ν a ἊΝ 0.9 ΄ Natey, ε ΝΟ ΨΜ lal la ταῦτα καὶ ἀλγέει καὶ ἥδεται ὑπὸ ἔθνεος τοῦ σμι- / A ἵν A » κροτάτου TO σῶμα, OTL EV τῷ σμικροτάτῳ πάντ᾽ ἔνι τὰ μέρεα, καὶ ταῦτα ἐπαναφέρουσιν ἐς τὰ σφῶν A [2 Ν > αὐτῶν ἕκαστα, καὶ ἐξαγγέλλουσι πάντα. 2. Φύσις δὲ τοῦ σώματος, ἀρχὴ τοῦ ἐν ἰητρικῇ 20 PLACES IN MAN turned away from the cavity, moves away all at once to the head, and when it arrives in the head, not finding room in the vessels there, flows anywhere it can, both all about the head and into the brain [through the fine bone]; some of it goes into the bone, some through the fine bone to around the brain. If it goes back to the cavity, it produces disease in the cavity; if it happens to go somewhere else, it produces disease there. Elsewhere it is just the same, one part produces disease in another. In view of this, it is best to set diseases right by means of the factors that pro- duce them; for in this way you can best treat the source of diseases.* The body is uniform throughout and is composed of the same things, connected in the same way, the small parts and the large, those lower down and those higher up. And if someone wishing to harm the body should take away some part, even the smallest, the whole body will experience the hurt, of whatever sort it be, because the smallest part of the body has everything that the greatest part has. Anything the smallest part experiences, either good or bad, it passes on to its related part, each to its own particular relative. For this reason, a person experiences both pain and pleasure from the smallest members of his body, since all parts are present in the smallest, and these smallest parts pass on their experience to each of their own, and inform them of everything. 2. The nature of the body is the beginning point of 4 See chapter 31 below. b Te. structure and function. 1 Del. Ermerins. 2 Potter: οὐκ ἐχόντων (-τος) AV. 21 280 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ANOPQTION λόγου: πρῶτον διατέτρηται 7 ἐσακούομεν: τὰ μὲν Ἂς ἣν ἊΝ 3 / 4 > > 4 »Μ an yap περὶ τὰ ὦτα πέριξ κενεά, οὐκ εἰσακούει ἄλλο ἢ ΄ ἈΝ Ὁ , Ψ > oN Ν A ΄] > ψόφον καὶ ἰαχήν: 6 τι δ᾽ av διὰ τῆς μήνιγγος ἐς τὸν ἐγκέφαλον ἐσέλθῃ, TovTo! διαφραδέως ἀκούεται ἊΝ ΄ὔ tal lal ar ταύτῃ" καὶ μόνη τρῆσις διὰ τῆς μήνιγγός ἐστι τῆς περὶ τὸν ἐγκέφαλον περιτεταμένης. κατὰ δὲ τὰς ῥῖνας τρῆμα μὲν οὐκ ἔνεστιν, σομφὸν δέ, οἷον / ἊΣ Ν A Ἂν 4 > 4 a σπόγγια: καὶ διὰ τοῦτο διὰ πλείονος ἀκούει ἢ > , ‘\ ἊΝ Ν 4 c > Ν A ὀσφραίνεται: κατὰ πολὺ yap σκίδναται ἡ ὀδμὴ τῆς ὀσφρήσιος. Καὶ ἐς τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς φλέβια λεπτὰ ἐς τὴν ὄψιν lal Ν A / ἴω ἐκ τοῦ ἐγκεφάλου διὰ τῆς μήνιγγος τῆς περιεχούσης φέρονται: ταῦτα δὲ τὰ φλέβια τὴν ὄψιν τρέφουσι τῷ lal “- A A a ὑγρῷ τῷ καθαρωτάτῳ τῷ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐγκεφάλου, ἐς ὃ ΝΞ ΄ 5 A | 3 va A Ν Ν καὶ ἐμφαίνεται ἐν τοῖσιν | ὀφθαλμοῖσιν: ταῦτα δὲ τὰ φλέβια καὶ ἀποσβεννύασι τὰς ὄψεις ὅταν ξηρανθῶ- / Ἂς tal > ε ἊΝ 5 Ν σιν. μήνιγγες δὲ τρεῖς εἰσιν ai τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς / ¢ Ν 5 , / ε δὲ ὃ Ν φυλάσσουσαι, ἡ μὲν ἐπάνω παχυτέρη, ἡ δὲ διὰ 4 ὯΝ «ς Ν ΄ ἊΝ ¢ Ἂν ¢ ἊΝ μέσου λεπτοτέρη, ἡ δὲ τρίτη λεπτὴ ἡ τὸ ὑγρὸν φυλάσσουσα: τούτων ἡ μὲν ἐπάνω καὶ παχυτέρη ΦΈΡΟΝ ἐλ Ay: ε δὲ ὃ Ν / > ΄ ὃ Ξ νοσέει"“ ἣν κωφωθῇ: ἡ δὲ διὰ μέσου ἐπικίνδυνος αὕτη καί, ὅταν ῥαγῇ, ἐξίσχει οἷον κύστις: ἡ δὲ τρίτη ἣ λεπτοτάτη πάμπαν ἐπικίνδυνος, ἡ τὸ ὑγρὸν 4 4 Ν 4 > Ν A > 4 φυλάσσουσα. μήνιγγες δὲ δύο εἰσὶ τοῦ ἐγκεφάλου" ἡ λεπτὴ οὐκέτι ἰατὴ" ἐπὴν τρωθῇ. 3. Φλέβες δὲ περαίνουσι μὲν ἐς τὴν κορυφὴν διὰ τῆς σαρκὸς ἔχουσαι πρὸς τὸ ὀστέον: φέρονται δὲ διὰ τῆς σαρκός, δύο μὲν ἐκ τῆς κορυφῆς κατ᾽ ἰθὺ ἣ 22 PLACES IN MAN medical reasoning. Now first, the meningeal membrane is perforated at the point through which we hear, for the emptiness all around the ear only hears sounds and shouts, whereas what goes through the membrane into the brain is perceived distinctly. This is the only perfora- tion through the membrane that covers the brain. In the region of the nostrils there is no perforation, but a kind of porousness, like a sponge; for this reason a person hears over a greater distance than he is able to smell, since odours are thoroughly broken up on their way to the organ of smell. To the eyes: narrow vessels lead to the pupil from the brain through the membrane that encloses it. These ves- sels nourish the pupil with purest moisture from the brain, and it is in this moisture that the image appears in the eyes. The same vessels also extinguish the pupils if they dry out. There are three membranes protecting the eye: a thicker one on the surface, a thinner one at the intermediate position, a third fine one that protects the moisture. Of these, the thicker one on the surface becomes ill if it is dulled. The one in the intermediate position is vulnerable, and when it tears it protrudes like a bladder. The third and finest membrane is extremely vul- nerable, i.e. the one that protects the moisture. Of the brain, there are two membranes; the fine one cannot be healed, when once injured. 3. There are vessels that have their terminus at the vertex of the head and that pass through the tissue close to the bone. Two run through the tissue in a straight line 1 τοῦτο om. V. 2 Potter: νοῦσος AV. 3 R: ἡ αὐτὴ AV. 23 282 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN TON KATA ANOPOTION e > 4 , Ν A > ἊΝ αἱ ὀφρύες συγκλείονται καὶ τελευτῶσιν ἐς τοὺς καν- θ Ν A > a 1 ΄ δὲ ΓΤ ΤῸΝ A a > τ ovs τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν," μία δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς κορυφῆς ἐς τὴν ῥῖνα φέρεται καὶ σχίζεται ἐς τὸν χόνδρον τῆς ῥινὸς ἑκάτερον: ἄλλαι δύο φλέβες παρὰ τοὺς κροτάφους φέρονται ἐν μέσῳ τῶν κροτάφων καὶ τῶν ὦτων, at / Ν 35 \ 4 ere lal Ν πιέζουσι τὰς ὄψεις καὶ σφύζουσι αἰεί: μοῦναι γὰρ αὗται οὐκ ἄρδουσι τῶν φλεβῶν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀποτρέπεται a e 9 ἐξ αὐτῶν τὸ αἷμα“ τὸ δ᾽ ἀποτρεπόμενον ἀποσυμ- βουλεύει τῷ ἐπιρρέοντι: καὶ τὸ μὲν ἀποτρεπόμενον 3 τὸ δ᾽ ἄνωθεν ἐπιρρέον βουλόμενον ἄνω χωρέειν, / ΄ὔὕ an > lal > 4 i“ Ν βουλόμενον κάτω χωρέειν, ἐνταῦθα ὠθεύμενά τε καὶ > ΄ Ν », Ν 4 Ν ἀναχεόμενα πρὸς ἄλληλα καὶ κυκλούμενα, σφυγμὸν παρέχουσι τοῖσι φλεβίοισιν. Ἢ δὲ ὄψις τῷ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐγκεφάλου ὑγρῷ τρέφεται: ὅταν δέ τι τοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν φλεβῶν λάβῃ, τῇ ῥύσει ταράσσεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐμφαίνεται ἐς αὐτὸ καὶ προκι- ΄ὔ / 2 > > lal Ν Ἂς e ΕΣ 5 / νέεσθαι δοκέει ἐν αὐτῷ τοτὲ μὲν οἷον εἴδωλον ὀρνί- θων, τοτὲ δὲ οἷον φακοὶ μέλανες, καὶ τἄλλα οὐδὲν ἀτρεκέως κατ᾽ ἀληθείην δύναται ὁρᾶν. ἄλλαι δύο φλέβες ἐν μέσῳ τῶν TE ὦτων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων φλεϊβῶν, at φέρονται ἐς τὰ ὦτα, καὶ πιέζουσι τὰ ὦτα: ἄλλαι δύο φλέβες ἐκ τῆς συγκλείσεως τοῦ ὀστέου ἐς τὰς ἀκοὰς φέρονται. Αἱ δὲ κάτω τοῦ σώματος τετραμμέναι, δύο μὲν φλέβες παρὰ τοὺς τένοντας τοῦ τραχήλου, φέρονται δὲ καὶ παρὰ τοὺς σπονδύλους καὶ τελευτῶσιν ἐς τοὺς νεφρούς: αὗται δὲ καὶ ἐς τοὺς ὄρχιας περαίνουσιν, Ν “ : , - ") “ και OTAV αυται πονήσωσιν, ALLA οὐρέει ὥνθρωπος. 24 PLACES IN MAN from the vertex to where the eyebrows meet, and end at the corners of the eyes. One runs from the vertex to the nose, and divides to each side of the nasal cartilage. Two other vessels pass (from the vertex of the head) along the temples, between the temples and the ears; these com- press the eyes and are always throbbing, for they are the only vessels that do not dispense their moisture, so that the blood is turned back out of them; on turning back it clashes with the new blood that is flowing to them; and the blood that turns back tries to flow up the vessel, while the new blood that is coming from above tries to flow down the vessel, and both currents, thrust forward, pour- ing out against one another, and moving in a circle, pro- duce a pulsation in the vessels. The pupil is nourished by moisture from the brain; if it takes up anything from the vessels, it is disturbed by this afflux, and the image does not appear normally in it, but something seems to dance before it, sometimes like the image of birds and sometimes like black specks, and oth- erwise it is not able to see anything clearly according to reality. Two other vessels, located between the ears and the pair of vessels mentioned above, pass to the ears and press on them. Two other vessels run from the (sagittal) suture to the organ of hearing. Other vessels are directed down through the body. Two vessels run beside the tendons of the neck and along the vertebrae, to end at the kidneys; these also terminate at the testes; and when they are afflicted, the person lV: ἐς τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τῶν κανθῶν A. 2V: φλέγμα A. 3 ἄνω x. Zwinger in margin: ἀποχωρέειν AV. 25 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ ἄλλαι δύο φλέβες ἀπὸ τῆς κορυφῆς φέρονται ἐς Ν », ‘ ἣν ἂν > Lal 4 BA τοὺς @pous, καὶ δὴ καὶ ὠμιαῖαι καλέονται. ἄλλαι , , DN r A ν᾿ ΝΎ ΩΝ » A δύο φλέβες ἀπὸ τῆς κορυφῆς Tapa τὰ ὦτα ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ τραχήλου ἑκατέρωθεν ἐς τὴν κοίλην φλέβα καλεομένην φέρονται. ἡ δὲ κοίλη φλὲψ 4 \ ε e > 4 / ‘ ᾿ς περαίνεται μὲν ὡς ὁ οἰσοφάγος, πέφυκε δὲ μεταξὺ ἴων / A A > 4 4 Ν ΩΝ τοῦ τε βρόγχου καὶ τοῦ οἰσοφάγου: φέρεται δὲ διὰ τῶν φρενῶν καὶ διὰ τῆς καρδίης καὶ μεταξὺ τῶν φρενῶν, καὶ σχίζεται ἐς τοὺς βουβῶνας καὶ ἐς τοὺς μηροὺς ἐντός, καὶ τὰς διασφαγὰς ἐν τοῖσι μηροῖσι ποιέεται, καὶ ἐς τὰς κνήμας φέρεται ἐντὸς παρὰ τὰ σφυρά: αὗται καὶ ἄκαρπον ποιέουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον 3 A a ὅταν ἀποτμηθῶσιν, ai καὶ ἐς τοὺς μεγάλους δακτύ- λους τελευτῶσιν. ἐκ δὲ τῆς κοίλης φλεβὸς ἀποπέ- φυκεν ἐς τὴν χεῖρα τὴν ἀριστερήν" φέρεται δ᾽ ὑπο- κάτω τοῦ σπληνὸς ἐς τὴν λαπάρην τὴν ἀριστερήν, [4 ε Ν > / ‘ A > 4 Ν Ν ὅθεν ὁ σπλὴν ἀποπέφυκε διὰ τοῦ ἐπιπλόου, καὶ τὴν 3 4 3 > Ν ’ > 4 Ν ἀποτελεύτησιν ἔχει ἐς τὸν κίθαρον: ἀποπέφυκε δὲ x ‘\ / Ν 4 A“ > , , κατὰ τὰς φρένας, καὶ ξυμβάλλει τῇ ὠμιαίῃ κάτω | τάμνεται τοῦ ἄρθρου τοῦ ἀγκῶνος, καὶ τοῦ σπληνὸς “ Ν yy > Ν Ἂς Ν 5 ον ’ > αὕτη: καὶ ἄλλη ἐς τὴν δεξιὴν TOV αὐτὸν τρόπον ἀπο- πέφυκεν ἀπὸ τῆς κοίλης.5 κοινωνέουσι δὲ πᾶσαι αἱ ΄ Ν / > ε ΄ ε Ν Ν ΄, φλέβες καὶ διαρρέουσιν ἐς ἑωυτάς: αἱ μὲν γὰρ σφί- σιν ἑωυταῖς ξυμβάλλουσιν, αἱ δὲ διὰ τῶν φλεβίων » / > \ a lal a 7 Ἂς τῶν διατεταμένων ἀπὸ τῶν φλεβῶν, at τρέφουσι τὰς σάρκας, ταύτῃ διαρρέουσι πρὸς ἑωυτάς. 4. Καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν φλεβῶν ὅ τι ἂν νόσημα γένηται, eas xv Ν A , a“ Ν A ῥᾷόν ἐστιν ἢ ἀπὸ TOV νεύρων: διαρρεῖ yap σὺν TO 26 PLACES IN MAN passes blood in his urine. Two other vessels run from the vertex of the head to the shoulders, and are in fact called “shoulder vessels”. Two other vessels run from the vertex of the head, past the ears, through the front of the neck on each side, and into what is called the “hollow vessel” (vena cava). The hollow vessel takes the same course as the oesophagus, and is situated between the wind-pipe and the oesophagus. It passes over the surface of the diaphragm and the heart, between the halves of the diaphragm, and divides towards the groins and the insides of the thighs; it forms branches in the thighs and passes below the knee on the inside past the ankle; these vessels make a person sterile if they are cut, and they end at the large toes. From the hollow vessel there is a branch to the left arm: it passes beneath the spleen to meet the left flank at the point from which the spleen grows out along the omentum, and has its termination by entering the chest: it reappears on the other surface of the diaphragm, and finally joins the shoulder vessel below the elbow joint; this vessel is used for phlebotomy of the spleen. Another vessel branches to the right from the hollow vessel in the same way. All vessels communicate and flow into one another: for some join one another directly, while others join small vessels coming from the vessels that nourish the tissues and in this way flow into one another. 4. Any disease that arises from the vessels is easier than one that arises from the cords, for it flows away with 'ν: ἀγκῶνος A. 2 Foes in note 14, after Calvus’ de cava vena: κοιλίης AV. 27 284 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ ε A A > 4 5 Lal Ν Ν > > 4 ὑγρῷ τῷ ἐνεόντι ἐν τῇσι φλεψὶ καὶ οὐκ ἀτρεμίζει: Ν ε ΄ al Ν 3 ε a > > lal | καὶ ἡ φύσις τῇσι φλεψὶν ἐν ὑγρῷ ἐστιν ἐν τῇσι / x Ν lal tA , > Ν 3 4 Ἂς σαρξί. τὰ δὲ νεῦρα ξηρά τέ ἐστι καὶ ἀκοίλια, καὶ Ν A 5 / Ψ» Ν ΄ Ν ἧς πρὸς τῷ ὀστέῳ πεφύκασιν, καὶ τρέφονται δὲ τὸ Lal 5 A A > , 4 Ν Ν > Ν. » πλεῖστον ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀστέου, τρέφονται δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκός, καὶ τὴν χροιὴν καὶ τὴν ἰσχὺν μεταξὺ τοῦ ΄ \ A ‘ 5 ὀστέου καὶ τῆς σαρκὸς πεφύκασι, καὶ ὑγρότερα μέν εἰσι τοῦ ὀστέου καὶ σαρκοειδέστερα, ξηρότερα δ᾽ Ν vn 4 Ν 4 4 εἰσὶν ἢ al σάρκες καὶ ὀστοειδέστερα: νόσημα δ᾽ 6 TL “Δ 5 3 ἃς 2 CS, 4 Ν 5 , > lal av ἐς αὐτὰ ἔλθῃ, pwvvuTat τε Kal ἀτρεμίζει Ev TO 2 A ἣν ΄ > » δ΄ 7 ΄ ih ΣΤῚΣ αὐτῷ, καὶ χαλεπόν ἐστιν ἐξάγειν: μάλιστα δ᾽ ἐσέρ- χονται τέτανοί τε καὶ ἄλλα, ad’ ὧν τρόμος TO σῶμα , Ἂν λαμβάνει καὶ τρέμειν ποιέει. 5. Τὰ δὲ νεῦρα πιέζουσι τὰ ἄρθρα, παρατεταμένα ͵΄ > xo \ A > ΄ \ ΄ » τέ εἰσι παρ᾽ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα: ἰσχύουσι δὲ μάλιστα ἐν ἐκείνοισι τοῦ σώματος καὶ αἰεὶ παχύτατά ἐστιν, ἐν a A ΄ ΄ \ δ οἷσι τοῦ σώματος αἱ σάρκες ἐλάχισταΐ εἰσι. καὶ τὸ μὲν σῶμα πᾶν ἔμπλεον νεύρων: περὶ δὲ τὸ πρόσ- Ἂς Ν Ν > » a > NFS) ὠπον καὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν οὐκ ἔστι νεῦρα, ἀλλὰ ἶνες παρόμοιαι νεύροις μεταξὺ τοῦ τε ὀστέου καὶ τῆς σαρκὸς λεπτότεραι καὶ στερεώτεραι, αἱ δὲ νευρο- κοίλιοι. 6. Αἱ κεφαλαὶ ῥαφὰς ἔχουσιν, αἱ μὲν τρεῖς, αἱ δὲ / » 3 τέσσαρας: αἱ μὲν τέσσαρας ἔχουσαι, κατὰ τὰ ὦτα (- ΄ὔ fi τ / » » » ἑκατέρωθεν ῥαφή, ἄλλη ἔμπροσθεν, ἄλλη ἐξόπισθεν τῆς κεφαλῆς, οὕτω μὲν ἡ τὰς τέσσαρας ἔχουσα: ἡ Ν Ν A \ 3 δὲ τὰς τρεῖς, κατὰ τὰ ὦτα ἑκατέρωθεν, καὶ ἔμπροσ- θεν: ὥσπερ δὲ ἡ τὰς τέσσαρας ἔχουσα, οὐ δια- 28 PLACES IN MAN the moisture present in the vessels, and does not remain fixed. The home of vessels is in the moisture in the tis- sues. Cords, on the other hand, are dry and lack a lumen, and they grow next the bone; they receive most of their nourishment from the bone, and also some from the tis- sues; cords are in colour and strength midway between bone and tissue; they are moister than bone and more fleshy, but drier than tissue and more osseous. Any dis- ease that enters the cords is severe and settles in one place, and it is difficult to drive out; the most frequent examples are tetanus and similar diseases, as the result of which trembling seizes the body and makes it shake. 5. The cords exert pressure on the joints, and they are present over the whole body. They have the greatest strength and are invariably thickest in the parts of the body where the fleshy parts are least. The whole body is quite full of cords; around the face and head, however, there are no cords, but instead fibers similar to cords, nar- rower and more rounded, midway between bone and muscle: they are the “hollow cords”. 6. Skulls have sutures, some of them three, others four. In those with four, there is one suture in the region of the ears on each side, another at the front, and another behind: thus the head has four. The skull with three sutures has them by the ears and at the front. Here, as in the skull with four sutures, there is no joining suture. 29 286 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ 7 > ‘\ vas ε 7 e vA ’ > Ν Ἂν πέφυκεν οὐδὲ ταύτῃ ῥαφή: ὑγιεινότεροι δ᾽ εἰσὶ τὴν Ν G ἣν "2 ε ἂν y+ > lal κεφαλὴν οἱ τὰς πλείονας ῥαφὰς ἔχοντες. EV τῇσι > , ὃ ΄ 1 Ν 3 ΄ See ΄ A ὀφρύσι διπλόον" τὸ ὀστέον, καὶ ἡ σύγκλεισις TOV » ἴω » Ἂς tal γενύων ἔν τε | τῷ γενείῳ μέσῳ Kal ἄνω πρὸς TH κεφαλῇ. σπονδύλους οἱ μὲν πλείονας, οἱ δὲ ἐλάσ- σονας ἔχουσιν" καὶ οἱ μὲν πλείονας ἔχοντες, δυοῖν 5, 3, A ἴω δέοντας εἴκοσιν ἔχουσι, σὺν τοῖσι δ᾽ ἐσχάτοισιν ” ΄ > χὰ ε Ν » Ν A ag ε δὲ εἴκοσίν εἰσιν, ὧν οἱ μὲν ἄνω πρὸς τῇ κεφαλῇ," οἱ δὲ 4 Ν A Ν ε 4 + A κάτω πρὸς TH ἕδρῃ. πλευραὶ ἑπτά: ἄρθρα τῶν πλευ- ρέων, τὰ μὲν ὄπισθεν τοῦ σώματος πρὸς τοὺς σπον- δύλους, τὰ δ᾽ ἔμπροσθεν ἐν τῷ στέρνῳ πρὸς ἑωυτάς. KAnioes ἄρθρα ἔχουσι, τὰ μὲν ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ στέρνου ‘\ lal » Ν \ κατὰ τὸν βρόγχον, κατὰ ταῦτα ἤρθρωνται: τὰ δὲ 3ι ἃ πρὸς τοὺς ὥμους κεκλιμένα πρὸς τὰς πλάτας, αἱ ἐπὶ a » ΞΔ ΄ ε δὲ ΄ Ν Ν τοῖς ὦμοις αἰεὶ" πεφύκασιν. αἱ δὲ πλάται πρὸς τὰ al ", 4> / CREA. Vi. ΄ Sg Ss γυῖα npOpwvrar,* ἐπιβάλλουσαι ἐπὶ TO ὀστέον TO EV Lal Ν ἣν τῷ γυίῳ. παρὰ δὲ τὸ ὀστέον περόναι δύο παρήκου- ε Ἂς ” ε ὮΝ > ’ὔ’ aA Ν Ν 4 ow, ἡ μὲν ἔνδοθεν, ἡ δὲ ἐκτός, ai πρὸς Tas πλάτας τῷ ὀστέῳ προσπεφυκυῖαι ἤρθρωνται. ΄ δ 5 Pes A ΄ Ν ΄ ” Κάτω δ᾽ ἐν τῷ ἀγκῶνι, κάτω μὲν περόνῃ ἤρθρων- ται κάτω πεφυκυῖα, ἄνω δὲ" σμικρῷ τῆς περόνης ἐς τὸν ἀγκῶνα, τό τε ὀστέον καὶ ἡ περόνη ἐς τὸ αὐτὸ ’ ", > A 4 , συμβάλλοντα ἄρθρον ἐν τῷ κυβίτῳ ποιέουσιν. παρὰ τὸν πῆχυν δὲ περόναι παρήκουσι λεπταὶ πάνυ ὮΝ e Ν 4 », ε ‘ / / Ν Ν τεσσάαρεές, Al μεν δύο ανω, Ab δὲ δύο κατω᾽ και προς ΕΑ: διῆλθον Ν. 2 Froben: τῇ ἕδρῃ τῆς κεφαλῆς AV. 3 ὥμ. αἰεὶ V: ἄρθροις A. 1 τὰ δὲ πρὸς τοὺς ὠμοὺς add. V. 30 PLACES IN MAN People have better health in the head who have the greater number of sutures. In the eyebrows the bone is double. The symphysis of the two halves of the jaw is in the middle of the chin, and this bone articulates above, next the head. Some individuals have a greater number of vertebrae, others less; those with the greater number have eighteen; with the ones at the ends, that makes twenty, of which one is at the top next the head, and one at the bottom in connection with the seat. Seven ribs: the ribs articulate at the back of the body with the vertebrae, at the front at the breast-bone with one another. The collar-bones have joints in the middle of the breast-bone by the windpipe, where they are fastened to one another, and in the shoulders, where they rest against the blades, which are always present on the shoulders. The shoulder- blades articulate with the limbs, lying next the bone in the limb. Alongside the bone (head of the humerus) are two processes—one on the inside (coracoid process) and one on the outside (acromion)—which, being joined to the shoulder-blades by bone, form the articulation. Lower down in the bend of the elbow: on the lower side articulation is to a process growing on the lower side (olecranon), on the upper side, articulation occurs, a little above the process, into the elbow (olecranon fossa); by uniting, the bone and the process form a joint at the elbow. Alongside the forearm are four very slight pro- cesses, two on the upper side, two on the lower side: at °KatTw πεφυκυῖα, ἄνω δὲ A: κατὰ TO πεφυκὸς κοιλανῶδες V. 31 288 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ A ἴων 32) “ μὲν τὸν ἀγκῶνα δύο περόναι πεφυκυῖαι ἄνω ἐκ τοῦ ὀστέου πεφύκασιν, αὗται σὺν τῷ ὀστέῳ πεφυκυῖαι \ a lal > / A 5 > ἂν; , παρὰ TO τοῦ ὀστέου ἄρθρον ἤρθρωνται ἐς TO κύβι- τον" αἱ δὲ κάτω κείμεναι καὶ ἐντὸς κεκλιμέναι, αὗται 5 4 4 Ν Ν / Ν ἀμφότεραι ξυμβάλλουσαι πρὸς τὴν περόνην τὴν ἄνωθεν ἀπὸ τοῦ γυίου φερομέϊνην, ἐντὸς τοῦ γυίου ἤρθρωνται, καὶ περόνην καλευμένην ποιέουσιν, e ε a ΄ 5 a / 5 , αὗται ἑωυταῖς ξυμβάλλουσαι ἐν τῷ κυβίτῳ ἐντός. κάτω δὲ πρὸς τὴν χεῖρα τὸ ὀστέον ἄρθρον ἔχει: αἱ δὲ περόναι ταύτῃ ἁπαλαὶ ἐοῦσαι, αἱ μὲν δύο οὐκ 5 7 3 Ἂς A ε 9 A: Ν ¢ 4 Ἦν A ἐξήκουσιν ἐς τὸ ἄρθρον, ἡ δ᾽ ἄνω καὶ ἡ κάτω σὺν TO ὀστέῳ ἤρθρωνται πρὸς τὴν χεῖρα. αἱ δὲ χεῖρες + 5 4 (4 Ἂς > , Ν (4 Ν ἄρθρα ἔχουσι πολλά: ὅσα γὰρ ὀστέα πρὸς ἑωυτὰ ἢ oe A / / συμβάλλουσι, πάντα ἄρθρα ποιέουσιν. δάκτυλοι ἄρθρα ἔχουσι, ἕκαστος τρία, ἕν μὲν ὑπὸ τῷ ὄνυχι ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ τε ὄνυχος καὶ τοῦ κονδύλου, ἄλλο ἐν τῷ - », κονδύλῳ, ἣ καὶ ξυγκάμπτουσι τοὺς δακτύλους, ἄλλο τρίτον, ἣ ὁ δάκτυλος ἀπὸ τῆς χειρὸς ἀποπέφυκεν. Ἔν δὲ τοῖσιν ἰσχίοισιν ἄρθρα δύο εἰσὶν αἱ κοτύ- λαι καλεύμεναι, καὶ οἱ μηροὶ ἐς ταῦτα ἐνήρθρωνται: παρὰ δὲ τοὺς μηροὺς περόναι δύο παρήκουσιν, ἡ x > 4 ε ’ > 4 Ν > Ἂν A > 4 μὲν ἐντός, ἡ δ᾽ ἐκτός, Kai ἐς TO ἄρθρον οὐδετέρη > ΄ 5ῷ,», ¢ # > Ν Ν “ee ΄ ἐξήκει οὐδ᾽ ἑτέρωθεν, ἀλλὰ πρὸς τῷ ὀστέῳ προσπε- φύκασι πρὸς τῷ μηρῷ. ὁ δὲ μηρὸς ἄνωθεν μέν, ἡ ἐς τὴν κοτύλην ἐμβάλλει, δίκραιός ἐστι τοιῇδε δικραιό- τητι: ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦ ἐντὸς κεκλιμένου τῶν δικραίων ἐπὶ “ 5 3 / ΄ A a TOU ἄκρου ἐπιπέφυκεν στρογγύλον καὶ λεῖον, ὃ καὶ 32 PLACES IN MAN the elbow two processes (lateral and medial epicondyles) grow above out of the bone; these are united with the bone (humerus) and articulate with the joint surface (trochlea and capitulum) into the elbow. The two pro- cesses lying on the lower side and inclining inward both (coronoid process with the trochlear notch and head of the radius) unite against the process from above, which comes from the limb (humerus), and articulate inside the limb; they form what is called the “process”; they unite with one another inside the elbow. Lower down the bone of the forearm articulates with the hand. The processes there are soft, and two of them are not at the joint (styloid processes?), while the upper one and the lower one artic- ulate with the bone towards the hand. The hands have many joints; for all the bones that unite with one another form joints. The fingers each have three joints: one beneath the nail and the knuckle, another at the knuckle where people bend their fingers, and another third one where the finger grows out of the hand. In the pelvis are two joints called “cups” (acetabula), and the thigh-bones are attached into these. Alongside the thigh-bones are two processes, one on the inside (lesser trochanter) and one on the outside (greater trochanter); neither of these is at the joint on either side, but are just attached against the thigh-bone. The upper end of the thigh-bone where it enters the cup is forked in the following way: on the end of the branch of the fork inclining inward grows a smooth sphere, which enters the 33 290 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ ΤΩΝ KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ ἐς τὴν κοτύλην ἐμβάλλει, τὸ δ᾽ ἕτερον τὸ ἔλασσον A 4 ἊΝ > Ν lal + > vA Ν 7 τῶν δικραίων TO ἐκτὸς μᾶλλον ἔξω ἐξέχει, Kal φαί- νεται ἐν τῷ πυγαίῳ κάτω, καὶ ἰσχίον καλέεται. πρὸς δὲ τὸ γόνυ τὸ ὀστέον τοῦ μηροῦ τοιόνδ᾽ ἐστὶ δίκραιον: τῷ δὲ δικραίῳ τούτῳ τὸ ὀστέον ἡ κνήμη ΄ - > ΄ 37} ” x καλεομένη οἷον ἐν γιγγλύμῳ ἐνήρμοσται: ἄνωθεν δὲ τοῦ ἐνηρμοσμένου ἡ μύλη ἐπίκειται, ἣ ἀποκωλύει ἐς τὸ ἄρθρον ἀναπεπτάμενον ἐσβῆναι τὴν ὑγρότητα τὴν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκός. παρὰ δὲ τὴν κνήμην περόναι δύο παρήκουσιν, ai κάτωθεν μὲν πρὸς τοῦ ποδὸς ἐς τὰ σφυρὰ τελευτῶσιν, ἄνωθεν δὲ πρὸς τοῦ γούνατος > 1 55:2 \ SY Ν δὲ Ν ὃ [οὐκ] ἐξήκουσι πρὸς τὸ ἄρθρον. πρὸς δὲ τὸν πόδα ε Τὰ Ἂς ἊΝ Ν », » Ν » ἡ κνήμη κατὰ τὰ σφυρὰ ἄρθρον ἔχει, καὶ ἄλλο κατώτερον | τῶν σφυρῶν: καὶ ἐν τοῖσι ποσὶν ἄρθρα πολλά, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐν τῇσι χερσίν: ὅσα γὰρ τὰ ὀστέα, τοσαῦτα καὶ τὰ ἄρθρα, καὶ ἐν τοῖσι δακτύ- λοισι τῶν ποδῶν τὸν ἀριθμὸν ἴσα κατὰ τὰ αὐτά. ” XN ‘\ > A 4 “4 > Αρθρα δὲ πολλὰ ἐν τῷ σώματι σμικρά, οὐχ ὁμοίως πᾶσιν, ἀλλὰ ἄλλα ἄλλοις: ταῦτα δὲ τὰ 4 cal c / > ’ Ν ὔὕ ec γεγραμμένα πᾶσιν ὁμοίως εἰσίν, καὶ φλέβες at 4 Lal «ε / > 4 », / 4 γεγραμμέναι πᾶσιν ὁμοίως εἰσίν, ἄλλα τε φλέβιά εἰσιν ἄλλοις, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἄξια λόγου. ey mcd, A » / 9 Ν “ “ 7. Μύξα πᾶσιν ἔνεστι φύσει," καὶ ὅταν αὕτη καθαρὴ ἢ, ὑγιαίνουσι τὰ ἄρθρα, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο εὐκί- νητά ἐστιν, ὥστε ὀλισθαίνοντα πρὸς ἑωυτά. πόνος Ν Ν ΄ ’ὔὕ o A A Ν 4 δὲ καὶ ὀδύνη γίνεται, ὅταν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ὑγρασίη ! Del. Potter. 2A: Μύξαι πᾶσίν εἰσι φυσικαὶ V. 94 PLACES IN MAN cup; the other lesser outward branch of the fork extends further outward and can be seen in the buttock below; it is called the hip. Towards the knee the thigh-bone is also forked, and in this fork the bone called the shin-bone is fixed, as if in a hinge. Over the joint lies the knee-cap, which prevents moisture out of the tissues from entering the joint when it is in the open position. Alongside the shin-bone are two processes, which, at the lower end towards the foot, end by meeting the ankle-bones (lateral and medial malleolus), and, at the upper end towards the knee, are at the joint (head of the fibula and medial condyle of the tibia). At the foot the shin-bone articulates with the ankle-bones, and again below the ankle-bones (with the calcaneum). In the feet there are many joints, just as in the hands; for there are as many joints as there are bones (in the fingers), and in the same way they are equal in number in the toes. There are many small joints in the body, not the same in all, but different numbers in different individuals; the joints that have been described, however, are the same in all persons. So too the vessels that have been described are the same in all individuals; but there are small vessels that differ in different persons, but those are not worth discussing. 7. Fluid is present naturally in all the joints, and when it is clean the joints are healthy, and for this reason they move easily and their members slip smoothly over one another. Difficulty and pain arise when moisture flows 35 92 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ ε lal 4 lal 7 » ῥυῇ πονησάσης τι: πρῶτον μὲν πήγνυται TO ἄρθρον, Ν Ν € a wn Ν Lal ov yap ὀλισθηρὴ ἡ ὑγρότης ἡ ἐπερρυηκυῖα ἀπὸ τῆς / »” ο , Ἂς σαρκός: ἔπειτα, ὥστε πολλὴ λίην γενομένη, καὶ οὐκ ἀρδομένη ἐκ τῆς σαρκὸς ἀεί, ξηραίνεται, καὶ ὥστε Ἂς A 5» A fal δ, a πολλὴ ἐοῦσα καὶ OV χωρεῦντος τοῦ ἄρθρου ἐκρεῖ, A A A eo ‘A κακῶς TE πεπηγυῖα peTewpicer! τὰ νεῦρα, οἷσι TO ἄρθρον συνδέδεται, καὶ ἄδετα ποιέει καὶ διαλελυ- μένα. καὶ διὰ τοῦτο χωλοὶ γίνονται, καὶ ὅταν μὲν A A ΄ a “ Ν on τοῦτο μᾶλλον γίνηται, μᾶλλον, ὅταν δὲ ἧσσον, ἧσσον. 5 ,ὔ Ν ἊΣ 8. “Es δὲ τὴν κοιλίην καὶ τὰ ἐσθιόμενα καὶ τὰ a > Ν πινόμενα χωρέουσιν, ἐκ δὲ τῆς κοιλίης ives ἐς τὴν a lal κύστιν, ἣ διηθεῖ TO ὑγρόν, τεταμέναι εἰσίν. « i? x / ον ͵ὔ ἴω 9. Ῥόοι δὲ γίνονται καὶ διαψυχομένης τῆς σαρ- Ν ΄ Ν | ΄, NG Kos λίην καὶ διαϊθερμαινομένης καὶ ὑπερφλεγμαι- ΄ ID εὖ δὲ ὃ Ν Ν Ν A ὃς ε ΄ νούσης." poor δὲ διὰ μὲν τὸ ψῦχος γίνονται, ὁπόταν / / -“ e Ν ε 5 ἴω A Ἂς ¢ τόδε γένηται, ὅταν ἡ σὰρξ ἡ ἐν TH κεφαλῇ Kai αἱ ᾽ὔ 4 32, e 4 A φλέβες τεταμέναι ἔωσιν: αὗται, φριξάσης τῆς σαρ- Ν ἂν > Ν > ve Ν 3 ’ὕ KOS καὶ ἐς μικρὸν ἀφικνουμένης καὶ ἐκθλιψάσης, ἐκθλίβουσι τὴν ὑγρότητα, καὶ αἱ σάρκες ἅμα αὗται 3 fe 5 Ν 5 2. Ν ε a ἀντεκθλίβουσιν ἐς μικρὸν ἀφικνούμεναι. καὶ αἱ τρί- χες ἄνω ὀρθαὶ γίνονται ὥστε πάντοθεν ἅμα ἰσχυρῶς / > a “ na > A CLA EA ON ΄ πιεζόμεναι: ἐντεῦθεν 6 τι ἂν ἐκθλιβῇ, ῥεῖ ἡ ἂν τύχῃ. e a Ἂς A © 4 Ν ῥεῖ δὲ καὶ διὰ τὴν θερμότητα, ὅταν αἱ σάρκες ἀραιαὶ γινόμεναι διόδους ποιήσωσι, καὶ τὸ ὑγρὸν θερμαν- θὲν λεπτότερον γένηται (πᾶν γὰρ τὸ ὑγρὸν θερμαι- / / 4 A ‘\ ε A νόμενον λεπτότερον γίνεται) καὶ πᾶν ἐς TO ὑπεῖκον ῥεῖ. 36 PLACES IN MAN out of tissue that has been damaged in some way. First, the joint becomes fixed, since the moisture flowing into it from the tissue is not slippery. Then, as the amount of moisture is too great, and it is not continually renewed out of the tissue, it dries out, and as it is great in amount and the joint does not have room for it, it flows out of the joint, and, congealing badly, raises up the cords by which the joint is held together, and so unbinds and dissolves the joint. This is why persons become lame; when the process has taken place to a greater degree, more lame, when to a lesser degree, less lame. 8. Into the cavity passes what is eaten and drunk. From the cavity bands extend to the bladder, which filters the liquid. 9. Fluxes occur when the tissue is over-chilled, when it is over-heated, or when there is an excess of phlegm. Fluxes that arise from excessive cold occur when, any time there is over-chilling, the tissue in the head and the vessels are stretched tight: as the tissue shivers, contracts, and squeezes out what is in it, the vessels too squeeze out their moisture, and these tissues, contracting, simultane- ously squeeze back. Since there is great pressure on them from all sides at once, the hairs stand on end; the fluid squeezed out of this area flows wherever it chances to go. Fluxes also arise from excessive heat, when the tissues, on becoming rarefied, develop passages, and the moisture, being heated, becomes thinner (for every fluid becomes thinner on being heated) and all flows in the direction of least resistance. 1 τὸ ἄρθρον add. A. 2V: ὑποφλ- A. 37 294 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN ΤΩΝ KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ 4 ΄ ’ὔ Zz Ν Μάλιστα δ᾽ ὅταν λίην ὑπερφλεγμήνῃ, διὰ τόδε can ε ΄ὕ, ΄ 1 yA ΄ὕ “ a \ ῥεῖ: αἱ σάρκες inv’ ἔμπλεαι γενόμεναι ὅ τι ἂν μὴ δύνωνται χωρέειν, ῥεῖ τὸ ὑγρὸν τὸ μὴ δυνάμενον / can VV @eH ΄ 5 Ν AP Ὁ ΕΣ e χωρέεσθαι, pet δὲ ἣ av τύχῃ: ἐπὴν δὲ ἅπαξ εὔροοι at “ ζ eon » xn ῥοαὶ γένωνται, pet κατὰ" χωρίον ἡ av τύχῃ, ἔστ᾽ ἂν συμπιεχθῶσιν αἱ δίοδοι τοῦ ῥόου. δι᾽ ἰσχνότητα -΄ »“" ww »"». ὅταν τὸ σῶμα ξηρανθῇ' ὥστε γὰρ τὸ σῶμα κοινω- ΄ τ ν ὙΠ A ΄ ν oo» Ἂν ἴα a νέον αὐτὸ ἑωυτῷ διαλαμβάνει καὶ ἄγει, καθ᾽ ὅ τι ἂν - Ν 5 ΄ 5 > 3 Ν ΄ » δὲ > ὑγρὸν ἐπιτύχῃ, ἐς αὐτὸ" τὸ ξηρόν: ἄγειν δὲ ov χαλε- πὸν αὐτό ἐστιν, ὥστε τοῦ σώματος κενοῦ τε καὶ οὐ συνοιδέοντος ὑπὸ ἰσχνότητος. ὅταν δὲ τὰ κάτω \ ΄ Ν > 0 ε ΄ A ΑΝ Ney, ξηρὰ γένωνται, Ta δ᾽ ἄνω ὑγρά (μᾶλλον δὲ τὰ ἄνω ε , 5 , e Ν va ” / 4 > ὑγρά ἐστι τεύχεα, aL yap φλέβες ἄνω πλείονές εἰσιν a / ἢ κάτω, Kai al σάρκες ἐλάττονος ὑγρότητος δεόμε- ε 5 nw wr »” Ν A Ν ἴω “2 ναι αἱ ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ), ἄγει δὴ τὸ ξηρὸν τοῦ σώματος Ν » A ~~ e / Ν «“ Ν / os > » τὸ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑγρόν: καὶ ἅμα καὶ δίοδοί εἰσι τῷ » A ay A a ἄγοντι μᾶλλον ἢ τῷ ἀγομένῳ: Kai yap αὗται κερδαί- νουσιν ὥστε Enpat ἐοῦσαι, καὶ ἅμα καὶ τὰ ὑγρὰ πέφυκε κάτω χωρέειν, καὶ ἢν βραχέη τις ἀνάγκη γένηται. 10. Ῥόοι δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἑπτά: ὁ μὲν κατὰ A tA ς Ἂς Ν Ἂς > ε Ἂν; ἂν Ν > Tas ῥῖνας, ὁ δὲ κατὰ τὰ ὦτα, ὁ δὲ κατὰ τοὺς ὀφθαλ- μούς- οὗτοι οἱ Poor καταφανέες ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῖ- 5 A 5» Ν ΓῚ -" Ἂν; ,ὔ ε wn ε Ν σιν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν. ἐπὴν δ᾽ ἐς τὸν κίθαρον ῥυῇ ὑπὸ ,ὕ Ν , / Ν ea 5 Ἂς , ψύχεος, χολὴ γίνεται, μάλιστα δὲ ῥεῖ ἐς TOV κίθαρον I λίην A: αἱ ἣν μὲν V. 2 A. Anastassiou, Gnomon 52 (1980), p. 314: καὶ τὸ A. 38 PLACES IN MAN Most especially do fluxes arise on account of an excess of phlegm. The tissues becoming too full are not able to make room for it all, and whatever fluid they are not able to make room for flows wherever it chances to go. When the paths of the flux have once been well opened, it flows to any place it chances, until the passages are pinched in. Fluxes arising as the result of withering, when the body becomes dry: since the body communicates with itself, it divides and draws moisture, wherever it chances upon it, to the dryness. To draw the moisture is not difficult, as the body is hollow, and, on account of its withering, the tissue is not expanded so as to be tight. When the lower parts become dry, but the upper ones are moist (in the upper parts there is more moisture, for the vessels above are greater than those below, and the tissues of the head require less moisture), then obviously the dry part of the body draws moisture out of the head; besides, the pas- sages favour the area that is drawing over the one from which is being drawn, since they, being dry, gain in the exchange; furthermore, moisture naturally moves down- wards, even if it is subjected to this compulsion only briefly. 10. Seven fluxes from the head:* A. through the nos- trils; B. through the ears; C. through the eyes. These fluxes are, as may be clearly seen, from the head. D. When there is a flux to the chest on account of cold, bile is present. Usually such a flux occurs because there is 4 See Glands 11 for a similar series of seven fluxes from the head. 3 Joly: ἑωυτὼ (-τὸ) AV. 39 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ ig Ν 4 Ν / [2 »ἢ᾿, 4 > x ὑπὸ ψύχους διὰ τόδε, ὅτι εὔροον γίνεται ἐς TOV ᾽ “ > XN 4 e Ν Ν Lal βρόγχον, ὥστε οὐδὲ ξυγκεκαλυμμένον: ὑπὸ δὲ τοῦ ΄ὔ Ν ὯΝ » ἮΝ A Ν Ἂν A A ψύχους Kal κόπος ἔχει διὰ τοῦτο τοὺς ὑπὸ τῆς χολῆς ἐχομένους, ὅτι αἱ σάρκες, ὅταν χειμίη ἢ, οὐκ ἀτρε- , Ν. » 7 pilovow, ἀλλὰ σείονται, Kal σειόμεναι μοχθέουσι, καὶ κοπιῶσιν, ὥστε σειόμεναι ὥσπερ ἐν τῇσιν ὁδοι- » A © Ἂς ’ὔ πορίῃσιν: καὶ ἔμπυοι γίνονται, ὅταν ἐς τὸν κίθαρον ῥέῃ, καὶ φθισιῶντες. -΄ Ν / / Orav δ᾽ ἐς τὸν μυελὸν poos γένηται, φθίσις > & εἢ; ΄ “ δ᾽ », a > Ν ὃ ΄ ἀλαΐα" γίνεται. ὅταν δ᾽ ὄπισθεν ἐς τοὺς σπονδύλους ἊΝ Ὁ N ΄ Ἐς ὦ ΄ \ AQ, 2 \ Kal ἐς τὰς σάρκας ῥυῇ, ὕδρωψ, γίνεται, Kal τῷδ᾽ ἐστὶ ’΄ Ν ἣν » e Ν ΩΝ γιγνώσκειν, ξηρὰ τὰ ἔμπροσθεν, ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ « ta Ν ε 5 a Ν A > » at ῥῖνες καὶ οἱ ὀφθαλμοί: καὶ τοῖσιν ὀφθαλμοῖσι / > 7 Ν Ἂν 4 Ἂς ἂν γίνεται ἀμβλυώσσειν, καὶ χλωροὶ γίνονται καὶ τὸ ” A N > > , 2Q7 50» A \ ἄλλο σῶμα, καὶ οὐκ ἀποπτύει οὐδέν, οὐδ᾽ ἣν πολὺ LA “ Ἂν ε {ἢ γα Ν ἴων Ἂς 4 es ῥέῃ: ὅδε yap ὁ poos, διὰ τῆς σαρκὸς μέσης ῥέων a 3, “ ΕΣ » τῆς ὄπισθεν καὶ τῆς ἔμπροσθεν ἀπεστραμμένος, Ν ἤν δ τῷ , \ soe, ” ξηρὰ τὰ ἔμπροσθεν ποιέει, τὴν δ᾽ ὄπισθεν ἄρδει , aA \ \ ΄ DI σάρκα, Kal τὴν ἐντὸς μᾶλλον πρὸς τὴν κοιλίην, ἢ > Ν Ν Ν e ’ Ν aA Ν 5 Ν A > ἐκτὸς πρὸς τὴν ῥινόν: διὰ τοῦτο δὲ ἐκτὸς μᾶλλον ἢ 5 ἊΝ , Lal Ν ᾽’ὔ 4 ἐντὸς στερεώτερον TO σῶμα, καὶ στενωτέρας διατρή- > © lal ΙΝ, σιας ἔχει: ὥστε δὲ λεπταὶ ἐοῦσαι ξυμπιλέονται, καὶ ἀκέουσιν αὗται σφίσιν ἑωυταῖς, καὶ ῥόος οὐ δύναται ΄ 5. 0 ΄ > ΄ δέ > διὰ }5 Ν Ν ταύτῃ ἰέναι οὐδείς: εὐρύτεραι δέ“ εἰσιν αἱ ἐντὸς καὶ » “ λεπτότερα τὰ μεταξὺ ἔχουσαι. | ὁ δὲ ῥόος, ὥστε ad’ - ΄ Ν Ἂς Ν 3 ’ὔ », ΕΝ ὑψηλοτέρων, καὶ λεπτὰ τὰ ἀντικωλύοντα ἔχων, PEL Ν 4 Ν Ἂς cal καὶ πίμπλησιν ὑγρότητος τὰς σάρκας: τὰς ἀπὸ TOV 4 > A > Ν / ε ε ’ / σιτίων ἐς TO αὐτὸ χωρέουσα ἡ ὑγρότης διέφθαρται: 40 PLACES IN MAN free flow into the windpipe, since it is not closed on the top. From the cold, weariness too is felt in these patients, who suffer from bile, because their tissues, when it is win- tery, do not remain at rest, but shake, and in shaking labour and become weary, because they shake just as in walking. Internal suppurations occur when the flux is to the chest, and also consumptions. E. When a flux to the marrow occurs, an undetected consumption ensues. F. When there is a flux posteriorly to the vertebrae and the tissues, dropsy arises. This con- dition is to be recognized by the following: the front regions are dry, the head, nostrils and eyes; dullness of vision comes over the eyes, they become yellow-green, and so too does the rest of the body; the patient expecto- rates nothing, not even if the flux is great. For this flux, flowing through the middle of the tissue of the back, and turning away from the tissue in the front, leaves the front dry, but waters the tissue in the back, and more so what is inside next the cavity than what is outside towards the skin. Because of this the body is firmer outside than it is inside, and outside it has narrower channels; being fine, these channels are squeezed together and adhere to themselves, so that no flux can pass through them. Inside, on the other hand, the channels are wider and what is between them is less firm; the flux, then, coming from a higher level and encountering no firm resistance, flows and fills the tissues with moisture. As for the moistures from foods, the moisture as it arrives at the same place is 1 Foes in note 35, after Cornarius’ tabes occulta ac incon- spicua: ἄλλη AV. 2 Schubring: αἵδ᾽ εὐρ. τε AV. 4] ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ , ᾽ SEN ey ΟΝ A , My LING δἰ διεφθαρμένη δ᾽ αὐτὴ ὑπὸ τῆς συμμίξιος, καὶ TO ῥέον ‘ > ἴω > Ἂν ἴω la) 4, Ἂν A 4 σὺν αὐτῇ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς, τρέφουσι TO σῶμα: λίην δὲ πολλῷ ὑγρῷ αἱ σάρκες τρεφόμεναι καὶ νοσηλῷ θ ΄ 1 58 + Os) άλλουσαι" ὕδρωπος ἐμπλεαί εἰσιν. BY a INS (ey > ΄ N ͵΄ > ΄ Ἦν δ᾽ ὀλίγον ῥεύσῃ, ἰσχιάδα καὶ κέδματα ἐποίη- σεν, ἐπὴν ῥέον παύσηται: ὥστε γὰρ ὀλίγον ἐρρυη- κὸς καὶ πάντοθεν ὠθεύμενον ὑπὸ παντὸς κρέσσονος ἐόντος ὥστε ὀλίγον ἐόν, καὶ οὐκ ἔχον ἐπιρροὴν 472 » ΄ 5 ΄ 3 NS? > [kat|? ὥστε πάντοθεν ὠθεύμενον, ἐς τὰ ἄρθρα ἀπο- φυγὴν ποιέεται. γίνεται δὲ κέδματα καὶ ἰσχιάδες καὶ ἀπὸ τοιούτων νοσημάτων ὑγιῶν γινομένων" ὅταν Ἂς ἂν “7 4 e ἊΝ , A 4 TO μὲν νόσημα ποιέον ὑγιὲς γένηται, καταλειφθῇ δέ τι ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ καὶ μὴ ἢ αὐτῷ ἔξοδος, μήτ᾽ αὖ ἔσω ΄ 3 > Ν δέ lal ΄ > ΄ ΄ 5 Ν μήτε" ἐς τὸ δέρμα φῦμα ποιήσῃ ἐξιόν, φεύγει ἐς τὸ A 3, 3 3 ὑπεῖκον, ἐς τὰ ἄρθρα, Kai ἢ Kédpata ἢ ἰσχιάδα ἐποίησεν. vn Ν cal 11. Ἢν δὲ συνοιδήσωσιν ai ῥῖνες, Kal φλέγμα- τος ἔμπλεαι ἔωσιν συμπεπηγότος, τοῦτο χρὴ τὸ ᾿ * φλέγμα TO συμπεπηγὸς λεπτύνειν ἢ πυρίῃσιν, ἢ φαρμάκῳ, καὶ μὴ ἀποτρέπειν: ἣν γὰρ ἀποτρεφθὲν » (a 42 ἐξ, 4 No ΚΟΥ, , / , ἄλλῃ πῃ pevon, ταύτῃ TO ῥέον μέζονα νόσον ποιέοι. 12. Ὁπόταν δ᾽ ἐς τὰ ὦτα ῥέῃ, τὸ πρῶτον ὀδύνην ΄ ΄ N , , \ ΄ » » Ἃ παρέχει, βίῃ γὰρ χωρέει: πόνον δὲ παρέχει, ἔστ᾽ ἂν ἀποσυριγγωθῇ: ἐπὴν δὲ μάθῃ ῥεῖν, οὐκέτι πόνον ποιέει. τῷ ὑπὸ τῆς ὀδύνης ἐχομένῳ φάρμακον θερ- μαῖνον φύσει χλιαρὸν ποιήσαντα, διέντα νετώπῳ, ! τε λίην add. A. 2 Del. Littré. 42 PLACES IN MAN corrupted by being mixed together with the flux from the head, and these nourish the body—in fact, the tissues, over-nourished by the excessive moisture and swollen by its morbid part, are flooded with dropsy. G. If the flux is small in amount, it produces sciatica and disease in the joints (kedmata) after it has stopped; for inasmuch as the flow was slight and was forced back on all sides by everything being more powerful than it, the flux, being small and not profiting from any additional flux since it is forced back on all sides, makes an escape for itself into the joints. Disease of the joints and sciatica also arise from disorders like these after they have recov- ered. For when the active disease has gone away, but something is left behind in the tissue and has no way out, and it neither escapes back inside nor comes out and forms a tubercle in the skin, it flees in the direction of least resistance, i.e. to the joints, and it gives rise to either disease of the joints or sciatica. 11. If the nostrils swell shut and become filled with congealed phlegm, you must thin this congealed phlegm with vapour-baths or a medication, and take care not to turn it away; for if, on being turned away, the flux goes somewhere else, it produces a greater disease there. 12. When there is a flux to the ears, first it produces pain, for the flow is violent; this distress continues until the flux gains a pipe through which to escape; when flow is once established, there is no longer distress. For the patient afflicted with this pain warm a naturally warming medication, dissolve it in oil of bitter almonds, and infuse 3 ἔξω add. V. 4 Potter: παντὶ (-τῃ) AV. 43 298 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ > lal Ae, 4 4 a Ἂς 5 ἐγχεῖν, καὶ ὄπισθεν σικύην προσβάλλειν, ἣν τὸ ἀρι- a’ Ν lA στερὸν ἀλγέῃ, ἐς τὸ δεξιόν, καὶ | «ἣν τὸ δεξιόν, és>! Ν / Ν ΄ / > 3 ie aN g A TO σκαιόν: μὴ KaTaKpovew δέ, ἀλλ᾽ ws ἂν ἕλκῃ μοῦ- “Ἃ A ΄ A νον" ἣν δὲ μὴ πρὸς ταῦτα παύηται, ψύχοντα ἐγχεῖν ο >) φύσει ψυχρά, Kat φάρμακον mica: 6 τι ἂν κάτω ὑποχώρησιν ποιέῃ, ἄνω δὲ μή, ὥσπερ οὐδ᾽ ἀρήγει > / ἮΝ Ν. 5, ’΄ ἫΝ DEN Ἂν 5 A ες A ἐμέειν, Kal τὰ ἄλλα ψύχειν. Kal αἰεὶ δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ὑγιὲς * μὴ ποιέοντος τρόπου μεταλλάσσειν: Kal ἣν μὲν 3, » “Ἄ κάκιον ποιέῃ, ἔρχεο ἐς τὸ ὑπεναντίον: ἢν δὲ ῥέπῃ ἐς τὸ ὑγιές, τὸ πάμπαν μὴ ἀφελεῖν τι τῶν προσφερο- ΄ 21.515 A Ν A ” μένων, μηδ᾽ ἀποζευγῆσαι, μηδὲ προσθεῖναι ἄλλο τι. Ἂ 5 5 ΄ «7 ἣν δὲ σεσυριγγωμένον ἤδη ἢ, καὶ πεπυωμένος ῥέῃ ἰχὼρ πολὺς καὶ κακὸν ὀζόμενος, τοῦτο ὧδε ποιέειν" ΄ ὃ A ΄ A3 Ψ A Ν σπογγία δεύων ξηραίνων τῷ" φαρμάκῳ ξηρῷ πρὸς τὴν ἀκοὴν ὡς πελαστάτω προσθεῖναι, καὶ πρὸς τὰς ῥῖνας καθαρτήριον, ὅπως, τοῦ ἐς τὰ ὦτα ῥέοντος, 4 Ἂς \ 9 Ν καὶ μὴ ἐς τὴν κεφα- λὴν πάλιν ἀποχωρέῃ, νοσηλὸν ἐόν. πρόσθεν ἐς τὰς ῥῖνας φέρηται, 13. Ὅταν δ᾽ ἐς ὀφθαλμοὺς ῥεῦμα ἴῃ, φλεγμαί- νουσιν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καὶ οἰδέουσιν: τοῦτον χρὴ τῷ φαρμάκῳ ἢ τῷ ὑγρῷ ἢ τῷ ξηρῷ ἐν παστῷ ἰᾶσθαι: ἣν δ᾽ εὐθέως φλεγμήνωσι, μὴ ἔγχριε μηδέν, ἀλλ᾽ 7) κλύσαι" κάτω τῷ ἰσχυροτάτῳ, ἢ ἄλλῳ τινὶ ἀπισχνῆ- 6 μὴ ἔμετον ΄, EI Ν ἣν ΄, ες ΄ ΄ ποιήσῃς" ἣν δὲ οἷον λίθοι ὑποτρέχωσιν, φάρμακον ναι ὑποχωρητικῷ φαρμάκῳ ἀνακῶς, ! Aldina. 2 Mack after Cornarius’ converte: ἔχου AV. 3 Joly: ξηραίνοντι (τινὶ) AV. 4V: ἀποτρέπηται A. 44 PLACES IN MAN it into the ear. Also apply a cupping-instrument behind the ear; if the pain is in the left ear, on the right side, and <if in the right ear, then on> the left. Do not make inci- sions, but let the cup alone draw. If with this treatment the pain does not stop, cool some naturally cool substance and infuse it into the ear; let the patient drink a medica- tion that will stimulate a downward movement, but not an upward one, as it is not good for him to vomit; for the rest, cool. (Always change from a course of management that is not leading to recovery; if some measure is making things worse, move to its opposite; if the patient is inclining towards health, remove nothing whatsoever of what is being administered, nor discontinue anything, nor add anything new.) If a pipe has already formed, and purulent fluid is flowing out copious and ill-smelling, do the follow- ing. Moisten a sponge, and, drying it with a dry medica- tion, apply it as tightly as possible to the ear; then apply a cleaning medication to the nostrils, in order that what is flowing into the ears will be carried forward into the nose and not move back into the head, for it is peccant. 13. When there is a flux to the eyes, they fill with phlegm and swell up. You must treat this patient with a medication, either moistening or drying, in the form of a powder. If the eyes fill suddenly with phlegm, do not apply ointment, but either administer a good strong enema or reduce the patient's swelling with some other downwards-acting medication carefully, so as not to pro- voke vomiting. If what seem to be little stones run down 5 Mack after Foes’ note 40: καῦσαι AV. 6 Schubring: φυλασσόμενος AV. 45 300 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN TON KATA ANOPQTION > , “ A“ 4 », 4 Ν Ν ἐγχρίειν ὅ τι πλεῖστον δάκρυον ἄγειν μέλλει, καὶ τὸ ἄλλο σῶμα ὑγραίνοντα καὶ φλεγμαίνειν ποιέοντα, ¢ ε ΄ ε 5 Ν 4 Ν 5 Ὁ» ὡς ὑγρότεροι οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ γένωνται καὶ ἐκκεκλυσμέ- νοι, ὡς τὸ δάκρυον συμπεπηγὸς ὑποτρέχειν ποιέῃς. Ψ 5} Ἢ Ν > Ν Ν | Ν ve Ν ὅταν δ᾽ ἐς τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς κατὰ σμιϊκρὸν ῥέῃ, καὶ κνιπότητα παρέχῃ, τοῦτον ἐγχρίειν μαλθακώδει, ὅ τι 7 , 4 A Ve > 2; 5, Me μέλλει ξηραίνειν ἅμα καὶ δάκρυον ὀλίγον ἄγειν, Kat πρὸς τὰς ῥῖνας φάρμακον προσφέρειν ἢ ἑκάστης ε , av ἈΝ ΄ὔ 4 a 5 a 4 ἡμέρης, ἢ διὰ τρίτης, γνώμῃ TH αὐτῇ χρώμενος: 4 Ν᾿, Ν 4 “ Ν A “Δ 5 “4 τοιόνδε ἔστω TO φάρμακον, ὅ TL μὴ πλεῖον ἢ ἐμβά- φιον ἀπάγειν μέλλει κατὰ τὰς ῥῖνας, ἀπάγειν δὲ Ν , ἊΝ Ν ἊΝ Ἂν 5 Ν 5 κατὰ σμικρόν, τὸ δὲ κατὰ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἀποξη- / e “ \ Ἂς lal > lal 7 ραίνειν, ὡς 6 τι ἂν TO τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν φάρμακον 5 , ἊΣ 5 4 Ἂν Ν αι 5 4 ἀποξηρήνῃ Kat ἀποφράξῃ, κατὰ Tas ῥῖνας ἀποτρά- Ν ‘\ 4 Ν ἴων a , πηται. τὰ δὲ φάρμακα τὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς καθαρτήρια, ἃ μὲν αὐτῶν ἰσχυρά ἐστιν, ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀγου- “ « Ν > / > Ν A > A Ν σιν ὅλης: ἅσσα δὲ ἀσθενέα, ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν, καὶ αὐτόθεν ἀπὸ τῶν πέλας τῆς ῥινός. “᾿ ᾽ OES A Ν ν Pt) ΄ ΄ Ην δ᾽ ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς καὶ τοῦ ὀστέου, μύξης ὑποστάσης μεταξὺ τοῦ ὀστέου καὶ τῆς σαρκός, c “ 5 ἊΝ 3 ‘\ 4 A A , > ῥεῦμα ἐς τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς γένηται, τῷδε δῆλόν ἐστιν, ὅτι ἐντεῦθεν ῥεῖ: τὸ δέρμα τὸ ἐπὶ τῇ κεφαλῇ φλιβό- e / Ν “ > Ἂς Ἂς > 4 μενον ὑπείκει, καὶ ἕλκεα ἐς τὴν κεφαλὴν ἐκθύουσι, A Ν Ν > Ν 4 Ν 3 c καὶ κατὰ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς δακρύουσι, Kal οὐχ ἐλ- κοῦνται τὰ βλέφαρα, οὐδὲ δάκνει, οὐδ᾽ ἀμβλυώσσειν ποιέει, ἀλλ᾽ ὀξὺ ὁρῶν γίνεται: τὸ γὰρ ῥεῦμα οὐχ ε ’ > ε 5 > Ν A > 4 > Ἂς ἁλμυρόν ἐστιν, ὡς οὐκ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐγκεφάλου, ἀλλὰ μυξῶδες μᾶλλον. τοῦτον ὧδε χρὴ ἰᾶσθαι: φαρμάκῳ 46 PLACES IN MAN out of the eyes, smear on whichever medication will best draw tears, and, moistening the rest of the body and mak- ing it full of phlegm in order that the eyes will become moister and be washed out, cause the congealed tears to run down. When moisture flows to the eyes a little at a time and produces irritation, anoint this patient with some emollient that will at the same time both dry the eyes and draw a few tears; to the nostrils apply every day or every other day a medication that has the same pur- pose: let the medication be such as not to draw off through the nostrils more than an oxybaphon, this a little at a time, while at the same time having a drying effect on the eyes, so that anything the medication dries up and turns away from the eyes comes out through the nostrils. Cleaning medications of the head: those that are powerful draw from the whole head, those that are weak, from the eyes and just from the area near the nose. If—when fluid has collected between the bone and the flesh—a flux occurs from the flesh and the bone to the eyes, the flux’s origin is revealed by the following: the skin on the head gives way when pressed and ulcers break out on the head; patients weep from their eyes, but the eye- lids do not ulcerate, nor does the flux sting or cause dull- ness of vision, but the patient sees keenly. The flux is not salty, not being from the brain, but rather serous. You must treat this patient as follows. Clean his head with a 47 302 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ ἊΝ Ν ἊΝ Ν \ 5 A Ν Ν καθαίρειν χρὴ τὴν κεφαλὴν μὴ ἰσχυρῷ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα ἰσχναίνειν καὶ σιτίοισι καὶ φαρμάκοισι κάτω ὑπάγοντα, ὡς ἀποξηρανθῇ ἰσχναινομένου τοῦ a’ a A lal σώματος, ἢ ἐκτρεφθῇ τῷ κατὰ Tas ῥῖνας προστιθε- / A μένῳ φαρμάκῳ: πρὸς δὲ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς οὐδὲν δεῖ / ΄ ED δὲ δὴ δ᾽ C4 ε \ φάρμακον προσφέρειν. ἣν δὲ δὴ μηδ᾽ οὕτως ὑγιὴς ‘ » \ γίνηται, τὴν κεφαλὴν κατατάμνειν ἔστ᾽ ἂν πρὸς TO ὀστέον ἴῃς, μὴ μετεώρους μηδ᾽ ἐπικαρσίους τὰς τομὰς ποιέειν: τάμνειν δὲ ἄχρι τούτου, ἄχρις ἂν τοῦ ἣν vn ὀστέου θίγῃς: τάμνειν δὲ πυκνά, ὡς ἂν TO συνεστη- ἈΝ 5 / ~ Ν la) ε ΄ > , 4 Kos ἐξέλθῃ θᾶσσον διὰ τῶν ἑλκέων ἀπορρέον, ἅμα δὲ αἱ τομαὶ πυκναὶ ἐοῦσαι πρόστασιν ποιέωσι | τῇ σαρκὶ πρὸς τὸ ὀστέον. οὕτως ἰᾶσθαι δεῖ: τούτῳ / ΄ὔ a τοιάδε ἡ ἀποτελεύτησις γίνεται, NY μή τις ἐυτρε- ΄ > > ΄ “ yer ΄ yan ΓΆΡ πίσῃ: οὐκ ἐκκέκλυσται, ὥστ᾽ ἐκκλυζόμενον ὀξὺ ὁρᾶν ποιέειν, αἰεὶ τῷ ἐφισταμένῳ μαρμαρυγώδης μᾶλλον / ἊΝ ἈΝ 5 Ν 6 A ἴων > , > 3 γίνεται, Kal TO ὀξὺ ὁρῶν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀποσβέν- νυται. a Saab) N » » Monte \ \ ε A Hy δ᾽ ἐς τὴν ὄψιν ἐς τὸ ὑγρὸν καθαρὸν αἱματῶ- 4 > , e ’ 4 e »Μ »ἤ, > , δές τι ἐσέλθῃ ὑγρόν, τούτῳ ἡ ὄψις ἔνδον ἐμφαίνεται A 5 “ 5 4 aN ΟΝ / > e >) τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ ov στρογγύλον ἐὸν διὰ τόδε: ἐν @ ἂν Ν «ς 4 > A A > > / 4 Ἂν; τὸ αἱματώδες ἐνῇ, τοῦτο οὐκ ἐμφαίνεται, τούτῳ δὴ 5 / Ν / ΩΝ > \ ᾽ὕ ἐλλείπει τὸ φαινόμενον περιφερὲς εἶναι, καὶ προκινέ- > A / Ν A > A \ > ἊΝ εσθαι αὐτῷ δοκέει πρὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν, καὶ οὐδὲν 9. 5 ΄ ἘΣ δὶ ΄ \ \ ΄ > , Kat’ ἀλήθειαν ὁρᾷ. τούτου χρὴ τὰς φλέβας ἀποκαί- Ν , Ν », a ’ SEEN Ν ew τὰς πιεζούσας τὰς ὄψιας, at σφύζουσιν αἰεὶ καὶ μεταξὺ τοῦ τε ὠτὸς καὶ τοῦ κροτάφου πεφύκασιν" καὶ ἐπειδὰν ταύτας ἀποφράξῃς, πρὸς τοὺς ὀφθαλ- 48 PLACES IN MAN mild medication, and reduce his body’s swelling with foods and medications that act downwards, so that the flux will be dried out as the body’s swelling goes down, or turned aside by a medication applied to the nostrils. Do not administer any medication to the eyes themselves. If, indeed, the patient fails to recover with this treatment, make an incision into his head right down to the bone; do not make the incisions superficial or at an angle—cut until you touch the bone. Make the cuts close together in order that whatever collects in them will escape more quickly by flowing off through the wounds, and at the same time the cuts, being close together, will make the flesh adhere against the bone. This is the way you must treat. Unless someone treats, the case ends as follows: since the eyes are not being washed out—if the eye is washed out it enables the person to see clearly—the con- tinual addition of fluid causes the person more and more to see sparks and his keenness of vision is extinguished. If anything bloody gets into the clear moisture in the pupil, the person’s pupil forms an image inside the eye that is no longer circular, because wherever the bloody material happens to be the image is not reflected, so that what is seen lacks being spherical, something appears to move before the eyes, and the person sees nothing cor- rectly. You must burn the blood out of the vessels that are pressing on the patient's eyes, i.e. the ones between the ear and the temple that continually throb. When you have turned the flow in these aside, apply to the eyes 49 304 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ Ν 4 “ ε 7 4 Ν μοὺς φάρμακα, ὅσα ὑγραίνει, πρόσφερε, καὶ δάκρυον ἄπαγε ὡς πλεῖστον, ὅπως τὸ συνεστηκὸς ἐν a > aA > a) Ν Ἂς “ / τοῖσιν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ἐκκλυσθῇ τὸ τὴν νοῦσον παρέ- b>! lal “ χον. ἣν δὲ ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς ῥαγῇ, μαλθακοῖσι φαρμά- κοισι χρῆσθαι καὶ στρυφνοῖσιν, ὡς στυφόμενον τὸ “ 5 Ἂν ΄ὔ Ν ε 5 \ Ν 3 “ ἕλκος ἐς σμικρὸν συνίῃ, καὶ ἡ οὐλὴ λεπτὴ ἢ. ὅταν > Κ' ΩΣ ΄ Non ed am Ξ ΄ δ᾽ ἄργεμον 7, δακρύειν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ ἀρήγει. 14. Ὁπόταν δὲ εἰς τὸν κίθαρον ῥέῃ καὶ χολὴ ἢ, A A ’ 5 5 4 57 > Ν 4 Ν = τῷδε δῆλόν ἐστιν: ὀδύνη ἔχει ἐς τὴν λαπάρην Kal ἐς Ν BS Ν > \ ΄ Ν ΄ Agee τὴν KANLOA τὴν ἐς τὴν λαπάρην, καὶ πυρετός, καὶ ἢ γλῶσσα τὰ ἄνω χλωρὴ γίνεται, καὶ ἀποχρέμπτεται ξυμπεπηγότα: ταύτης τῆς νούσου ἑβδομαίῳ ὁ κίνδυ- ΄ > xX 59 , ΝΜ ΄ Ihe ΄ > ΄ vos ἐστιν ἢ ἐναταίῳ. [ἄλλη χολή: ὁκόταν ἀμφό- \ ware) ͵΄ \ > 53) o 5 A te ἘΣ τερα τὰ πλευρὰ ἀλγέῃ, τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα ὅμοια H TH ἑτέρῃ, © Ν cal αὕτη μὲν περιπλευμονίη ἐστίν, ἡ δ᾽ ἑτέρη πλευρῖτις. e Ἂ ΄ Ν / “ > Ν , Αὗται δὲ γίνονται διὰ τόδε: ὅταν ἐς TOV πλεύμονα ΘΙ» > aA | a Ν A Zi Ν A pevon ἐκ τῆς κεϊφαλῆς διὰ τοῦ Bpoyxov καὶ τῶν 5 lal e 4 “ Ν aN ‘ ‘\ ἀρτηριῶν, ὁ πλεύμων, ἅτε ψαφαρὸς ἐὼν καὶ ξηρὸς / [4 > ’ Ἐ Ν Ἂς ε Ν [2 a , φύσει, ἕλκει ἐφ᾽ ἑωυτὸν TO ὑγρὸν 6 τι ἂν δύνηται: καὶ ἐπὴν εἰρύσῃ, μέζων γίνεται, καὶ ὅταν μὲν ἐς oe ς , 4 ¢ Ἂς / > 4 ὅλον pevon, μέζων ὁ λοβὸς γενόμενος ἀμφοτέρων ἔψαυσε τῶν πλευρέων, καὶ περιπλευμονίην ἐποίησεν" ὅταν δὲ τῆς ἑτέρης μοῦνον, πλευρῖτιν. ἡ περιπλευ- 4 Ν 3 4 > 4 ἊΝ 5 ’ Ν μονίη πολὺ ἐπικινδυνοτέρη ἐστί, καὶ ὀδύναι πολὺ ἰσχυρότεραί εἰσιν αἱ ἐς τὰς λαπάρας καὶ ἐς τὰς a Ν ε A Ν > , Ν Ν κληϊδας, καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα πολὺ ὠχροτέρη, καὶ τὴν φάρυγγα ἀλγέει ὑπὸ τοῦ ῥεύματος, καὶ κόπος ἔχει 50 PLACES IN MAN medications that moisten, and provoke tears as energeti- cally as possible, in order that what is collected in the eyes and producing the disease will be washed away. If the eye has suffered a rupture, apply mild astringent medications in order that, being drawn together, the lesion will contract and the scar will be small. When an argema is present, it is good for the eye to weep. 14. When there is a flux to the chest and bile is pre- sent, this is revealed by the following. Pain is present in the flank and in the corresponding collar-bone; there is fever, the tongue becomes yellow-green on top, and clot- ted sputum is coughed up. This disease is dangerous on the seventh day, or on the ninth. [Another bile.] It is called pleurisy; if the symptoms are identical except that there is pain on both sides, it is pneumonia. These arise in the following way. When there is a flux from the head through the windpipe and the bronchial tubes to the lung, the lung, being of loose texture and by nature dry, attracts any moisture that it can. When it has drawn this in, it swells, and when the flux is a complete one, the swollen lobe touches both sides and gives rise to pneumonia; when the lobe touches only one side, it pro- duces pleurisy. Pneumonia is much the more dangerous; the pains to the flanks and the collar-bones are much more violent, and the tongue much deeper yellow-green. There is pain in the throat as a result of the flux, great 1 Del. recentiores. 51 306 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ANOPQIION > / Ν ‘al ε lal a ε A 4 ἰσχυρός, καὶ πνεῦμα ἑκαταῖον ἢ ἑβδομαῖον λάζεται. A > ἊΝ ε a ε ‘ > aA > te τοῦτον ἣν μὴ ἑβδομαῖον ὁ πυρετὸς ἀφῇ, ἀποθνῇ- “Δ he >) a A σκει, ἢ ἀποπυΐσκεται,; ἢ ἀμφότερον: Hv δ᾽ ἐναταῖον 4 6 / ‘ 4 ε ᾿ς Ν Ν δύο ἡμέρας διαλιπὼν λάζηται, ὡς τὰ πολλὰ καὶ ΒΝ AY a3) ΄ ὋΝ ὃ iy Et δὲ ὃ οὗτος ἢ ἀποθνήσκει, ἢ ἔμπυος διαφεύγει: ἣν OE δω- a 3, ΄ Ἃ Ν δεκαταῖον ἔμπυος γίνεται: ἣν δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκα- A » © ἊΝ ταῖον, ὑγιὴς γίνεται. καὶ ἔμπυοι ὅσοι ὑπὸ περιπλευ- >! / > povins ἢ πλευρίτιδος γίνονται, οὐκ ἀποθνήσκουσιν, ἀλλ᾽ ὑγιέες γίνονται. ΞΟ) Ν λλὰ » J, [4 ε A > Ν ς τὰ πολλὰ ἔμπυοι γίνονται, ὅταν ῥεῦμα ἐς τὸ > “ A A » αὐτὸ ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τῇσι χολῇσι γένηται: ἀλλὰ τῇσι Ν A A A ’ὕ μὲν χολῇσι πολὺ ἀπορρεῖ, καὶ ἀπορρεῦσαν παύεται: τοῖσι δ᾽ ἐμπύοισιν ἔλασσόν τε ῥεῖ καὶ οὐ παύεται, Ny, ο 5, καὶ ἔμπυοι γίνονται, ὅταν ἔλασσον ἀποχρέμπτωνται a ἴω ᾽ὔ ἴω Ν A ἢ ἐπιρρεῖ ἐς TOV πλεύμονα. τοῦτο yap, TO ἐν τῷ 4 ἊΣ » πλεύμονι συνιστάμενόν τε καὶ ἐπιρρέον, πῦον γίνε- ται: τὸ δὲ πῦον συνιστάμενον ἐν τῷ πλεύμονι καὶ ἐν a , ε A Ν 4 Ν 5 Ν ¢ »“ > Ν τῷ κιθάρῳ ἑλκοῖ καὶ σήπει: καὶ ἐπὴν ἑλκωθῇ, ἀπὸ val A "4 o τοῦ ἡλκωμένου ἐπιρρεῖ: καὶ ἐπαναχρεμπτομένου ἅμα Ν « ‘\ a can / ΄ Ἂς > A μὲν ἡ κεφαλὴ μᾶλλον ῥεῖ σειομένη, ἅμα δὲ ἐκ TOU ε / > lal ΄ Ν | lal ΄ A ἡλκωμένου ἐν τῷ κιθάρῳ Kat | τῷ πλεύμονι μᾶλλον “ © / ‘4 pel, Kal τὰ ἕλκεα κινεύμενα ἐπαναρρήγνυται, ὥστε Ν 5 4 Ν 5 Ν A ἴα Ὁ ῸΣ ‘\ > > Kal εἰ παύσαιτο TO ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ῥέον, TO ἀπ αὐτῶν τῶν ἑλκέων ἱκανὸν ἔσται νοῦσον παρασχεῖν. 4 Ν ~ > Ν “ my Ν ἘΣ “ «ες γίνεται δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ ἕλκους ἔμπυος, καὶ ῥᾷων αὕτη ἡ A Ν 5 ‘al , νοῦσος: γίνεται δὲ Kal ἐκτὸς TOU πλεύμονος μάλιστα μὲν ἀπὸ ῥήγματος, καὶ ὅταν ἡ σὰρξ φλασθῇ: κατὰ ! Littré: -πνίγεται AV. 52 PLACES IN MAN weariness is felt, and difficult breathing seizes the patient on the sixth or seventh day. If fever does not leave this patient on the seventh day, he dies, or suppurates, or both. If, after intermitting for two days, the fever attacks again on the ninth day, usually this patient, too, dies or, if he escapes with his life, has an internal suppuration. If there is fever on the twelfth day, the patient suppurates internally, if on the fourteenth day, he recovers. Those who suppurate internally as the result of pneumonia or pleurisy do not die, but recover. Generally internal suppuration arises when a flux occurs to the same spot (i.e. the lung) as in the case of bil- ious fluxes; but whereas with bilious fluxes much flows away, and when it has flowed away the disease stops, in patients with internal suppuration less flows away and the disease does not stop, and the patients suppurate inter- nally when they cough up less fluid than is flowing to the lung. For what flows together and collects in the lung turns to pus, and this pus collected in the lung and the chest putrefies and causes ulceration; when such an ulcer- ation takes place, new fluid is added from the area that is ulcerated. As this is coughed up, the head, being shaken, increases its flow, and at the same time the flow from the ulcerated area in the chest and the lung increases, and the ulcers, being moved, are torn open again, so that even if the flux from the head were to stop, that from the ulcers alone would be sufficient to maintain the disease. A per- son can also suppurate internally as the result of an ulcer, and this disease is easier. Suppuration also occurs outside the lung, especially from a tear or when the tissue is 53 308 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ A A , , », τοῦτο γὰρ πῦον ξυνίσταται, καὶ ξυνιστάμενον, εἴ τις 4 ἊΝ A 4 Ν / 4 Ν σείοι τὸ σῶμα, κλυδάζεται, καὶ ψόφον παρέχει, καὶ καίονται ταύτῃ." , Ἂς , -“ 5 Ν 3 4 4 an Φθίσις δὲ γίνεται, ὅταν ἐς TO αὐτό, ὥσπερ τῷ > , ε εἰ ΄, ὃ Ν a , Ν A ἐμπύῳ, ὁ poos γένηται διὰ τοῦ βρόγχου καὶ τῶν ᾽ὔ a ᾿ς ὩΝ ἀορτρέων, αἱ ξυνέχουσι τὸν πλεύμονα καὶ τὸν ’ὔ 5 Ἂν ‘\ ’ cy: Ν ’ > , βρόγχον: és δὲ τὸν πλεύμονα ῥέῃ θαμινὰ κατ᾽ ὀλί- A , γον, Kal ὑγρότητα ἐν τῷ πλεύμονι μὴ ποιέῃ πολλήν" Ν / A ξηραινόμενον yap TO ἐπιρρέον ἐν τῷ βρόγχῳ πεπη- 4 “ 5 = 4 > Ν ’ > , 5 γός, ὥστε οὐκ ἐκκλυζόμενον, ἀλλὰ κατ᾽ ὀλίγον ἐπιρ- ρέον καὶ ἐνεχόμενον βῆχα ποιέει: ἔν τε τῇσιν ἀορ- τρῇσιν ἐνεχόμενον τὸ ῥέον, ὥστε στενὰς διατρήσιας , / A , ἐχούσας τὰς ἀορτράς, στενοχωρίην τῷ πνεύματι lal A », [2 παρέχει, καὶ τοῦτο ποιέει πνεῦμα ἔχειν: ὥστε γὰρ Ν A %\ wn αἰεὶ λειπόμενον αἰεὶ ἐπιθυμέει ἀναπνεῖν: καὶ ἐν τῷ ° A a / πλεύμονι, ὥστε οὐκ ἰσχυρῶς ὑγρῷ ἐόντι, ξυσμὸς > ΄ Ψ \ Ἂν ὁ ὅ5 A A A its ἐγγίνεται: ὅταν δὲ πολὺ ἀπορρυῇ τῆς κεφαλῆς, OUT > A , Ν , Ν Ἂν 5 A > ἐν τῷ πλεύμονι ξυσμὸς γίνεται: πολὺ yap αὐτῷ τὸ > » a ἂν , ἐπιρρέον ἐστί. καὶ ἔμπυοι ἐκ τῶν φθισίων τούτων γίνονται, ὅταν ὑγρότερον τὸ σῶμα γένηται: καὶ ὅταν ξηρότερον γένηται, ἐκ τῶν ἐμπύων φθισιῶντες. » A a "4 ἔμπυοι τῷδε δῆλοι γίνονται: τὴν λαπάρην ἀρχομέ- νων πόνος ἔχει: ἐπὴν δὲ πῦον ἤδη ξυνεστήκῃ, ὅ τε πόνος ὁμοίως ἔχει, βήξ τε γίνεται, καὶ ἐπαναχρέμ- A Ν A » >! πτεται πῦον, καὶ πνεῦμα | ἔχει. ἣν δὲ μήπω ἐρρώγῃ, 5 A /, ΄ Ν ΄ - > 5 A a Ν ἐν τῇ λαπάρῃ σείεται καὶ ψοφέει οἷον ἐν ἀσκῷ" ἢν δὲ τούτων μηδὲν προσημήνῃ, ἔμπυος δὲ ἢ, τοισίδε χρὴ | Ermerins: ταῦτα AV. PLACES IN MAN crushed, for pus collects at the spot; when there is a col- lection of pus, if someone shakes the patient's body, the pus splashes and makes a sound, and that is where they are cauterised. Consumption arises when, just as in internal suppura- tion, a flux to the same spot (1.6. the lung) has occurred through the windpipe and the bronchial tubes, which connect the lung and the windpipe, and there is a contin- ual, small flux which does not produce any great amount of moisture in the lung; for what is flowing down gets dried up in the windpipe and congeals, so that it does not splash, but, flowing down a little at a time, is caught and provokes coughing. Now since the bronchial tubes have narrow channels, this flux, being caught in them, pro- duces narrowing of the airway, and this provokes difficult breathing, so that the patient, his breath continually fail- ing, continually desires to inspire. And since there is no great amount of moisture in the lung, irritation is felt; when, on the other hand, the flux from the head is great, there is no irritation in the lung, since the afflux to the lung is copious. Patients suppurate internally after these consumptions when the body becomes more moist; they become consumptive after internal suppuration when it becomes more dry. Internal suppuration is revealed by the following: at the beginning there is pain in the flank; then, after pus has already collected, with the pain contin- uing the same, coughing begins, pus is expectorated, and breathing becomes difficult. If the pus has not yet broken out of its cavity, if the patient is shaken it makes a sound in the flank as if in a wineskin. If none of these signs is present, but the patient is definitely suppurating inter- 55 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN TON KATA ANOPOTION / lal Ν 5 / / c τεκμαίρεσθαι: πνεῦμα πολὺ ἔχει, φθέγγεταί TE ὑπο- βραγχότερον, καὶ οἱ πόδες οἰδέουσι καὶ τὰ γούνατα, ἴων Ν xX Ν / > e Ἂς Lal Ε μᾶλλον δὲ κατὰ τὴν λαπάρην, ἐν ἣ τὸ πῦον ἔνεστι: καὶ 0 κίθαρος συγκεκαμμένος ἐστί, καὶ λυσιγυῖα ‘7 a ω aA Ν γίνεται, καὶ ἱδρὼς περιχεῖται ὅλον τὸ σῶμα, καὶ τοτὲ ἊΝ / Ν > A c A ον Ἂς Ν μὲν δοκέει θερμὸς αὐτὸς ἑωυτῷ εἶναι, τοτὲ δὲ ψυχρός: καὶ οἱ ὄνυχες περιτεταμένοι εἰσὶ καὶ ἡ κοι- Ν λίη θερμὴ γίνεται: τούτοισι χρὴ γινώσκειν τοὺς ἐμπύους. ° » a 15. Ὅταν δ᾽ ὄπισθεν pevorn ἐς τὴν ῥάχιν, φθίσις / ᾽ὔὕ 4 Ν 5 » 5 , Ν Ν γίνεται τούτῳ τοιάδε: τὴν ὀσφῦν ἀλγέει, καὶ τὰ ἔμπροσθεν τῆς κεφαλῆς κενὰ δοκέουσιν αὐτῷ εἶναι. ra) » a 16. Χολῇ δὲ τάδ᾽ ἐστὶν ἐπικίνδυνα, ἴκτερος ἣν lal al ως wn ἐπιγένηται, ev τοῖσιν ὀφθαλμοῖσι Kat ἐν τοῖσιν ὄνυξι πελιδνὰ ὅταν γένωνται, καὶ ἐς τὸ σῶμα ὅταν 5», [4 Ν Ν Ἂς Ν “ Ν 3 ἊΝ ΞΒ ἔχῃ ἕλκεα καὶ τὰ περὶ τὰ ἕλκεα πελιδνὰ Ἢ Kau o ἱδρὼς ὁκόταν μὴ Kal’ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα ἐκθύῃ, ἀλλὰ aA lal ο A - καθ’ ἕν μέρος τοῦ σώματος, καὶ ὅταν τοῦ πυρετοῦ » » / » ,ὔ Ν ἔτι ὄντος ἐπαναχρέμπτηται χλωρόν, ἡ, ἐόντος ἐντὸς ἐν τῷ πλεύμονι ἔτι τοῦ χλωροῦ, ἡ ἐπανάχρεμψις A a o lal ο Ν παύσηται: τοῦτο δεῖ γινώσκειν ὅταν ἐνῇ καὶ ὅταν μὴ ἐνῇ: ὅταν ἐνῇ, ἐμψοφεῖ ἐν τῇ φάρυγγι ἀναπνέοντος, καὶ πνεῦμα ἐπικίνδυνον, καὶ λύγξ, καὶ ὁ πυρετὸς ἔτι » » ont ᾽ὔ ὦν, ἀποχρέμματος ἔτι ἐν τῷ πλεύμονι ἐνεόντος, καὶ ἡ κοιλίη ἀσθενέος ἤδη ἐόντος ὑποχωρέουσα: ταῦτα πλευρίτιδος καὶ περιπλευμονίης ἐπικίνδυνα. A a ν γα ν \ \ 17. Τ]λευρῖτιν ὧδε χρὴ ἰᾶσθαι: τὸν πυρετὸν μὴ A ~ nv παύειν ἑπτὰ ἡμερέων, πότῳ χρῆσθαι ἢ ὀξυμελι- 56 PLACES IN MAN nally, you must form your judgement from the following: there is great difficulty of breathing, the patient’s voice is somewhat hoarser than normal, and his feet and knees swell, especially on the side where the pus is located; the chest is compressed, there is slackness of the limbs, sweat pours out over his whole body, and sometimes he feels warm, sometimes cold; the digits become clubbed, and his cavity is hot. These are the signs by which you must recognize that patients are suppurating internally. 15. When there is a flux posteriorly into the back, it produces a consumption of the following nature: the patient suffers pain in the loins, and he has the sensation that the front of his head is empty. 16. As far as bile goes, the following disorders are dan- gerous, if jaundice comes on: when there is lividness in the eyes and under the nails; when there are ulcers on the body, and the areas around the ulcers are livid; when sweat breaks out not over the whole body but in one part of it; when, with fever still present, yellow-green material is coughed up, or, with yellow-green material still present in the lung, expectoration stops. You must recognize when such material is present and when it is not: when it is present, a noise is heard in the throat when the patient breathes in, breathing is dangerously difficult, the patient hiccups, his fever persists, material that should be coughed up remains in his lung, and the cavity of the already weakened patient has a downward motion. These are the dangerous signs of pleurisy and pneumonia. 17. You must treat pleurisy thus. Do not check the fever for seven days. As drink give either oxymelicrat or 57 310 ΠΕΡῚ TOWQON TON KATA ANOPOTION rs a », Ἂς “ lal Ν Ἂς x κρήτῳ, ἢ ὄξει καὶ ὕδατι: ταῦτα δὲ χρὴ προσφέρειν ὡς πλεῖστα, ὡς ἐπίτεγξις γένηται καὶ γινομένη | ἐπανάχρεμψιν ποιέῃ: καὶ τὴν ὀδύνην παύειν θερμαν- 4 lal ο τηρίοισι φαρμάκοισι, καὶ καταρροφεῖν διδόναι ὅ τι ἐπανάχρεμψιν ποιήσει, καὶ λουτροῖσι χρῆσθαι τεταρταίοισιν: τῇ δὲ πέμπτῃ καὶ τῇ ἕκτῃ χρίειν ἐλαίῳ: τῇ δὲ ἑβδόμῃ λούειν, ἣν μὴ ὁ πυρετὸς μέλλῃ > / τ ε ‘\ A ~ ε «ς Ἂς 5 lA Ν ἀφιέναι, ὡς ὑπὸ τοῦ λουτροῦ ὁ ἱδρὼς ἐγγένηται: καὶ ἔτι τῇ πέμπτῃ καὶ τῇ ἕκτῃ ἰσχυροτάτοισι χρῆσθαι τοῖσιν ἐπαναχρεμπτηρίοισι φαρμάκοις, ὡς τὴν ε 4 -“ Θ᾽ fee ε 4 > 4 vn X ‘\ lal ἑβδόμην ὅτι ῥήϊστα ἡμέρην ἀγάγῃ: ἣν δὲ μηδὲ τῇ ε “ Z I ἑβδόμῃ ἡμέρῃ παύσηται, τῇ ἐνάτῃ παύσεται, ἣν μή τι ἄλλο τῶν ἐπικινδύνων γένηται: ἐπὴν δὲ ὁ πυρετὸς 9 A ες / ες > ἣν 4 / ἀφῇ. ῥοφήματα ὡς ἀσθενέστατα ποιέων προσφέ- a’ my 5 Ne ΄ Ey Ν ΕΣ Ad pew: ἣν δὲ ἰνηθμὸς ἐγγένηται, ἣν μὲν ἔτι θερμοῦ lal A A vn cal TOU σώματος ἐόντος, TOV ποτῶν ἀφαιρέειν: ἣν δὲ τοῦ πυρετοῦ ἀφεικότος, πυρίνοις τοῖσι ῥοφήμασι χρῶ. καὶ τὴν περιπλευμονίην τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ἰῶ. ’ὔ Ν 18. Τοὺς ἐμπύους καθαίρειν τὴν κεφαλὴν μὴ ἰσχυροῖσι φαρμάκοισιν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ μικρὸν ἀποτρέ- πειν ἐς τὰς ῥῖνας, καὶ ἅμα διαχωρητικοῖσι σιτίοισι χρῆσθαι: καὶ ἐπὴν ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ νοσήματος μηκέτι ἣ, » yee) ΄ ε εἰς > ΄ ΄ ἀλλ᾽ ἐκτρέπηται ὁ ῥόος, ἐπανάχρεμψιν ποιέεσθαι, καὶ βῆχα ποιέειν, καὶ ἐγχύτοισι φαρμάκοισι χρῆ- Ἂν / [4 ς / ἐν 4 > ‘4 σθαι Kai σιτίοισιν ἅμα: ὁπόταν δὲ δέῃ ἀπόχρεμψιν ποιέεσθαι, καὶ πλέοσι σιτίοισι καὶ ἁλυκοῖσι χρῆ- σθαι καὶ λιπαροῖσι, καὶ οἴνῳ αὐστηρῷ, καὶ βῆχα ποιέειν ὅταν ὧδε ἔχῃ. 58 PLACES IN MAN vinegar and water; these you should administer in very generous amounts, in order that moistening occurs and leads to expectoration. Check the pain with warming medications. As gruel give what will promote expectora- tion. On the fourth day give baths, on the fifth and sixth days anoint with olive oil, and on the seventh day wash— unless the fever is about to remit—in order that through bathing sweating will be induced. Begin even on the fifth and sixth days to give powerful expectorant medications, in order that on the seventh day the patient will bring up his sputum as easily as possible. If the fever does not cease on the seventh day, it will do so on the ninth, unless some other danger intervenes. When the fever has remit- ted, prepare and give a very mild gruel. If purging occurs, should the body still be warm withhold drinks, but if fever is no longer present, give wheaten gruels. Also treat pneumonia in the same way. 18. In patients that suppurate internally, clean the head—not with powerful medications, but by turning away the flux a little at a time to the nostrils—and at the same time prescribe laxative foods. When the beginning of the disease has passed and the flux has turned outward, provoke expectoration and coughing, and at the same time infuse medications and give food. When you must provoke expectoration, give copious salty rich foods and dry wine, and stimulate coughing, when the case is as described. 1 Froben: ἰνθμὸς A: vuypos V. 2 Littré: veapod AV. 59 312 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQON TON KATA ANOPOTION 19. Kat τοὺς ὑπὸ τῆς φθίσιος τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον »Μ Ἂς Ἂς ΄ὔ΄ ἊΝ Ἂν -“ A x 2 ἣν τἄλλα, πλὴν τὰ σιτία μὴ πολλὰ ἅμα, καὶ τὰ ὄψα μὴ a A » A A ral πλέονα ἢ τὰ σιτία, Kai τῷ | οἴνῳ ὑδαρεῖ χρῶ ἐπὶ TO al A 12 σιτίῳ, ὡς μὴ θερμαίνῃ, καὶ τῷ σώματι ἀσθενεῖ ἐόντι θερμότητα παρέχῃ, καὶ ἅμα ἀμφότερα θερμαίνωσιν A lal ἂς 4 ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ χρόνῳ Kat θερμωλὴν ποιέωσιν. 20. Ῥεῦμα πολὺ ὁπόταν διὰ τοῦ οἰσοφάγου ἐς ἊΝ ΄ [- 4 5, 0 / 5, ’ “ τὴν κοιλίην ῥεύσῃ, ἴνησις γίνεται κάτω, ἔστι δ᾽ ὅτε καὶ ἄνω: τούτῳ ἣν μὲν ὀδύνη ἐνῇ ἐν τῇ γαστρί, ὑπ- “ ΕΝ A » “2 εξάγειν πρῶτον φαρμάκῳ ἢ χυλῷ, ἔπειτα φαρμάκῳ ἰσχητηρίῳ χρῆσθαι, τοῖσι δὲ σιτίοισι διαχωρητι- κοῖσιν ἕως ἂν ἡ ὀδύνη ἔχῃ: ἐπὴν δὲ παύσηται ἡ ὀδύνη, καὶ τοῖσι σιτίοισιν ἰσχητηρίοισι χρῆσθαι: Ν 3 \ Ν 4 Ἂν 5 Ν ἊΝ (s / ” τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον Kal ἐπὴν πολλὰς ἡμέρας ἴνησις 3, A ZY Ν i , ἔχῃ, ἰᾶσθαι: nv δὲ ἀσθενὴς ἢ καὶ μὴ δύνηται προσ- 4 ες Ν > ’ ’ ἴω Ἂς Ἂν φέρεσθαι ὑπὸ ἀσθενείης, κλύζειν πρῶτον μὲν χρὴ χυλῷ πτισάνης, ἔπειτα ἐπὴν τούτῳ καθήρῃς, τῶν στυφόντων τινί [ὕστερον ἐπὴν τοῦτο κλύσῃς].} ε ΄ 5 5 \ ΄ ” N \ 21. Ὁπόταν δ᾽ és τὴν σάρκα ὄπισθεν παρὰ τοὺς σπονδύλους ῥεῦσαν ὕδρωπα ποιήσῃ, ὧδε χρὴ ἰᾶσθαι: καίειν τὴν σάρκα τὴν ἐν τῷ τραχήλῳ μεταξὺ lanl A > 4 A Ἂς 5 Ἂς 4 τῶν φλεβῶν ἐσχάρας τρεῖς, καὶ ἐπὴν Kavons, ἕξυν- άγειν καὶ ποιέειν ὡς ἰσχνοτάτας οὐλάς: καὶ ἐπὴν > 4 Ν ‘\ tA 4 ’ ἀποφράξῃς, πρὸς τὰς ῥῖνας φάρμακον πρόσφερε, 3 47 ο an ὡς ἐκτρέπηται, καὶ ἀσθενὲς αὖθις Kai αὖθις, ἕως ἂν ἀποτρεφθῇ: καὶ τὰ μὲν ἔμπροσθεν τῆς κεφαλῆς θέρ- 1 Del. Littré. 60 PLACES IN MAN 19. Treat patients with consumption generally the same, except do not give large amounts of cereals at one time; let the quantity of main dishes not exceed that of the cereals; after the meal give wine well-diluted with water in order that it will not be warm and provoke heat- ing in the weakened body, and both of them together (i.e. the wine and the body) become warm at the same time and cause feverish heat. 20. When a massive flux passes through the oesopha- gus into the cavity, there is an evacuation downwards, and sometimes also upwards. If there is pain in the person's belly, first clean downwards with a medication or a juice, and then give an astringent medication and laxative foods for as long as the pain is present. When the pain stops, prescribe astringent foods as well. Treat in this same way even when the evacuation continues for many days; if the patient is weak and cannot take anything because of his weakness, you must first give him an enema of barley- water, and then, when you have purged with that, some astringent medication. 21. When a flux into the tissue at the back along the vertebrae produces dropsy, treat as follows. Burn three eschars in the tissue of the neck between its vessels, and after you have cauterized, draw the edges of the wound together and make them as flat as possible. Having thus blocked the flux’s passage, apply a medication to the nos- trils—a weak one administered repeatedly—in order that the flux will be turned in that direction, and continue until it turns aside; warm the front of the head and cool 61 314 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ANOPOTION μαινε, τὰ δ᾽ ὄπισθεν ψῦχε: Kal ἐπήν σοι ἐκτεθερ- μασμένος ἢ τὰ ἔμπροσθεν τῆς κεφαλῆς, σιτία ἐσθί- ew τὰ φλεγματωδέστατα καὶ ἥκιστα | διαχωρητικά, e [Δ 4 A e ε ‘ © ὡς ὅτι μάλιστα διευρυνθῶσιν αἱ ῥοαὶ ai ἔμπροσθεν A A ” “ΩΝ τὴν > ΄ <3 / τῆς κεφαλῆς: ἔπειτα δ᾽ ἐπὴν ἀποφράξῃς Kal ἀποτρέ- Uns τὴν ἐπίρρυσιν, ἤν τι πρὶν ἢ εὐτρεπίζειν τὸ ae - 3, a X A a ῥεῦμα ἐς TO σῶμα ἔλθῃ, ὧδε χρὴ ἰᾶσθαι: ἣν μὲν a Ν ΩΝ ΄ > Ν > ἮΝ », μᾶλλον πρὸς τὸ δέρμα ἐκκεχωρηκὸς 7, τὰ ἔξωθεν ~ sy >” \ \ , ” \ πυριῶντα: ἣν δ᾽ ἔνδον πρὸς τὴν κοιλίην, ἔξωθεν δὲ Ν A > ΄ ΄ 1 fey ey eo) ΄ μὴ δῆλον ἢ, φάρμακον πιπίσκοντα- ἢν δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἀμφό- > , > , > ’ Ἂν Ν τερα, ἀμφοτέρων ἀφαιρέειν: ἐπιτηδεύειν δὲ χρὴ ἐγγυτάτην ἔξοδον ποιέειν, ἥν τε κάτω, HV τε ἄνω, HV ΝΜ “ lal , ΕΣ ᾽ν > τε ἄλλῃ ὅπη τοῦ σώματος ἔξοδοί εἰσιν. 22. Ὁπόταν ἰσχιὰς ἀπὸ ῥόου γένηται, σικύην Ν ΄ Neos δ΄ Ν Ἂς 4 χρὴ προσβάλλειν, καὶ ἕλκειν ἔξω, Kal μὴ κατακρού- ειν, καὶ ἔνδοθεν θερμαντήρια φάρμακα πιπίσκοντα ᾽, “ ΕΣ > Sao > Ν / διαθερμαίνειν, ὅπως ἔξοδος ἢ Kai ἔξω ἐς TO δέρμα ὑπὸ τῆς ἑλκύσιος τῆς σικύης, καὶ ἐντὸς πρὸς τὴν , «ες Ν a , e , Ν 5 A κοιλίην ὑπὸ τῆς θερμασίης: ὁπόταν yap ἀποφραχθῇ καὶ μὴ ἔχῃ ὅπη ὁδοιπορέῃ, ὁδοιπορέουσα ἐς τὰ ἄρθρα ῥέει ἐς τὸ ὑπεῖκον, καὶ ἰσχιάδα ποιέει. 23. Ἢ ὄπισθεν φθίσις: τούτῳ τὴν κεφαλὴν / > lal ΄ “ “Ἃ 3 ε καθαρτέον ἀσθενεῖ φαρμάκῳ, ἕως ἂν ἀποτρεφθῃ ὁ ῥόος, καὶ τῇ διαίτῃ ὥσπερ ἔμπροσθεν χρῶ, φάρμα- κον δὲ πίσον ἐλατήριον, καὶ κάτω γάλακτι κλύσον, ν »Κ ΄ 2A τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα πυρίῃσιν io. 94. Ὕδωρ ἐς τὸ ἐπίπλοον: ἐπὴν ὁ σπλὴν ὑπὸ πυρετοῦ μέγας γένηται, γίνεται δὲ ὅταν τὸ σῶμα 62 PLACES IN MAN the back of it. When you have succeeded in warming the front of the head, let the patient eat foods that are the most productive of phlegm and the least laxative, in order that the channels at the front of the head will dilate as much as possible. Then, after you have blocked the flux and turned it aside, if before being treated some of the flux had already gone to the body, you must treat as fol- lows. If the flux moved mainly outwards to the skin, apply vapour-baths externally; if it moved inside to the cavity, and is not evident from the outside, have the patient drink a medication. If the flux moved in both directions, remove it from both. You must take care to establish the exit as close to the source as possible, no matter whether you are employing the downward pathway, or the upward, or any of the other exits of the body. 22. When sciatica arises from a flux, you must apply a cupping instrument and draw off fluid without making any punctures. Warm the patient internally by having him drink warming medications, in order that there will be both an exit externally into the skin by the drawing of the cupping instrument, and an exit internally into the cavity brought about by heating. For when fluid is blocked up and has nowhere else to go, it goes into the joints, flowing in the direction of least resistance, and pro- duces sciatica. 23. Consumption in the back. in this patient, the head is to be cleaned out with a mild medication contin- ued until the flux is turned aside. Employ the same regi- men as in the case before, have the patient drink a diuretic medication, clean him downwards with an enema of milk, and for the rest treat him with vapour-baths. 24. Water entering the omentum. When the spleen is enlarged as the result of fever—this happens simultane- 63 316 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ANOPOTION λεπτυνθῇ, τοῖσι yap αὐτοῖσιν 6 τε σπλὴν θάλλει Kat ἊΝ A / “ Ν ἊΝ A Ν εν ον e τὸ σῶμα φθίνει: ὅταν δὲ τὸ σῶμα λεπτὸν ἢ καὶ ὁ Ν ’ Ν Ν 5 ’ Ψ “ 4 σπλὴν θάλλῃ Kat τὸ ἐπίπλοον ἅμα τῷ σώματι λεπ- lal ἐπ ἈΝ a > Lal > / > ’ ΄ > A τυνθῇ, ἡ πιμελὴ ἣ ἐν τῷ ἐπιπλόῳ ἐστί, τήκεται" ἐπὴν δὲ ταῦτά τε κενὰ πιμελῆς γένηται καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἊΝ 4 > / 3 \ > / ε σπληνὸς θάλλοντος ἀπορρέῃ ἐς τὸ ἐπίπλοον, ὡς “2 ο » ἐγγύτατα ἐὸν τὸ ἐπίπλοον, ὥς TE τεύχεα ἔχον καὶ ταῦτα κενεά, ἐσδέχεται: καὶ ἐπὴν τὸ | νόσημα ἅπαξ A a ἐν τῷ σώματι γένηται, ἐς TO νοσέον τρέπεται, ἢν μή τις εὐτρεπίζῃ, ὡς καὶ τὸ εὐτρεπιζόμενον ἐπικίνδυνον. lal eo 355 ΄ὕ ΄ὔ ε 43. Ὁ “ τοῦτον ὧδε ἰᾶσθαι: φάρμακα πιπίσκειν ὑφ᾽ ὧν ὕδωρ , ἊΝ / Ἂς ν ’ὔ καθαίρεται, καὶ σιτία τὰ φλεγματωδέστατα διδόναι: * ¢ ε ἣν δὲ μηδ᾽ οὕτω ῥάων γένηται, καίειν ὡς λεπτότατα καὶ ὡς ἐπιπολαιότατα, ὅπως τὸ ὕδωρ ἴσχειν δύνῃ, πέριξ τοῦ ὀμφαλοῦ κύκλον, καὶ ἐς τὸν ὀμφαλὸν μή. καὶ ἀφιέναι ἑκάστης ἡμέρης. τῶν νοσημάτων ὅ τι et 5 ΄ ΄ ls ΄ ἂν ἐπικίνδυνον παραλάβῃς,2 ἐν τούτοισι παρακινδυ- νεύειν χρή: ἐπιτυχὼν μὲν γὰρ ὑγιᾶ ποιήσεις, ἀτυχή- 4 “ Ἂς Θ 4 , A 9 σας δέ, ὅπερ καὶ ws ἔμελλε γίνεσθαι, τοῦτ᾽ ἔπαθεν. 25. Παιδίῳ δὲ χρὴ ὕδρωπα ὧδε ἰᾶσθαι: τὰ οἰδέ- οντα καὶ ὕδατος ἔμπλεα ἐξοίγειν μαχαιρίῳ πυκνὰ καὶ σμικρὰ ἐξοίγοντα, ἐξοίγειν δ᾽ ἐν μέρει ἑκάστῳ τοῦ σώματος, καὶ πυρίῃσι χρῆσθαι, καὶ αἰεὶ τὸ ἐξοι- γόμενον χρίειν θερμαντηρίῳ φαρμάκῳ. A Ν JA IW 4 ΄ ε 26. Πλευρῖτις ξηρὴ ἄνευ ῥόου γίνεται ὅταν ὁ » 4 A ε Ν , >. / ε Ἂς πλεύμων λίην ξηρανθῇ ὑπὸ δίψης ἀναγκαίης: ὁ γὰρ 4 “ Ν - Ὁ δ > / A A πλεύμων, ἅτε ξηρὸς ἐών, ἐπήν τι μᾶλλον EnpavOy ' Linden after Foes in note 76: μίαν AV. 64 PLACES IN MAN ously with the body becoming lean, since the same pro- cess makes both the spleen swell and the body waste— when the body is lean and the spleen swells and the omentum wastes along with the body, then the fat that is in the omentum melts. When these parts have been emp- tied of fat, and there is a flux from the swollen spleen into the omentum, its neighbouring organ, the omentum, con- taining cavities and these being empty, accepts the flux. When the disease has once developed in the body, every- thing goes to the ailing part, unless someone takes up the treatment, for even cases that are treated are dangerous. Treat this patient as follows. Have him drink medications that will clean out water, and give foods that are the most productive of phlegm. If he does not improve even with this treatment, cauterize very lightly and superficially in order that the eschar will be able to hold the water— about the umbilicus in a circle, but not in the umbilicus itself—and draw this off each day. In any of the danger- ous diseases you take on, you must accept some degree of risk: for if you are lucky, you will make the patient well, but if you fail, he only suffers what was likely to have hap- pened anyway. 25. In a child you must treat dropsy as follows. Open the areas that are swollen and full of water by making numerous small incisions with a scalpel; make these openings in every part of the body. Administer vapour- baths, and anoint all the openings with a warming medi- cation. 26. Dry pleurisy without any flux arises when the lung dries out too much, as the result of an involuntary thirst. For when the lung, which is a dry part, becomes even 2 A: ἐπικινδυνότατόν ἐστιν V. 65 318 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ANOPOTION τῆς φύσιος, ἰσχνὸς γίνεται, καὶ ἀκρατὴς γενόμενος, ν᾿ > \ \ Cia S ͵΄ ΄ A ΄ κλιθεὶς ἐς τὸ πλευρὸν ὑπ᾽ ἀκρασίης, ψαύει τοῦ πλεύ- ἊΝ lal ο ρου: καὶ ἐπὴν θίγῃ ὑγροῦ ἐόντος, ἅπτεται, καὶ πλευ- A 4 ΄ Ἂν Ἂς 5 4 4 > x Ν ρῖτιν ποιέει: τότε δὲ καὶ ὀδύνη γίνεται ἐς τὸ πλευρὸν καὶ ἐς τὴν KANLOG, καὶ πυρετός, καὶ ἐπαναχρέμπτε- ται λευκόν. τοῦτον χρὴ πολλοῖσι πότοισιν ἰᾶσθαι, Ν ’ Ν A > , 4 , ‘ καὶ λούειν, καὶ τῆς ὀδύνης φάρμακον διδόναι καὶ 2 ἊΝ > 4 A ey > e Ἂς ε 4 τάλλα τὰ ἀνάχρεμψιν ποιεῦντα" | οὗτος EV ETTA NME- ρῃσιν ὑγιὴς γίνεται, καὶ τὸ νόσημα ἀκίνδυνόν ἐστι, καὶ σιτία οὐ χρὴ διδόναι. - ‘ ΩΝ “4 / 4 ‘al "" 27. Πυρετοὶ διὰ τόδε γίνονται, ὅταν τοῦ σώματος e 7 ε 4 > » ἊΝ ἃς ὑπερφλεγμήναντος αἱ σάρκες ἀνοιδήσωσιν, καὶ τὸ , Ν ε Ν / 5 ’ὔ ᾿Ν φλέγμα καὶ ἡ χολὴ κατακλεισθέντα ἀτρεμίζωσι, καὶ μὴ ἀναψύχηται μηδὲν μήτ᾽ ἐξιὸν μήτε κινεύμενον, μήτ᾽ ἄλλου ὑπιόντος. ὁπόταν κόπος ἔχῃ καὶ πυρε- ἊΝ ἊΝ ’ὔ’ 7 x A ΩΝ ΄ τὸς καὶ πλησμονή, λούειν χρὴ πολλῷ, καὶ χρίειν ε ἴω Ν a e 4 ε ec ’ὕ ὑγρῷ, καὶ θερμαίνειν ὡς μάλιστα, ὡς ἡ θερμωλή, > 4 A 4 ε Ἂς ἴων ε A - / ἀνοιχθέντος τοῦ σώματος, ὑπὸ τοῦ ἱδρῶτος ἐξέλθῃ: ἑξῆς δὲ ταῦτα ποιέειν καὶ τρεῖς καὶ τέσσαρες ἡμέ- ρας: καὶ ἣν μὴ παύηται, φάρμακον πίσαι χοληγόν, Ν Ν 1 , Ν ΄ Ν ED A > Kal «μὴ; ψύχειν TOV TUPETOV, πρὶν ἢ τεταρταῖος ἢ, ’ “ ΕΝ ὮΝ A at, 4 / μηδ᾽ ἕως av τὸ σῶμα θάλλῃ, πιπίσκειν φάρμακον" Ν 4 “ 2 εἰ μὴ σμικρον, WOTE συνοιδέοντος οὐ γὰρ ἰνῶνται nr 4 3, ἊΣ x > Ἂς 3S 7 ‘\ > la τοῦ σώματος: ἐπὴν δὲ ἰσχνὸς ἢ, πιπίσκειν, καὶ ἰνή- ἴω , Ν 4 σεται. πυρετῷ σιτίον μὴ προσφέρειν, μηδὲ ῥοφήμα- 4 Ἂς “ ’ σιν ὑπεξάγειν, καὶ ποτὸν ὕδωρ θερμὸν καὶ μελίκρη- » ἋΣ ο “" τον καὶ ὄξος σὺν ὕδατι, ταῦτα δὲ πιπίσκειν ὡς “ vn Ν Ἂς Ν > 4 Ἂν Ν. Ν πλεῖστα: ἣν γὰρ ψυχρὸν μὴ ἐσίῃ, τὸ ποτὸν θερμὸν 66 PLACES IN MAN drier than it naturally is, it withers, becomes weak, and, because of its weakness, leans against the side and comes into contact with it. When it touches the side, a moist part, it fastens itself to it and this produces pleurisy. Then pain invades the side and the collar-bone, there is fever, and white sputum is expectorated. Treat this patient with frequent drinks, wash him, give him a medication for the pain, and do the other things that promote expectoration. He recovers in seven days, and the disease is not danger- ous; you need not give foods. 27. Fevers arise in the following way: when from an excess of phlegm in the body the tissues swell up, when phlegm and bile are closed in and become immobile, and when nothing is cooled by going out, or by moving, or by anything else passing off. When there are weariness, fever and fullness, you must wash with copious water and anoint with oil, and warm as much as possible in order that, as the body is opened, the fever heat will make its exit with the sweat. Do this successively for three or four days. If the fever does not stop, have the patient drink a medication that draws bile. Do not cool the fever until the fourth day, nor give the patient a purgative medica- tion to drink as long as the body is swollen, for the evacua- tions will not be effective, except perhaps faintly, since the body is swollen up tight. After the swelling has gone down, give a medication to drink, and he will be evacu- ated. In a fever do not give cereal, nor evacuate down- wards with gruels; as drink give warm water, melicrat and vinegar with water, and have the patient drink generous amounts; for if no cold enters the body, the drink, being ! Littré. 2 A: κρίνονται V. 67 320 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ANOPOTION ἐὸν καὶ μένον EK τοῦ σώματος τοῦ νοσέοντος adat- ΄ 4 4 BA hd 4 4 - ρέει, ἦν τε διουρήσῃ, ἤν τε διϊδρώσῃ: πάντη δὲ ἀνοιγόμενόν τε καὶ ἀναπνέον καὶ κινεύμενον τὸ nw 4 5 σῶμα συμφέρον πρήσσει. ἐπὴν δὲ ἰσχνὸν ὄντα / A “ > Ἂν Ἂν / ε Ἂς καίῃ, δῆλον ὅτι οὐ διὰ τὸ φλεγμαίνειν ὁ πυρετὸς 27 ‘\ nn a 4 / Ν ’ὔ ἔχει: καὶ ἣν μὴ παύηται, τρέφειν, καὶ φλεγμαίνειν , x SN ’ 4 / lal “ > ΙΝ ποιέειν: καὶ ἣν μηδ᾽ οὕτω ξυμφέρῃ, δῆλον ὅτι οὐκ ἡ isxvin! τὸν πυρετὸν παρέχει: τοῦτον χρὴ φάρμακον ty “Ἃ a 3, πίσαι, ὡς ὑπεξάγῃ, ὅπη ἂν μᾶλλον ὁ πυρετὸς ἔχῃ, 3, > 5, \ » > E>! nv T ἄνω, nv τε κάτω, ἣν | μὲν ἄνω, ἄνω, ἢν δὲ ΄ , QA ee a Ν 5 ΄ lal κάτω, κάτω. οὐδὲν δ᾽ ἧσσον δεῖ τοὺς ἀσθενέας TOV lal av A ἰσχυρῶν φαρμάκον πιπίσκειν, ἀλλ᾽ ὁμοίως ἢ μοῦνον οὕτω, τοῖσι μὲν ἰσχυροῖς ἰσχυρόν, τοῖσι δ᾽ ἀσθενέ- σιν ἀσθενές. τὰς δὲ πυρώσιας ποτοῖσι καὶ ῥοφήμα- σιν, ὥστε τὸν πυρετὸν ψυκτηρίῳ φαρμάκῳ ἐκλύειν, 4 a EA Ν 77 Ν > τὰ ‘\ καμμάρῳ ἢ ἄλλῳ τινὶ τοιούτῳ: καὶ ἐπὴν «μὴ» 4 » A “ a λύσῃς" τῷ ψυκτηρίῳ, θερμαντηρίοισι χρῶ ἑξῆς: > ἊΝ, Ἂν ἊΝ / 4 4 Lal ἐπὴν δὲ μὴ παύηται, ψυκτηρίοισι πάλιν χρῆσθαι. > a A , 28. Ἴκτερον ὧδε χρὴ ἰῆσθαι: ἐπὴν παραλάβῃς, τρέφε, καὶ λουτροῖσι καὶ πιαντηρίοισι καὶ ποτοῖσι ἂν / a A a 4 καὶ σιτίοισι καθυγραίνειν ἢ τρεῖς ἢ τέσσαρας ἡμέ- ρας: ἐπὴν δ᾽ ὑγρανθῇ τὸ σῶμα, καθαίρειν καὶ < ΄ Ν A ΄ > ΄ > ΄ ξηραίνειν τὸ σῶμα, λιπαρά τε ἐξαίφνης ἐξαρύσαι, πάντη προσφέρων φάρμακον 7 δυνατὸν ὑγρότητα 3 ων Ν Ν Ν Ν 4 > “A ἐξάγειν: πρὸς δὲ τὴν κεφαλὴν καθαρτηρίῳ ἀσθενεῖ: Ν Ν Ἂ Ν Ἂς A 4 ~ και οὐρητικὰ πιπισκειν καὶ πρὸ τῶν σιτιῶὼῶν TOUTOV Ἰ ἡ ἰσχνίη Potter: ἐχρῆν AV. 5 Littré: λύσης A: ναυτιῶτο V. 68 PLACES IN MAN warm and staying in place, will take something away from the ailing body, whether it passes off in the urine or as sweat, and the body, being opened, taking in breath and moving on every side, fares better. When the body is feverish without being swollen, clearly the fever is not being caused by swelling. If such a fever does not go away, feed the body and make it swell up with phlegm. If this does not help either, it is clear that thinness is not producing the fever. Have this patient drink a medication that will evacuate from the region that the fever is mainly occupying, whether that be the upper or the lower; i.e. if the fever is mainly in the upper region, give a medication to evacuate upwards, if mainly in the lower region, a med- ication to evacuate downwards. Weak patients need to drink a medication just as much as do strong ones, only whereas you give strong patients a strong medication, give weak patients a weak one. Relieve feverish condi- tions with drinks and gruels just as you relieve a fever with a cooling medication, employing aconite or some- thing else of the same kind. When you do not succeed in relieving it with the cooling medication, use in turn heat- ing ones. When that does not bring a stop, revert to cool- ing ones. 28. You must treat jaundice as follows. When you first take on the patient, build him up and moisten him thor- oughly for three or four days with baths, with substances that fatten, with drinks, and with foods. When the body has been moistened, clean and dry it, and all at once draw off its fullness by applying medication everywhere that moisture can be drawn out; for the head use a mild clean- ing medication, and have the patient drink diuretics. At 69 322 ΠΕΡῚ TOHMQN TON KATA ANOPOTION ἃ τὸν χρόνον, Ov! καθαίρεις τὴν τεταραγμένην ὑγρό- 4 τητα, κατάποτον δίδου, ws μὴ τρέφηται ἀπὸ τούτου ο Ν la “ Ν | > ΄ Ν TO σωμα' OTAV de ἰισχναινήται, και λου- τοῦ ὑγροῦ A 4 A \ 4 Lal 5 4 ἣν (740 τροῖσι κάθαιρε: τοῦ δὲ σικύου τοῦ ἀγρίου THY pilav ᾽’ 5 οι 5 4 5 Ἂς Τὰ a ‘\ κόψας, ἐς ὕδωρ ἐμβαλών, ἀπὸ τούτου hove: χοληγὰ δὲ φάρμακα μὴ πίπισκε, ὡς μὴ ταράσσῃ μᾶλλον τὸ σῶμα τοῦτον: ἐπὴν δὲ. ξηρὸν ἢ τὸ τεταραγμένον, 4 Ἂν ε A 4 Ἂν τρέφε, μηδενὶ ὑποχωρητικῷ φαρμάκῳ, μηδὲ διουρη- A > 9 ΦΎΣΤΑ ν Ψ > ΄ ΄ τικῷ, ἀλλ᾽ οἴνῳ οἰνώδει καὶ ἅσσα ἐρυθρότερον ποιέει \ +” ΄ 1 \ \ 5 ΄ τὸν ἄνθρωπον, τούτοισιν: ἢν δὲ χλωρὸς ἢ, πάλιν 5 7 vf Δ. 4 ε Ἂς A Ν ἐξαρύσαι, ξηραίνειν δὲ μηδαμά, ὡς μὴ παγῇ χλωρὸς ἐών. 29. Θηρίον ἐπέρχεται ἐπὶ τὸ σῶμα διὰ τόδε: ἐπὴν 7 ε Ἂν ε 7ι ἊΝ « Ἂς / φλεγμήνῃ ἡ σὰρξ ἡ πέριξ, καὶ οἱ κρημνοὶ μεγάλοι ἔωσι τοῦ ἕλκεος, καὶ τὸ ἕλκος ὑγρόν, καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἕλκεος ἐξηρασμένος ἐπῇ ἰχώρ, ἢ τὸ ἕλκος συμπεπη- Ων ΕΝ A ¢ yos ἢ ἢ ξυνσεσηπός, ὁ ἰχὼρ ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἕλκεος ἀπορρέων κωλύεται ἔξω χωρέειν ὑπὸ τοῦ ἐπιπεπηγό- 5 Ν laa Ν, Ἂς 4 τ \ Ἂς ¢ τος ἐπὶ TOU ἕλκεος πρὸς τὴν σάρκα: ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ὑπο- δέχεται, ὥστε μετέωρός γ᾽ ἐοῦσα αὐτὴ ὑπὸ φλεγμα- σίης, καὶ ὅταν ἀφίκηται ὁ ἰχὼρ ὑπορρέων, σήπει καὶ μετεωρίζει. τοῦτον φαρμάκοισιν ὑγραίνουσιν" αὐτὸ τὸ ἕλκος χρίειν, ὡς ὑγραινομένου ἔξω τὸ ῥεῦμα ῥέῃ ἐκ τοῦ ἕλκεος, καὶ μὴ ὑπὸ τὴν σάρκα, καὶ τὰ κατάρροα τοῦ ἕλκεος ψύχουσι φαρμάκοισιν, ὡς χει- μιοῦσα συμπιλῆται ἡ σὰρξ καὶ μὴ διαρραγεῖσα ! Littré: om. A: ἣν V. 2 Potter: χρόνου AV. 3 Joly: -vovras AV. 70 PLACES IN MAN this period, when you are cleaning out the disordered moisture, give a pill before meals in order that the body will not take up nourishment from the moist part. When the moisture has been removed, clean with baths, too: pound root of squirting cucumber, put it in water, and wash with this. Do not have the person drink medications that drive off bile, lest these disturb his body even more. When what was stirred up by the moisture has become dry, build the person up without employing either a laxa- tive medication or diuretic, but give him strong wine and substances that promote ruddiness. If he appears yellow- green, draw off fluid again, but be careful not to dry him even a little, lest he become fixed in the yellow-green state. 29. A malignant ulcer assails the body because of the following: when the tissue around the ulcer swells up and its edges are enlarged, and the ulcer is moist, and on the ulcer there is serum that has dried up, or the ulcer is clot- ted together or putrefied into a mass, the serum flowing out of the ulcer is prevented from moving outwards by the material clotted on top of the ulcer against the tissue. The tissue, being raised up in its phlegmasia, receives the serum, and when it flows under the tissue, the tissue sup- purates and becomes raised. In this patient anoint the ulcer itself with moistening medications in order that, the ulcer being moistened, the flux will move outward from the ulcer and not under the tissue, and anoint the suffu- sion of the ulcer with cooling medications in order that, being chilled, the tissue will felt together rather than be torn apart and provoke a counter-fluxion. Generally, 71 3 γη 4 ΠΕΡῚ TOMOQN TON KATA ANOPOTION > ΄ Ν », NAG? 4 , ἀντεπιρρέῃ: καὶ τἄλλα δὲ ἕλκεα ψύχουσι περιχρίειν, καὶ ἐπ᾽ αὐτὰ τὰ ὑγραίνοντα ἐπιτιθέναι. ΄ OPN “ ΄ “ \ a 30. Κύναγχος ἀπὸ αἵματος γίνεται, ὅταν TO αἷμα a NG a ὮΝ a > A ΄ , 1 παγῇ τὸ ἐν τῇσι φλεψὶ τῇσιν ἐν τῷ τραχήλῳ: τούτῳ 5 Ν lol > A ΄ὕ A eo > , ἀπὸ TOV ἐν τοῖσι γυίοισι φλεβῶν αἷμα ἀφαιρέειν, Ν “ ’ “ , καὶ ἅμα κάτω ὑπεξάγειν, WS TO τὴν νοῦσον παρέχον τοῦτο κατασπασθῇ: καὶ γλῶσσαν, ὁπόταν ἕλκεα » , ἔχῃ μεγάλα, ὡσαύτως εὐτρεπιστέον. \ ΄ \ fy ext ee) A 55 “ 31. Τὰ νοσήματα χρὴ ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς ἰᾶσθαι: ὅσα A / ἴω μὲν ἀπὸ τῶν ῥόων γίνεται, τοὺς ῥόους παύειν πρῶ- “ eS) οὐ ἐν ΄ N > N A ΄ τον: ὅσα δ᾽ am’ ἄλλου, παύειν τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ νοσή- 3, “Ἃ ματος, καὶ εὐτρεπίζειν: ἔπειτα τὸ συνερρυηκός, ἣν Ν Ν “3. > 4 a Ν > / lal μὲν πολὺ ἢ, ἐξάγειν: ἣν δὲ ὀλίγον, διαιτῶν καθι- στάναι. We “ \ £ 32. Κεφαλῆς κατάγματα: ἢν μὲν" τὸ ὀστέον “Ὁ ἊΝ a > / Ἂν + ral \ καταγῇ Kat ξυντριβῇ, ἀκίνδυνον: Kat ἰᾶσθαι χρὴ aA a lal τοῦτον ὑγραίνουσι φαρμάκοισιν: ἢν δὲ ῥαγῇ καὶ ᾽ὔ A ῥωγμὴ ἐγγένηται, ἐπικίνδυνον: τοῦτον πρίειν, ὡς Ν Lal μὴ κατὰ τὴν ῥωγμὴν τοῦ ὀστέου ἰχὼρ ῥέων τὴν μήνιγγα σήπῃ: ὥστε γὰρ κατὰ στενὸν ἐσιὼν μέν, > Ἂς ΩΝ + Si Ν , 4 Ἂς ” ἐξιὼν δὲ ov, λυπέει καὶ μαίνεσθαι ποιέει TOV ἄνθρω- A 5» 3 A A ‘ Tov" τοῦτον χρὴ πρίειν, ws ἔξοδος ἢ τῷ ἰχῶρι, μὴ μοῦνον ἔσοδος, εὐρέως διαπρισθέντος, καὶ φαρμά- κοισι χρῆσθαι, ἅσσα ἐφ᾽ ἑωυτὰ τὸ ὑγρὸν ἕλκουσι, Ἂν / καὶ λούειν. ! Linden: τούτων AV. 2V: μὴ A. 72 PLACES IN MAN you must anoint the area around ulcers with cooling agents and on the ulcers themselves apply moistening substances. 30. Angina arises from blood, when the blood in the vessels of the neck congeals. In this patient let blood from the vessels of the limbs; at the same time, purge below in order that what is producing the disease will be drawn downwards. The tongue, too, when it has large ulcers, is to be treated likewise. 31. Diseases must be treated from their origin.? In those that arise from fluxes, first stop the fluxes; in those that arise from something else, stop the source of the dis- ease and turn it to the better. Then, if what has flowed together is copious, evacuate it, if it is little, restore the patient by means of regimen. 32. Fractures in the head: if the bone is fractured and shatters, this is not dangerous:? you must heal such a patient with moistening medications. But if the bone fractures and a cleft arises, this is dangerous. Trephine the patient in order that the serum flowing down through the cleft in the bone does not make the membrane suppu- rate, for inasmuch as it enters through a narrow space and does not come out again, it produces pain and makes the patient delirious. You must trephine this patient, in order that there will be a way out for the serum—not just a way in—by sawing open a wide space. Apply medications that attract moisture, and bathe. 4 See chapter | above. b See Wounds in the Head 17 for the same view: “where the bones are broken in with many and rather wide fractures they are still less dangerous, and are more readily removed.” 73 326 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ANOPOTION 33. Πυρεταίνοντι κεφαλὴν μὴ κάθαιρε, ὡς μὴ ΄ὔ΄ , AS Ν Ἂς Ἂς , μαίνηται: θερμαίνουσι yap τὰ τὴν κεφαλὴν καθαί- ροντα φάρμακα: πρὸς δὴ τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦ πυρετοῦ θερμὸν τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦ φαρμάκου προσελθὸν μανίην ποιέει. θανάσιμα τρώματα: ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἂν τινι κακῶς ἔχοντι χολὴν μέλαιναν ἀπεμέσῃ, ἀποθνήσκει ὁ τὸ τρῶμα ἊΝ lal a a > ἔχων. καὶ ὑπὸ ἰνηθμοῦ. ὃς ἂν ἐχόμενος καὶ ἔχων 5 / Ν Ν 28 > 4 Ν 4 ἀσθενέως καὶ λεπτὸς ἐὼν ἐξαπίνης ξηρὸν καθίζῃ, 5 4 > ων ε Ν cal > Pa ε 4 ἀποθνήσκει. ἐπὴν ὑπὸ θερμωλῆς ἐχομένῳ ἑλκύδρια 5 ΄ὔ > lal 37 / / > la ἐκθύωσιν ἀσθενεῖ ἐόντι πέριξ πελιδνά, ἀποθνήσκει. ἐπὴν ὑπό τινος νοσήματος ἐχομένῳ ἀσθενεῖ ἤδη 37 Ν 5 ΤᾺ 4 5 Ἄν 4 ’ ἐόντι πελιδνὰ ἐκθύῃ, θανάσιμον. ἐπὴν φάρμακόν τις πιὼν ὑπέρινος ἢ' καὶ κάτω καὶ ἄνω ὑπεκχωρέῃ, οἶνον καταρροφεῖν τὸ μὲν πρῶτον κεκρημένον, » » Ν | ΄ \ ΄ ΄ ἔπειτα ἄκρητον θαμινὰ διϊδόναι, καὶ παύεται. φάρ- δὲ SIF > A J > va 2 Ν δ᾽ μακον δὲ μήτ᾽ ἰνηθμῷ μήτ᾽ ἐμετήριον,Σ χολὴ δ᾽, lal a Xn ϑι ἐπὴν αὐτομάτη ῥαγῇ ἢ κάτω ἢ ἄνω, χαλεπωτέρα παύειν: ἡ γὰρ αὐτομάτη ὑπὸ βίης γινομένης τῷ ΄ κ “᾿ ig) eS ΄ ε΄ > crak σώματι βιᾶται: ἣν δ᾽ ὑπὸ φαρμάκου ῥέῃ, οὐχ ὑπὸ συγγενέος βιᾶται. ἐπὴν παραλάβῃς ἰνώμενόν τε καὶ ἐμεῦντα, μὴ παύειν τὸν ἔμετον: ὁ γὰρ ἔμετος τὸν “ 4 3 VOTEPOV TAVO ALTO > Ν 4 es Ν 4 ΕΝ ἰνηθμὸν παύει: ῥάων δὲ ὁ ἔμετος " a ed ἣν Re ΡΥ ΄ “ ΄ av: ἣν δ᾽ ἀσθενὴς ἢ ὁ ταῦτα πάσχων, ὕπνου φάρμα- κον ἐμετηρίσας διδόναι. τὸ μὲν αἷμα ὁπόταν νοῦσον 4 > 4 4 XN \ / 4 ε Ν ποιέῃ, ὀδύνην παρέχει, τὸ δὲ φλέγμα βάρος, ὡς τὰ πολλά. - ΄ a \ 33: 7 , ΄ 34, Τῶν νοσημάτων ὧν μὴ ἐπίστηταί τις, φάρ- ! A: ὑπερνοσῆ Ν. 74 PLACES IN MAN 33. In a patient with fever do not clean the head, lest he become delirious, for medications that clean the head warm, and when the heat coming from the medication is added to that coming from the fever, it produces delir- ium. Mortal wounds: if it is any kind of a severe one and besides the wounded person vomits dark bile, he dies. Anyone who suffers an evacuation, is weak and thin, and then suddenly becomes dry, dies. When in a patient with fever heat small ulcers livid all around break out when he is in a weakened state, he dies. When, in a patient with some disease who is already weak, livid spots break out, this is a fatal sign. When, on drinking a medication, someone is cleaned violently and evacuates both down- wards and upwards, first let him drink wine mixed with water, and then regularly give him undiluted wine; the evacuation will stop. When bile breaks out spontaneously either downwards or upwards without a purgative or emetic medication, it is more difficult to stop; for what is spontaneous is driven by a force originating in the body, whereas what flows as the result of a medication is not driven by an inherent force. When you take on a person evacuating downwards and also vomiting, do not stop his vomiting, for vomiting stops downward evacuation, and the vomiting will stop more easily later. If the person suf- fering these things is weak, give him a sleep-producing medication after the emesis. Blood, when it provokes dis- ease, produces pain, whereas phlegm produces heaviness in most cases. 34. In diseases that you do not know, have the patient 2 AV. Littré comments: “La construction est embarrassée: mais le sens est clair.” Joly adds πιόντος. 3 V: πυρετὸς A. 75 328 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ \ μακον πίσαι μὴ ἰσχυρόν: nv δὲ ῥᾷάων γένηται, δέδεικται ὁδός, εὐτρεπιστέον ἐστὶν ἰσχνήναντα" ἢν Ν Ν [χὰ > > Ἂς 7, »᾿ > , a δὲ μὴ ῥάων ἢ, ἀλλὰ χαλεπώτερον ἔχῃ, τἀναντία. HV Ν 5 “" / / 4 Ν μὴ ἰσχναίνειν ξυμφέρῃ, φλεγμαίνειν συνοίσει καὶ lal 7 θαμινὰ μεταλλάσσειν, ταύτῃ TH γνώμῃ χρώμενος. τῶν δὲ νοσημάτων ἦν τι,͵ ἰσχύοντος μὲν τοῦ ἀλγέ- οντος, παραλάζηται, τοῦ δὲ νοσήματος ἀσθενέος, ἐνταῦθα μὲν ἰσχυροτέρῳ θαρσεῦντα τῷ φαρμάκῳ τοῦ νοσήματος χρῆσθαι, ὥστε καὶ ἦν τι τοῦ ὑγιαί- 3 ἊΝ A vovTos ἢ ἀπάγειν σὺν τῷ ἀσθενέοντι, οὐδεμία / > / 5 Ν ἣν Ἂν ἊΝ / > / βλάβη ἐστίν: ἐπὴν δὲ τὸ μὲν νόσημα ἰσχυρότερον, ‘\ ον ᾽’ 5 ΄ 4 > 7 ἴω τὸν δὲ νοσέοντα ἀσθενέα λάβῃς, ἀσθενέσι τοῖσι φαρμάκοισιν εὐτρεπίζειν, ἅσσα αὐτοῦ τοῦ νοσήμα- τος περιέσονται καὶ ἀπάξουσιν, ἀσθενέστερον δὲ μηδὲν ποιήσουσι τὸν ἀλγέοντα. ‘\ Ν ἊΝ 5 Ἂν e ’ 4 35. Γυμναστικὴ δὲ καὶ ἰητρικὴ ὑπεναντία πέφυ- κεν, ἡ μὲν γὰρ γυμναστικὴ οὐ δεῖται μεταλλαγὰς ποιέειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἡ ἰητρική: τῷ μὲν | γὰρ ὑγιαίνοντι οὐκ ἀρήγει ἐκ τοῦ παρεόντος μεταλλάσσειν, τῷ δὲ ἀλγέοντι. 386. Τῶν δὲ νοσημάτων ἅσσα μὲν ἕλκεα ἐόντα ὑπερέχοντα τοῦ ἄλλου σώματός εἰσιν, ἅμα τοῖσι φαρμάκοισι καὶ λιμῷ χρὴ ἰῆσθαι. ε A ε »” 37. Ῥόου ξυμφέρον ἐκ κεφαλῆς ῥέοντος, ἔμετος. 38. Τὰ παλαιὰ νοσήματα χαλεπώτερον ἰᾶσθαι τῶν νέων: ἀλλὰ νοσήματα τὰ παλαιὰ νέα πρῶτον / “ 4 > , Ν ποιέειν: ἕλκος πεπωρωμένον, ἐκβάλλοντα τὸ σκλη- ρὸν σηπτηρίῳ φαρμάκῳ, ἔπειτα συνάγειν. τῶν 76 PLACES IN MAN drink a purgative medication that is not too strong. If he improves, the path is revealed: treatment is to be the removal of moisture. If the patient does not improve, but gets worse, treatment is to be the opposite: if the removal of moisture does not benefit, it will be of help to promote phlegm, and to vary the treatment frequently, with the same purpose. If some disease attacks a person, and the person is strong but the disease is weak, you may confi- dently employ a purgative medication stronger than the disease, since if anything of what is healthy happens to get carried off with what is diseased, no damage will result. However, when you take on a case where the disease is stronger but the patient is weak, you must treat with mild medications that will overcome the disease and get rid of it, but in no way weaken the patient. 35. Gymnastics and medicine are by nature opposites, for gymnastics is not intended to bring about any changes, whereas medicine must, since the healthy person is not benefited by changes from his present state, but the ill one is. 36. Diseases involving ulcers that cover the rest of the body you must treat simultaneously with purgative medi- cations and a fasting regimen. 37. Vomiting is beneficial for a flux flowing from the head. 38. Old diseases are more difficult to treat than new ones; therefore you must first make old diseases into new ones. When a wound has become hardened, remove the hard part with a putrefactive medication, and then draw it 1 Joly: τις AV. 77 330 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ ΤΩΝ KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ ο δ lal φαρμάκων ὅσα φλεγμαίνειν ποιέει μάλιστα, ταῦτα συνάγουσι τὰ καθαρά: τὰ δ᾽ ἰσχναίνοντα, ταῦτα δὲ ΄ vn A καθαίρουσιν. ἣν δέ τις συνάγῃ τὰ μήπω ὡραῖα , la GM τὰ © 5, ἐόντα, τὸ νοσέον τρέφει σῶμα ὃ ἂν ἕλκος ἔχῃ: καὶ “Δ Ν 4 , Ἂς “ Ν 5 lal ἣν μὲν συνάγειν δέῃ TO ἕλκος Kal ἐμπλῆσαι, φλεγ- a > 4 Ἂν “Δ 5 ial / , μαίνειν apnye, καὶ nv ev κεφαλῇ σάρκα βούλῃ: > ΄ 1 Ν ε Ν ε Ν aA ΄ > f eravadhepopern! yap ἡ σὰρξ ὑπὸ τῶν σιτίων ὠθέει ὮΝ A cal Ey τὴν ὑπὸ τοῦ φαρμάκου σηπομένην Kal ξυμμαχεῖ: HV δὲ μετέωρον ἢ λίην, ἰσχναίνειν τοῖσι σιτίοισι." 39. Τοὺς ἀνιωμένους καὶ νοσέοντας καὶ ἀπάγχε- ᾽7ὔ fA es we / σθαι βουλομένους, pavdpayopou pilav πρωὶ πιπί- 3, A e σκειν ἔλασσον ἢ ws μαίνεσθαι. σπασμὸν ὧδε χρὴ ἰᾶσθαι: πῦρ παρακαίειν ἑκατέρωθεν τῆς κλίνης, καὶ > ED μανδραγόρου pilav πιπίσκειν ἔλασσον ἢ ws μαίνε- ’ὔ σθαι, καὶ πρὸς τοὺς τένοντας τοὺς ὀπισθίους σακκία a 3 προστιθέναι θερμά. ἀπὸ σπασμοῦ πυρετὸς HV ἐπι- 3 al / a A λάβῃ, παύεται αὐθημερὸν ἢ τῇ ὑστεραίῃ ἢ τῇ τρίτῃ | ἡμέρῃ. ἀπὸ ῥήγματος πυρετὸς οὐ λάζεται πλεῖον \ A \ / 7 ἢ τρεῖς ἢ τέσσαρας ἡμέρας: ἣν δὲ λάζηται, οἰόμενος Spent OR ” Sos acy \ ΄ " ἀπὸ ῥήγματος ἔχειν, am’ ἄλλου τινὸς λάζοιτο ἄν, ε a καὶ οὐ χρὴ WS ἂν ἀπὸ ῥήγματος εὐτρεπίζειν. ὁπό- Ey > Ν ταν ἄνθρωπος συντεταμένος ἢ τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας, μανίην ἑωυτῷ ποιέει. a ς “ 40. Φλέβα δὲ ὧδε χρὴ καίειν ἐπιτήδειαν," ὥστε ‘ ΄ A oN \ 4 / 3 “Ἃ a TO νοσὴημα ὁ ἂν και 7) νοσέων <. ..>° NV κεκαυμε- νος ἢ ὥνθρωπος, ῥέῃ δέ τι τοῦ αἵματος, ὡς μὴ ἐπι- Ἷ ῥέῃ μ μ ! A: ἐπανατρεφομ- V. 78 PLACES IN MAN together. Medications that provoke the greatest swelling draw together what is clean; those that remove moisture, clean. If you draw together what has not yet become mature, you nourish the ailing body that has a wound. If it is necessary to draw the wound together and to fill it full, it helps to provoke swelling, even if you wish to pro- mote tissue in the head. For the tissue, being restored by the food, thrusts off what has been putrefied by the medi- cation, and acts as an ally. If the wound is excessively thick, remove its moisture by means of foods. 39. To those who are troubled and ill and want to hang themselves give mandrake root to drink early in the morning, an amount less than would make them deliri- ous. A convulsion must be treated as follows. Keep fires lighted on each side of the bed, and have the patient drink mandrake root to an amount less than would make him delirious; to the posterior tendons apply warm poul- tices. If a fever comes on in consequence of a convulsion, the convulsion stops on the same day, on the next day, or on the third day. Fever arising from a tear does not last for more than three or four days; if a fever does last, although it may be held to be from a tear, in fact it is from something else, and you must not treat it as if it were from a tear. When a person is suffering spasms in his legs and arms, he becomes delirious. 40. You must cauterize the appropriate vessel as fol- lows, so that the disease, wherever it is present ... If, when a person has been cauterized, some haemorrhaging 2 Potter: -δειον AV. 3 Ermerins conj. lacun. “9 332 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΌΠΩΝ TON KATA ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ κίνδυνον ἢ τοῦτο αὐτῷ, ἀμφότερα ταῦτ᾽ ἐστὶ ποιέειν" a A - Ὁ ἣν διακαύσῃς ταύτῃ ἐν τῷ πόνῳ οὗ εἵνεκα ἐκαίετο, , Ν lal zs Ν lal ov ξυμφύεται, ὠφέλησε δὲ τῷ ῥόῳ: ἣν yap διακαῇ, Sr ἴω Ν > ov ῥέει: ἐπὴν yap διακαῇ, TO ἄκρον ἑκάτερον ava- 4 ἴων ἂς a / Ν 4 E> ΄ τρέχει τῆς φλεβὸς ἣ διεκάη, καὶ συναυαίνεται: ἣν δέ <ri>! καταλελειμμένον ἢ, ὑπὸ τοῦ καταλελειμμένου, A ε Fac “Ἀ Ν e διαρρέοντος τοῦ αἵματος," ὑγραίνεται: jv δὲ αἷμα e7 > Zz / > / a“ Ἂς “οἷ ῥέῃ ἐκ φλεβός, διακαίειν ἐπικαρσίην: ἣν δὲ μὴ 4 lal » Ν παύηται πρὸς ταῦτα, ἄνω καὶ κάτω ἑκατέρωθεν δια- ’ὔ’ ες a: an Ν e Lays 7 τάμνειν, ws ἀποτρεφθῇ τὸ αἷμα ῥέον: διαλελαμμέ- Ν Ἂ ea 4 an Ἂς > ἣν > ᾽ὔ νον γὰρ φαρμάκῳ ῥᾷον παύειν ἢ τὸ ἀθρόον. ὀδύνης A A «“ Ν A ral ἐν κεφαλῇ τοῦ αἵματος ἀφαιρέειν ἀπὸ τῶν φλεβῶν: BS \ ἈΝ ΄ > Ν ΄ 5 ΄ \ ἣν δὲ μὴ παύηται, ἀλλὰ πολυχρόνιον ἢ, διάκαιε TAS / EY / φλέβας, Kat ὑγιὴς γίνεται: Hv δὲ τὴν κεφαλὴν καθή- lal / pys, μᾶλλον πονέεις. “ Ων 41. Ἰητρικὴν οὐ δυνατόν ἐστι ταχὺ μαθεῖν διὰ / ΄ 5 , , > ’ > > A τόδε, OTL ἀδύνατόν ἐστι καθεστηκός TL ἐν αὐτῇ 4 / e ε ἊΝ ΄ὔ΄ “ “4 σόφισμα γενέσθαι, οἷον ὁ TO γράφειν Eva τρόπον Δ μαθὼν ὃν διδάσκουσι, πάντα ἐπίσταται" καὶ οἱ ἐπι- Ν , ο στάμενοι πάντες ὁμοίως διὰ τόδε, ὅτι τὸ αὐτὸ καὶ “ A a ὁμοίως ποιεύμενον νῦν TE καὶ OV νῦν οὐκ ἂν TO UTE- ΄ ΄ 5 , SEN > ΄ | “ ΄ > vavtiov γένοιτο, ἀλλ᾽ αἰεὶ ἐνδυκέως | ὅμοιόν ἐστι, καὶ οὐ δεῖ καιροῦ. ἡ δὲ ἰητρικὴ νῦν τε καὶ αὐτίκα οὐ > 4 TO αὐτὸ ποιέει, καὶ πρὸς TOV αὐτὸν ὑπεναντία ποιέει, καὶ ταῦτα ὑπεναντία σφίσιν ἑωυτοῖσιν: πρῶτον ὑπεκ- ᾽7ὕ ‘\ / χώρησιν κοιλίης τὰ ὑπεκχωρητικὰ οὐκ αἰεὶ ποιέ- ! Joly. 2 A: ῥεύματος V. 80 PLACES IN MAN occurs, in order that this will not be dangerous for him, both these things are to be done. (If you burn a vessel through at the point of the pain for which you have cau- terized, it does not grow together, but you have helped the flux; for if the vessel is burnt through, there is no haemorrhage, since when that is done each end of the vessel that was burnt through retracts and dries together. But if anything is left behind,* the wound is moistened by blood flowing through this.) If blood flows out of a vessel, burn it through at right angles. If the flow does not stop with this treatment, cut the vessel through above and below on both sides, in order that the blood as it flows will be turned away; for blood whose flow is divided is easier to stop with a medication than what flows in a mass. For pain in the head, draw off blood from the vessels; if the pain does not stop, but lasts for a long time, burn the ves- sels through, and the patient will recover. If you clean the head, you make the pain worse. 41. Medicine cannot be learned quickly because it is impossible to create any established principle in it, the way that a person who learns writing according to one sys- tem that people teach understands everything; for all who understand writing in the same way do so because the same symbol does not sometimes become opposite, but is always steadfastly the same and not subject to chance. Medicine, on the other hand, does not do the same thing at this moment and the next, and it does opposite things to the same person, and at that things that are self- contradictory. First, laxatives do not always provoke 4 Te. if the vessel is not burnt completely through. 81 ΠΕΡῚ TONMQN TON KATA ANOPOTION »5 ἣν e Ν / , ουσι, καὶ τὰ ὑπεκχωρητικὰ ἀμφότερα ποιέουσι, τάχα δὲ οὐδ᾽ οὕτως ἔχουσι τὰ ὑπεκχωρητικὰ τοῖσι ΄ὔ ᾽’ὔ al στασίμοις ὡς ὑπεναντία. ἐπιστάσης τῆς κοιλίης, ΝΥ ‘\ ΄ὔ I, a ἊΝ A > ἊΝ διὰ τὴν λίην στάσιν φλεγμῆναν τὸ σῶμα, ἐς τὴν / ΄ > / “ «ε 4 κοιλίγν φλέγματος ἀφικομένου, οὕτως ἡ στάσις ε 4 , Ν Ἂς / x ὑπεκχώρησιν ἐποιήσεν" ἐπὴν yap TO φλέγμα ἐς τὴν / 5 ΄ 5 ἊΝ ΄ 5 ΄ὔ Ν Ν κοιλίην ἐσέλθῃ, ἰνηθμὸς γίνεται: ἐν τούτῳ δὲ τὰ 4 a / ὑπεκχωρητικὰ φύσει στάσιν ποιέουσιν ἐν TH κοιλίῃ. Ἃ Ν Ἂς Ὁ Ν γι > ΄ 1 δὲ ἣν μὲν μὴ ὑπεκχωρητικὰ προσφέρῃς, ἐκκλύζηται" δὲ Ν A > lal TO νοσεῖν ποιέον καὶ ὑγραίνηται: ἐπὴν ἐκκλυσθῇ, γίνεται ὑγιής. καὶ οὕτω τά τε στάσιμα τοῖσιν ὑπεκ- 2 ποιέουσι τῆς κοιλίης, καὶ τοῖσι χωρητικοῖσ! ταὐτὸ στασίμοισι τὰ ὑπεκχωρητικά. ΙΝ 5 Ἂν Ν “2 ἊΝ ἊΝ > > ἊΝ Ν Τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον [καὶ τοὺς ἐρυθροὺς καὶ τοὺς ΄ τ Ν Ν 50 Ν ΄ Ν xAwpovs:|° καὶ τὰ φλεγματώδεα χλωροὺς ποιέει καὶ ἀχρόους, καὶ τὰ ἰσχναίνοντα εὐχρόους: ἑκατέρου δ᾽ ἐστὶ φάρμακον τὰ ὑπεναντία τῷ ὑπεναντίῳ: αὐτίκα ὅταν φλεγμαίνῃ χλωρὸς ἐών, ἐκλύεται, ἣν [μή] τι 5 ’ὔ , / > 4 lal ἰσχναίνῃ φάρμακον προσενεχθέν: ἐνθάδε τῷ φλεγ- μαίνοντι τὸ ἰσχναῖνον ὠφέλησεν: τούτων δὲ τό ποτε ὠφελεύμενον τῳ ὠφελεῦντι νῦν ὠφελεῖ ἐνταῦθα, ὁπό- ταν ὑπὸ ἰσχνότητος ἄχροος καὶ χλωρὸς ἢ: ἣν γάρ lal ΄ 7 Ν / τις φλεγματῶδες προσφέρῃ, παύεται TO χλωρόν. ! Ermerins: ἐκλύεται (-ἡται) AV. 2 Littré: στάσιν AV. 3 Del. Ermerins. ἦν: χολὸς A. 5 Del. Foes in note 108 after Cornarius. 82 PLACES IN MAN evacuation of the cavity, they may provoke evacuation both upwards and downwards, and it is possible for laxa- tives not even to act in the opposite way from things that promote stasis. For example, with the cavity stopped by a medication, the excessive stasis has often filled the body with phlegm, and as the phlegm came to the cavity, in this way the stasis has brought about evacuation; for when phlegm enters the cavity, evacuation occurs; in this patient, then, naturally laxative substances bring about a stasis in the cavity. (If you do not administer laxatives, let what is making the patient ill be washed out with an enema, and moisten him; when it has been washed out, he recovers.) In this way, agents that promote stasis do the same thing for the cavity as do laxatives, and laxatives the same as agents that promote stasis. In the same way [in both ruddy and jaundiced per- sons], agents that promote phlegm make patients both yellow-green and pallid, and those that remove moisture make them ruddy; in each case there is a medication— opposite agents to the opposite condition. Immediately when a jaundiced person swells up, the swelling is resolved, if some medication that is administered dries; thence, what dries has helped the patient who was swollen. But what was helped at one time by something helping it, now helps in turn, e.g. when a person is pallid and yellow-green because of a drying agent: if someone gives him a medication that promotes phlegm, the yellow- greenness goes away. 4 T.e. as a step in their mode of action. 83 334 336 ΠΕΡῚ ΤΟΠῺΝ ΤΩΝ KATA ANOPOTION 5 / A 42. Ὀδύνη τε γίνεται Kal διὰ TO ψυχρὸν καὶ διὰ Ν ᾽ὔ ἊΝ ‘A Ν 4 Ν ‘\ Ν y+ Ἂς τὸ θερμόν, καὶ διὰ τὸ πλέον καὶ διὰ τὸ ἔλασσον: καὶ ἊΝ ἴω “ νι ἐν μὲν τοῖσιν ἐψυγμένοισι φύσει ἐκ τοῦ σώματος Ν ὯΝ / Ἂς Ν Lal / > 4 / πρὸς τὸ δέρμα διὰ τὸ θερμαῖνον λίην ὀδύνη yive- a cal Ν rau! ἐν δὲ τοῖσι θερμοῖσι φύσει διὰ τὸ ψυχρόν: καὶ Ν ἴω A / lol ἐν μὲν τοῖσι ξηροῖσι φύσει ὑγραινομένοις, ἐν δὲ τοῖς ε A 4 4 ΙΝ Ν᾽ - ὑγροῖσι φύσει ξηραινομένοισι: τὴν yap φύσιν διαλ- ¢ 4 Ν ᾽’ e > , λασσομένοις ἑκάστοισι Kat διαφθειρομένοις at ὀδύ- ναι γίνονται: ὑγιαίνονταί τε αἱ ὀδύναι τοῖσιν ὑπε- » τὸ Cees ΄ , RE) a ναντιοισιν" LOLOV εκάστῳ VOONMATL <TL>~ ἐστι TOLOL A / ἊΝ Ν Ν Ἂς , A θερμοῖσι φύσει, διὰ δὲ τὸ ψυχρὸν νοσέουσι, θερμαῖ- “4 Ν A id ἈΝ iA vov τε καὶ τάλλα τούτων κατὰ λόγον. ΝΜ [2 , Ν SY “ἢ "ὦ , Αλλος ὅδε τρόπος: διὰ τὰ ὅμοια νόσος γίνεται, Ν © καὶ διὰ τὰ ὅμοια προσφερόμενα ἐκ νοσεύντων ὑγιαί- νονται" οἷον στραγγουρίην τὸ αὐτὸ ποιέει οὐκ ἐοῦ- ἊΝ 5 lal Ν 5 Ἂς ’ Ἂν Ἂν Ν Ἂς σαν, καὶ ἐοῦσαν τὸ αὐτὸ παύει: καὶ βὴξ κατὰ τὸ “2 “ A ar αὐτό, ὥσπερ καὶ στραγγουρίη, ὑπὸ TOV αὐτῶν γίνε- Ν ΄ + “ / Ν e Ν ται καὶ παύεται. ἄλλος ὅδε τρόπος: πυρετὸς ὁ διὰ ¢ N ἴω A φλεγμασίην γινόμενος, τοτὲ μὲν ὑπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν A la vn γίνεται καὶ παύεται, τοτὲ δὲ τοῖσιν ὑπεναντίοις ἢ > 4 A x ΩΝ 5», 4 4 « ἐγένετο: τοῦτον μὲν γὰρ εἴ τις βούλεται λούειν ὕδατι A Ν Ν ὯΝ 4 ε Ν 4 Ν θερμῷ καὶ ποτὰ πολλὰ διδόναι, ὑγιὴς γίνεται διὰ τοῦτο τὸ φλεγμαῖνον: τοῖσι φλεγμαίνειν ποιέουσι vn Ν Ν », προσφερομένοις ὁ ὧν πυρετὸς γίνεται ὑγιής" καὶ εἴ τις βούλεται φάρμακον πίσαι ὑποχωρητικὸν καὶ ἐμετικόν: τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον τοῖσί | τε ποιέουσι παύε- ται, καὶ τοῖσι παύουσι γίνεται. τοῦτο μὲν γὰρ εἴ τις ἐμέοντι ἀνθρώπῳ βούλεται ὕδωρ δοῦναι πιεῖν πολύ, 84 PLACES IN MAN 42. Pain arises both from cold and from heat, and both from excessively great amounts and from too little. In persons that are cooled by nature out of their body towards the skin, pain arises from excessive heating, in those by nature hot, from cold, in those by nature dry, when they are moistened, and in those by nature moist, when they are dried. For in each thing that is altered with respect to its nature, and destroyed, pains arise. Pains are cured by opposites, and there is a specific thing for each disease: in persons by nature hot, and who are ill because of cooling, it is what heats, and so on according to this principle. Another principle is the following: a disease arises because of similars, and, by being treated with similars, patients recover from such diseases. For example, the same thing produces strangury when it is not present, and stops it when it is present; cough, in the same way as strangury, is engendered and is halted by the same things. Another principle is the following: fever that has arisen due to phlegmasia sometimes arises and is stopped by the same things, and sometimes is stopped by things opposite to those from which it arose. For if someone washes this patient with hot water and gives copious drinks, the patient recovers as a result of this swelling; when things that promote swelling are administered, the fever that is present becomes well; also if someone decides to make this patient drink a downward evacuant and an emetic. Thus, in the same way it is stopped by the things that pro- duce it and produced by those that stop it. That is to say, iftoa patient that is vomiting someone gives much water 1 AV. See Schubring p. 66. ? Joly. 85 338 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN TON KATA ANOPQOTION > ΄ rane Ὁ5. Ν oye “ ‘ ἐκκλυσθήσεται Ou’ ἃ ἐμέει σὺν τῷ ἐμέτῳ: οὕτω μὲν Ν Ν ΄ » ἫΝ διὰ τὸ ἐμέειν ὁ ἔμετος παύεται: ὧδε «δὲ» διὰ τὸ ΄ “ ΄ ΄ Seay’ > A > a Qa παύειν, OTL κάτω ποιήσει αὐτῷ ἐλθεῖν ἐκεῖνο,“ ὃ ἊΝ 5 A EVEOV ἔμετον ποιέει, ἀμφοτέροισι τοῖσιν ὑπεναντί- , Ν Ν ἊΣ “ 3 οισι τρόποις ὑγιὴς γίνεται. καὶ εἰ μὲν οὕτως εἶχε πᾶσι, καθεστήκει ἄν, οὕτω τὰ μὲν τοῖς ὑπεναντίοισιν 5 / Co 4 / > Ν > > “ 5 ͵ὕ Ἂς εὐτρεπίζεσθαι οἷά τέ ἐστι καὶ ad’ ὅτου ἐγένετο, τὰ Ν a ε ΄ 8.2 γα Ὁ) Ἄν ΤῊΝ » Ὁ 5 / δὲ τοῖσιν ὁμοίοισιν οἷά τέ ἐστι καὶ ἀφ᾽ ὅτου ἐγένετο. , 5, la A Σὰ 43. Τούτου δ᾽ αἴτιόν ἐστιν ἡ τοῦ σώματος ἀσθε- 4 ἈΝ Ν lal Ἂν ἂς lal / 5, 4 vein’ TO yap σῶμα ὑπὸ μὲν TOV σιτίων ἴσων ἴσως τρέφεται, ὑπὸ δὲ τοῦ σώματος τὰ σιτία κρατέεται: 3 προσενέγκηται ἢ ἀλλοίως μεταλ- > XN Ν ’΄ ἐπὴν δὲ μάσσον λά ΄ ΄, én? Ἂν Pct Nee , aéas κρατέηται, κρατέει δὴ“ τὰ σιτία: Kal ὁπόταν A A a κρατέηται τὸ σῶμα ὑπὸ τῶν προσοισμάτων, «ἃ; 4 4 Ν Ἂς "4 « “ , θάλλειν ποιέει ταὐτὰ καὶ κρατέει ἅμα TOV σώματος τά τε ὑπεναντία ποιέουσιν. αὐτίκα τὸ λοῦσθαι A “ Ἂς a Ν lal A , θερμῷ, ἕως μὲν ἂν TO σῶμα κρατέῃ τοῦ προσοίσμα- A EAN 5 > ἣν δὲ θῃ 5 Ν ΄ Ν τος, θάλλει: ἐπὴν δὲ κρατηθῇ, ἰσχνὸν ποιέει τὸ A Ν Ν , 4 A cal , σῶμα: καὶ TO εὐωχέεσθαι ὁμοίως TH λοῦσθαι ποιέει: A © 5.) ταῦτα μὲν yap ἕως μὲν ἂν κρατέωνται, θάλλειν ποι- / Ν / / έουσιν: ἐπὴν δὲ κρατέωσιν, ὑπεκχωρήσεις TE TOLEOV- Ν 5 ’ ΄ ε 4 Ἂν a 4 σιν καὶ ἀλλοίας κακίας: ὁπότε δὲ ὃ προσφέρεται > \6 ΄ | > ΄ \ @ ΄ V4 αὐτὸ“ μεταλλάσσεται, | ἀνάγκη καὶ ᾧ προσφέρεται ! Joly. 2 Joly: ἐξ ἐκείνου AV. 3 Joly: πλέον ἢ ἔλασσον ΑΝ. 4 Ermerins: κρατέεται δὲ καὶ AV. 86 PLACES IN MAN to drink, the patient will, by vomiting, be washed clean by what he vomits; thus, through vomiting, the vomiting stops; and in this way through its stopping—because it will make the patient evacuate downwards that which, when present in the body, provokes vomiting—the patient recovers in two contrary ways. And if this were so in all cases, the principle would be established, that some- times conditions can be treated by things opposite to those from which they arose, and sometimes by things like to those from which they arose. 43. The cause of this is the body’s weakness. For from the correct measure of foods the body is nourished equally and the foods are mastered by the body, but when more foods are administered than can, in changing to something different, be mastered, the foods take mastery, and when the body is mastered by the things adminis- tered to it, the same things that otherwise make it thrive prevail over the body and produce the opposite effect. As long as the body has mastery over what has been adminis- tered to it, being washed at once with warm water makes it thrive, but when the body has been mastered by what was administered to it, being bathed makes it lean. Being well fed has the same effects as being washed: for as long as foods are under the mastery of the body, they make the body thrive, but when they themselves have the mastery, they provoke downward evacuations and other sorts of ills. When what is administered is changed itself, then it follows necessarily that the person to whom it is adminis- 5 Littré. 6 Potter: τοῦτο AV. ‘ ᾧ ap. Linden after Comarius: τὸ προσφερόμενον AV. 87 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN TON KATA ANOPOTION 4 Ν “ ’ὔ Ν μετατρέπεσθαι: τὸ γὰρ σῶμα μετατρεπόμενον καὶ Ν nv Ἀν Ν , Ἂς ὀλιγοεργὲς ὃν καὶ ὑπὸ παντὸς νικώμενον τὰς παλιγκο- a 4 Lol , Tlas παρέχει. τοῦτο δὲ ποιέει καὶ TA ὑποχωρητικά, Ν ’ὕ 4 / δ ὁ A καὶ Ta θάλλειν ποιέοντα, ἰσχναίνοντά TE’ ταῦτα TO A / Ν »᾽ , σῶμα ποιέουσι, Kal τἄλλα πάντα τὰ ὑπεναντία TOU- τοισι πάσχοντα. ε Ν Ν / a 44. Ἢ δὲ ἰητρικὴ ὀλιγόκαιρός! ἐστιν: καὶ ὃς wr A Ν Ἃ τοῦτο ἐπίσταται, ἐκείνῳ καθέστηκε, καὶ ἐπίσταται ἥδ ΕΣ Ν Ν Ἂν 5», - 5 > > A ε [τὰ εἴδεα καὶ τὰ μὴ εἴδεα, ἅ ἐστιν ἐν ἰητρικῇ ὁ και- Ν Tal 9" Ν pos γνῶναι: ὅτι τὰ ὑποχωρητικὰ οὐχ ὑποχωρητικὰ , + « / , Ν Ν γίνεται, καὶ τἄλλα ὅτι ὑπεναντία ἐστί, καὶ τὰ ὑπε- , Ν ναντιώτατα οὐχ ὑπεναντιώτατά ἐστιν. ὁ δὲ καιρὸς “Ὅν > ΄ Ν ΄ 2 “ ͵΄ \ A ὅδ᾽ ἐστί: τὰ σιτία προσφέρειν, ὅσων μέλλει TO σῶμα A / [2 a Ν προσφερόμενον τὸ πλῆθος κρατέειν, ὥστ᾽ ἣν μὲν ° / ἴω 4 Ν ’ὔ οὕτω ποιέῃ, πᾶσα ἀνάγκη τὸ ὑποχωρητικὸν σιτίον ΄ \ > \ \ προσφερόμενον ὑποχωρητικὸν εἶναι, καὶ TO φλεγμα- “ “Ὁ vv ΄ Ν ἊΝ Ν ἴω τῶδες φλεγματῶδες. ἢν κρατέῃ μὲν yap? τὸ σῶμα - ͵ὕὔ 5, rn » , ’ τῶν σιτίων, οὔτε νοῦσος οὔτε ὑπεναντίωσις γίνεται Ν - ΄ a lal προσφερομένων, καὶ οὗτος ὁ καιρός ἐστιν OV δεῖ TOV 5» Ν 5 / > Ν δὲ Ν Ν - ΄ Ν ἰητρὸν εἰδέναι: [ἐπὴν δὲ τὸν καιρὸν ὑπερβάλλῃ, τὸ Ὡν a / » ὑπεναντίον γίνεται, καὶ οἱ πρὶν ὑπερπέσσειν οἴονται ", Ν Ν ΄ 4 “ Ν \ ey Ν ἔχειν, καὶ τὸ θερμαίνεσθαι: ἕως μὲν γὰρ ἂν τὸ a lal , / Ν A σῶμα TOV προσοίσματος κρατέῃ, τρέφεται TO σῶμα: 5 πὴ A aA Ν Ν e / Ν ¢ ἐπὴν δὲ τοῦτον τὸν καιρὸν ὑπερβάλλῃ, TO ὑπεναν- ly, -χρόνιος A. ? Del. Potter as an intruded marginal gloss. 3 μὲν yap Potter: yap ἐν A: om. V. 4 Del. Potter. καὶ o-—Oeppaiver Oar del. Ermerins. 88 PLACES IN MAN tered also be changed; so the body, being changed, of little strength, and overwhelmed by everything, makes things get worse; this can result also from evacuations, from medications that provoke growth, and from those that reduce moisture. The body is affected by these things, and by all the other things that are their opposites. 44. In medicine the correct measure is narrow, and the person who understands this has a fixed principle, and he understands [the forms in which correct measure in medicine is and is not to be recognized] that laxatives become non-laxative, that other things turn to their oppo- sites, and that things that were the most opposite are no longer the most opposite. Correct measure is the follow- ing: to administer as much food as, being administered, will be mastered by the body, so that, if a person does this, there is every necessity that the laxative food you admin- ister have a laxative effect, and the phlegm-promoting a phlegm-promoting effect. Now if the body gains a mas- tery over the food, neither will any disease nor anything else contrary to the nature of what is administered result; this is the correct measure the physician must recognize. [But when he goes beyond the correct measure, the opposite happens; . .. . |? For, as long as the body gains the mastery over what is administered, the body is nour- ished; but when one goes beyond this correct measure, ἃ The latter part of the deleted passage is unintelligible. 89 340 ΠΕΡῚ TONQN TON KATA ANOPOTION / 4 > 4 4 Ἂς 2 4 Ν τίον γίνεται, ἰσχναίνεται γάρ: καὶ τἄλλα πάντα δὲ ἊΝ , fal “ SS a / Ν τὰ φλεγμαίνειν ποιεῦντα, ἕως μὲν ἂν κρατέῃ τὸ lal Ν σῶμα, ἔτι τὰ πρὸς τὸν καιρὸν καὶ τὰ κατὰ φύσιν / oe | Ν MY) τὰς : ποιέουσιν ἕκαστον, | τὰ φλεγματώδεα φλεγμαίνειν 5 ἣν ΩΝ ε 4 Ἂν “4 Ν ε , 4 ἐπὴν δὲ ὑπερβάλλῃ τὸν καιρόν, τὰ ὑπεναντία γίνε- ται." 4 4 ἂν 4 ἊΝ 45. ΤΠΙάντα φάρμακά εἰσι τὰ μετακινέοντα τὸ παρεόν: πάντα δὲ τὰ ἰσχυρότερα μετακινέουσιν" », ΄ a Ἂν 7 ΄ ΄ vn ἔξεστι δέ, ἣν μὲν βούλῃ, φαρμάκῳ μετακινέειν: ἣν δὲ μὴ βούλῃ, σιτίῳ: ἅπαντα δὲ νοσέοντι μετακινέειν lal >! / ΩΝ ἐκ τοῦ παρεόντος ἀρήγει: ἢν γὰρ μὴ μετακινήσῃς τὸ νοσέον, αὔξεται. φάρμακα οὐ χρὴ τὰ ἰσχυρὰ φύσει A 5 / A ἐπὶ τῶν ἀσθενέων νοσημάτων διδόναι, ὀλιγότητι τοῦ 4 Ν “ Ν aA ἊΝ φαρμάκου ἀσθενὲς ποιεῦντα: ἀλλὰ τοῖσι μὲν ἰσχυ- A ΄ 4 3 N19) 9 - a potor φύσει φαρμάκοις [ἐπὶ] ἰσχυροῖσι χρῆσθαι, val 4 Ἂς lal ᾿ς τοῖς δ᾽ ἀσθενέσι φαρμάκοις μὴ ἰσχυροῖσι, μηδὲ lal Ν 4 > Ν τς / μεταποιεῦντα τὸ φάρμακον. ἀλλὰ κατὰ φύσιν A a 4 ἑκάστοισιν: τοῖσι μὲν ἀσθενέσι ἀσθενῆ φάρμακα 4 lal Ν a ἧς 4 φύσει, τοῖσι δὲ ἰσχυροῖσι νοσήμασιν ἰσχυρὰ φύσει \ ΄ \ \ ΄ a ΄ ΄ τὰ φάρμακα. τὰ δὲ νοσήματα ἣ πελαστάτω πέφυ- » / ΄ > > / e ε / ΕΣ κεν, ἐξάγειν, ταύτῃ δ᾽ ἐξάγειν ἣ ἑκάστῳ ἔξοδος ἐγγυτάτω. ‘ A > ¢ Ν ἂν Τὰ ὑποχωρητικὰ τοιάδε ἐστίν, ὅσα ὀλισθηρὰ καὶ τμηματώδεα, καὶ ὅσα ἐν τοῖσι θερμοῖσι λεπτύνον- [- ‘A ’΄ / > ἣν », Ν. «ς 4 Tau ἡ yap κοιλίη θερμή ἐστι: καὶ τἄλλα τὰ ἁλμυρά, 2 A A » Kal ὅσα τῶν τοιούτων πλεῖστον ἔχουσιν. τὰ δ᾽ οὐ 4 / “ A / διαχωρητικά, ἀλλὰ στάσιμα, ὅσα φῦσαν παρέχου- Ν Ν aA / ἂν σιν: τὰ γὰρ ὑγρὰ ξηραινόμενα φῦσαν ποιέουσι, καὶ 90 PLACES IN MAN the opposite happens, and it becomes lean. All the other things, too, which promote phlegm each do what is oppor- tune and according to their nature, as long as the body has the mastery; e.g. the phlegm-promoting promote phlegm. But when the physician goes beyond the correct measure, the opposite happens. 45. All substances that change the state of the patient are medications, and all the more forceful substances change in this way. It is possible, if you wish, to bring about change by means of a medication, or, if you do not wish to use a medication, you can bring about change by means of foods. Everything that changes from the exist- ing state benefits what is ill, for if you do not change what is ill, it increases. Medications that are by nature strong you must not give in weak diseases, attempting to make the medication weak by giving it in a small amount; rather you should administer strong medications in diseases that are themselves by nature strong, and weak medications in diseases that are not strong, and not alter the medication. Give to each disease according to its nature: in weak dis- eases give medications by nature weak, in strong diseases, medications by nature strong. Draw off diseases at the point that is nearest; draw off where the exit is nearest for each. Laxatives are these kinds of things: things that are slip- pery and separable, and that are thinned with warming (for the cavity is warm) and also salty things, and sub- stances that are the most like these. The non-laxative— i.e. substances promoting stasis—are things that produce flatulence (for when what is moist becomes dry it pro- ! The text in A ceases here, with the remark τέλος περὶ τόπων τῶν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον. 2 Del. Aldina. 91 342 ΠΕΡῚ TOHNQN TON KATA ANOPOTION ἣν , Ν Ν ε Ἂν A 7 Ν ‘\ Ta στύφοντα καὶ TA ὑπὸ θερμοῦ πηγνύμενα καὶ τὰ \ i ψαθυρὰ καὶ τὰ Enpd. πάντα δὲ [ra]! ἐντὸς φλεγμαί- νειν ποιέουσι προσφερόμενα, ἅσσα τὰ ἐκτὸς ἰσχναί- νουσιν: ταῦτα δὲ καὶ ἰσχητήριά ἐστι καὶ φλεγματώ- δεα. καὶ τὰ ὑποχωρητικὰ ἰσχναίνοντα θερμαίνουσι: ΩΝ A XN Ν 5 4 ἊΝ 7 a: τὰ τοιαῦτα ἔτι δὲ τὰ ὀξέα Kai φλεγματώδεα. πάντα LN Ν ’ ἊΝ > ἴω 4 ἂς ‘ A ε δὲ τὰ ψύχοντα τὰ ἐν τῇ. κοιλίῃ: τὰ δὲ τοιαῦτα ὑπο- 4 > Sy Ν ‘\ Ν Ν 4 ΄ ς la χωρητικά ἐστι: Kal τὰ ψυχρὰ Kal τὰ ὑγρά: ὁπόταν δὲ μὴ ὑποχωρητικὰ ἔωσι, θερμαίνουσιν. ψύχουσι δὲ καὶ τὰ θερμὰ ἐς τὴν κοιλίην προσφερόμενα καὶ ταχὺ ὃ ΄ ΄ 9 ὃ 4] Ν Ν «οιαχωρησιν TOLEVLEVA,>~ OLAKWIPNOLW δὲ μὴ ποι- εύμενα θερμά ἐστιν ἐν τῇ κοιλίῃ. τούτων ὅσα πλησ- ‘\ / 4 4 / > a ἊΝ μονὴν ποιέει, μάλιστα φλεγματώδεά ἐστιν: ἃ δὲ A / πλεῖστα προσφερόμενα, οὐ ποιέει πλησμονήν, δια- χωρητικά. 46. Ἰητρικὴ δή μοι δοκέει ἤδη ἀνευρῆσθαι ὅλη, ἥτις οὕτως ἔχει, ἥτις διδάσκει ἕκαστα καὶ τὰ ἔθεα Δ © καὶ τοὺς καιρούς. ὃς γὰρ οὕτως ἰητρικὴν ἐπίσταται, 3 / Ν ΄ 3 la 3 ἊΝ Ν ΕΒ , ἐλάχιστα τὴν τύχην ἐπιμένει, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἄνευ τύχης Ν Ν , Ss , + / Ν > Ν καὶ ξὺν τύχῃ εὖ ποιηθείη ἄν. βέβηκε γὰρ ἰητρικὴ πᾶσα, καὶ φαίνεται τῶν σοφισμάτων τὰ κάλλιστα ἐν αὐτῇ συγκείμενα ἐλάχιστα τύχης δεῖσθαι: ἡ γὰρ τύχη αὐτοκρατὴς καὶ οὐκ ἄρχεται, οὐδ᾽ ἐπ᾽ εὐχῇ > 5. ἐδ > A ε a) ΄ ” ΄ ν᾿ ἐστιν αὐτὴν ἐλθεῖν: ἡ δ᾽ ἐπιστήμη ἄρχεταί τε καὶ εὐτυχής ἐστιν, ὁπόταν βούληται ὁ ἐπιστάμενος χρῆ- σθαι. ἔπειτα τί καὶ δεῖται ἰητρικὴ τύχης; εἰ μὲν γὰρ ἔστι τῶν νοσημάτων φάρμακα σαφῆ, οἶμαι, οὐκ A A Ν ἐπιμένει τὴν τύχην τὰ φάρμακα ὑγιᾶ ποιῆσαι τὰ 92 PLACES IN MAN duces flatulence), the astringent, things that congeal when they are heated, the friable, and the dry. All sub- stances administered in order to remove moisture exter- nally promote phlegm within; thus, they both remove moisture and promote phlegm. Laxatives that remove moisture warm; it is the same with substances that are sharp and promote phlegm. All things that cool what is in the cavity, such are laxative; ie. both the cold and the moist; when they are not laxative, they warm. Warm things that enter the cavity and quickly bring about an evacuation cool, but if they do not stimulate an evacua- tion, they are warm in the cavity. Substances that pro- duce fullness are usually phlegm-promoting, whereas those that—even when administered in very great amounts—do not lead to fullness, are laxative. 46. Medicine in its present state is, it seems to me, by now completely discovered, insofar as it teaches in each instance the particular details and the correct measures. For anyone who has an understanding of medicine in this way depends very little upon good luck, but is able to do good with or without luck. For the whole of medicine has been established, and the excellent principles discovered in it clearly have very little need of good luck. Good luck is arbitrary and cannot be commanded, and even prayer cannot make it come; but understanding can be com- manded, and of itself represents good luck, whenever the person who has knowledge employs it. Then, in what sense does medicine need luck? For if there are obvious medications indicated in diseases, I hold that these medi- cations do not depend upon good luck to make the 1 Del. Ermerins. 2 Littré; Foes (ποιέουσι) in note 124 after Comarius’ secessum faciunt. 93 344 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN TON KATA ANOPQOTION ΄ ” iy > S71 ΄ τ > δὲ Ν A νοσήματα, εἴ πέρ ἐστι [τὰ] φάρμακα: εἰ δὲ σὺν TH ? 4 A ἣν \ τύχῃ διδόναι ὠφελέει, οὐδὲν μᾶλλον τὰ φάρμακα ἢ Ν “ lal / Kal τὰ μὴ φάρμακα σύν γε TH τύχῃ ὑγιᾶ ποιέουσι ’ὔὕ a 4 Ν προσφερόμενα τοῖσι νοσήμασιν. ὅστις δὲ τὴν 7 a “Δ » τύχην ἐξ ἰητρικῆς ἢ ἐξ ἄλλου τινὸς ἐξελάσει, φάμε- νος οὐ τοὺς καλῶς τι πρῆγμα ἐπισταμένους χρῆ- σθαι τύχῃ, τὸ ὑπεναντίον δοκέει μοι γινώσκειν: ἐμοὶ ἊΝ fal Ν A yap δοκέουσι μοῦνοι Kal ἐπιτυγχάνειν καὶ ἀτυχεῖν A Ν lal lal 4 οἱ καλῶς TL Kal κακῶς πρῆξαι ἐπιστάμενοι: ἐπι- τυγχάνειν τε γὰρ τοῦτ᾽ ἐστὶ τὸ καλῶς ποιέειν, τοῦτο ΄ lal A δὲ οἱ ἐπιστάμενοι ποιέουσιν: ἀτυχεῖν δὲ TOUT’ ἐστίν, ἃ "5 a A ὃ ἄν τις μὴ ἐπίστηται, τοῦτο μὴ καλῶς ποιέειν: ἀμα- A \ uA Ons δὲ ἐών, πῶς ἂν ἐπιτύχοι; εἰ yap TL καὶ ἐπιτύχοι, vn / / οὐκ ἂν ἀξίως λόϊγου τὴν ἐπιτυχίην ποιήσαιτο: ὁ yap Ἂν la) 4 > vn“ > 4 JA ἣν 3 ’ὔ’ μὴ καλῶς ποιέων οὐκ ἂν ἐπιτύχοι τἄλλα τὰ εἰκότα μὴ πράσσων. ‘ lal 4 / Cie / 47. Ta γυναικεῖα νοσεύματα καλεύμενα- αἱ ὑστέ- A / 3, e Ἂς pal πάντων τῶν νοσημάτων αἴτιαί εἰσιν: αὗται γὰρ \ al vo ὅπη av ἐκ τῆς φύσεως μετακινηθέωσι, νούσους 4 , » παρέχουσιν, nv τε προέλθωσιν, HY τε παραχωρήσω- - “ ἊΣ Ν 4 Ν , ec ow. καὶ ὅταν μὲν μὴ βάλλουσαι TO στόμα αἱ A Ν Lol » μῆτραι καὶ μὴ ψαύουσαι τῶν κρημνῶν μετακεκινὴη- » x lal ‘A μέναι ἔωσιν ἔξω, σμικροτάτη νοῦσός ἐστιν" ἐπὴν δὲ 4 > Ν 2, Ἂς 5 4 ἊΣ προκινηθέωσιν ἐς τὸ ἔμπροσθεν καὶ ἐμβάλλωσι τὸ στόμα ἐς τὸν κρημνόν, πρῶτον μὲν ψαύσασα πόνον παρέσχεν, εἶτα ἀποφραχθεῖσα ἡ μήτρη καὶ ἐπιπω- μασθεῖσα ὑπὸ τῆς ἐμβλήσεως τῆς ἐς τὸν κρημνόν, οὐ γίνεται ῥόος τὰ καταμήνια: τοῦτο δὲ συνιστάμε- 94 PLACES IN MAN diseases better—if they really are medications: for if these medications administered in diseases only help when they have good luck, then they are no more making the patients well than non-medications would with good luck. On the other hand, anyone who excludes “good luck” from medicine or any other art, saying that those who understand a given matter thoroughly do not employ “good luck”, seems to me to know himself that this is incorrect. For I hold that those alone have good and bad luck respectively, who understand well and poorly how to do something. For to have good luck is to do the correct thing, and those with understanding do this. But to have bad luck is this: to do badly what one does not under- stand. If someone is ignorant how could he ever have good luck? For even if he should have good luck in some particular thing, he would not make this good luck into anything worth mentioning: by not acting correctly he would not have good luck, since he did not do the other appropriate things. 47. Diseases of women, as they are called. The uterus is the cause of all these diseases; for however it changes from its normal position—whether it moves forward, or whether it withdraws—it produces diseases. When the uterus does not drop its os and does not move so that it is outside and touching the labia, the disease is very minor. But when it moves ahead towards the front and inserts its os against the labium, first this produces pain because of the contact, and also the menstrual flow fails to take place because the uterus is obstructed and capped by its impaction against the labia, and when this flow is held 1 Del. Ermerins. 95 346 HEPI TOMQN TON KATA ANOPOION ον ’ὔ ἊΝ 5 /, 4 ἂς a ἊΝ: 4 νον OLOOS TE καὶ ὀδύνην παρέχει. καὶ ἣν μὲν κάτω A Cal 4 κατελθοῦσα καὶ ἀποστραφεῖσα ἐμβάλῃ ἐς τὸν Bov- “- nv > Bava, ὀδύνην παρέξει: ἢν δὲ ἄνω ἐπαναχωρήσασα 5 lal Ν 5 “Ὁ ἊΝ 4 Μ᾿ ‘\ ἀποστραφῇ Kat ἀποφραχθῇ, καὶ οὕτω διὰ τὴν ἀραιότητα νοῦσον παρέχει: ὁπόταν δὲ διὰ τοῦτο Ὡς 5 Ν > 4 Ν Ν ἊΝ 5 »Ἅ , νοσέῃ, ἐς τὰ ἰσχία καὶ THY κεφαλὴν ὀδύνην ποιέει. ὁπόταν δὲ αἱ μῆτραι πλησθεῖσαι συνοιδήσωσιν, οὐ ca > \ Ἂς th ΄ 5 Ν ἈΝ 4 ᾿ ῥεῖ οὐδὲν καὶ πλέαι γίνονται: ἐπὴν δὲ πλέαι γίνων- 4 lal > aA > ἊΝ Ἂς tal e ται, ψαύουσι τῶν ἰσχίων: ἐπὴν δὲ πλησθεῖσαι at μῆτραι ὑγρότητος καὶ διευρυνόμεναι οὐ χωρέωνται, ψαύωσι δὲ τῶν ἰσχίων, ὀδύνας παρέχουσι καὶ ἐς τὰ ἰσχία καὶ <és>! τὸν βουβῶνα, καὶ οἷον σφαῖραι ἐν τῇ γαστρὶ ὑποτρέχουσι, καὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν πονέουσι, τοτὲ μὲν ἐς τὸ ἕτερον μέρος, τοτὲ δὲ ὅλην, οἵη γίνε- ται καὶ ἡ νοῦσος. ae a Ea 4 Ode δὴ ταῦτα εὐτρεπιστέον: ἢν μὲν προέλθῃ μοῦνον καὶ ἣ διαχρίειν, χρῶ ᾧ | τινι βούλει τῶν / “Ἂ 4 “Ἃ A o\ + Ν lal κακόδμων, ἢ KEOPW, ἢ μυσσωτῷ, ἢ ἄλλῳ τινὶ τῶν βαρύτερον καὶ κακὸν ὀζομένων, καὶ κάπνιζε, καὶ μὴ lal A ἴω , πυρία, μηδὲ σιτίῳ μηδὲ ποτῷ οὐρητικῷ χρῶ τούτου fal fa) a 3 τοῦ χρόνου, μηδὲ ove θερμῷ. ἣν δὲ ἀνακεχωρήκῃ καὶ μὴ ἀπεστραμμένη ἣ, τοῖσιν εὐόδμοισι προσθε- τοῖσι χρῶ, ὅσα ἀναθερμαίνουσιν ἅμα: ταῦτα δὲ a’ » » » τοιάδε εἰσί: σμύρνῃ, ἢ μύρῳ, εἴθ᾽ ἑνὶ «εἴτ᾽ ἐν; ἄλλῳ εὐόδμῳ καὶ θερμαίνοντι ἅμα: τοιούτοισι προσ- θετοῖσι χρῶ: καὶ πυριᾶν οἴνῳ κότωθεν, καὶ θερμῷ A 4 ἣν lal lal Ἂς Ν a / ὕδατι λούειν, καὶ διουρητικοῖσι χρῶ. τὸ δὲ δῆλόν av 2 > lal ἴω ἴω ἐστιν, HV μὴ ἀποστραφῇ ἀνακεχωρηκυῖα, ῥεῦμα 96 PLACES IN MAN back, it produces swelling and pain. If the uterus descends downwards and turns aside to fall against the groin, it will produce pain; and if it ascends upwards, turns aside and becomes obstructed, in this way too it produces a disease, on account of its porousness; when the uterus is diseased in this way, it provokes pain in the hips and in the head. When the uterus becomes filled and swells shut, nothing flows and it fills up; when it is full, it touches the hip-joints. When the uterus has become filled with fluid, dilated and immobile, and when it touches the hip-joints, it produces pains both in the hip-joints and in the groin, and something like spheres pass by in the belly, and the patient has pain in her head, sometimes in one half, sometimes in the whole head; such is the disease that arises. These conditions are to be treated as follows. If the uterus only protrudes and it can be anointed, apply any of the evil-smelling substances you wish, cedar, mussotos,* or any other of the heavy- and evil-smelling ones, fumi- gate, and neither administer a vapour-bath nor give food or a diuretic potion at this time, nor wash with warm water. If the uterus has moved upwards but not turned aside, employ pleasant-smelling applications to the uterus, that are at the same time warming: e.g. myrrh or sweet oil, either alone or together with ancther sweet- smelling and warming substance. Make these applica- tions, apply a vapour-bath of wine from below, wash with warm water, and use diuretics. This is a clear indication: if the uterus has withdrawn upwards but not turned aside, 4 “A savoury dish of cheese, honey, garlic, etc.” (LSJ). 1 Linden. 2 Potter. 97 348 MEPI TOMON TON KATA ANOPOTION \ , > ΄ὔ γίνεται: ἣν δὲ ἀπεστραμμένη ἢ, οὐ γίνεται ῥόος τὰ μι lal / A καταμήνια καλεύμενα: τοῦτο TO νόσημα πυρίῃ πρῶ- rol Ἂς 55 > 5 > Ν 5 ᾽’ὕ τον τοιῇδε χρὴ ἰᾶσθαι, ἐς οἶνον ἐρινεὰ ἐμβάλλοντα, ΄ὔ lal 14 θερμαίνοντα τοῦτον, περιθέντα σικυωνίην περὶ TO / la) eo oN a ms στόμα τοῦ τείχεος, ἐν ᾧ ἂν θερμαίνηται, ὧδε ποιῆ- Ψ' σαι: σικυωνίην μέσην διαταμών, ἐκκενώσας, τὸ ἄκρον ἀποταμὼν σμικρόν, ὡς ἐπ᾽ ἀσκίων τοῦτο © a nw A nl περιπωμάσαι, ὅπως ἂν ἡ ὀδμὴ διὰ τοῦ στενοῦ ἰοῦσα πρὸς τὴν μήτρην ἀφίκηται: καὶ θερμῷ ὕδατι αἰονᾶν, καὶ φαρμάκοισι θερμαίνουσι χρῆσθαι προσθετοῖσι. θερμαίνοντα δ᾽ ἐστὶ τὰ ἄγοντα τῶν πρόσθεν, τὰ δὲ a 4 τοιάδε, βόλβιτον, χολὴ βοός, σμύρνα, στυπτηρίη, ᾽ὔ’ Ν + aA A χὰ 5 ’ὔ ε ἊΝ χαλβάνη, καὶ ἄλλο ὃ τοιοῦτόν ἐστι, τούτων ὡς πλεί- ,ὔ 4 στοισι, καὶ ὑπεξάγειν ἐλατηρίοισι φαρμάκοισι κάτω “ » © Ν ὅσα ἔμετον <ov>! ποιέουσιν, ἀσθενέουσιν, ὅπως μὴ Ἂν a / ἰνηθμὸς γένηται ἐκ τῆς ὑπερινήσιος. Ν e ΄, 3 Ta δὲ προσθετὰ ὧδε χρὴ ποιέειν, ἢν βούλῃ 5 Ν ys / ε 7 / 5 ἴω ἰσχυρὰ ποιέειν: μέλι ἡμίεφθον ποιέων, ἔμβαλε τῶν γεγραμμένων προσθετῶν τῶν ἄγειν ποιούντων, καὶ 9 Ν 5 ΄ὔ / 4 Ν 4 ἈΝ ἐπὴν ἐμβάλλῃς, ποίησον ὥσπερ τὰς βαλάνους τὰς cy, / Ν πρὸς τὴν ἕδρην προστιθεμένας, μακρὰς δὲ ποίει καὶ λεπτὰς ταύτας: τὴν δὲ γυναῖκα ὑπτίην κατακλίνας, 3, ἣὴ A ‘ A ἄνω | τοὺς πόδας ποιήσας τῆς κλίνης τοὺς πρὸς A ” ΄ \ , > “Ὁ Oe ποδῶν, ἔπειτα πρόσθες [καὶ θερμαίνει" ἐν ῥάκει δέ 2» oo 5) A oN de > ΄ έων ἢ" ἄλλῳ τινί, ἕως ἂν κατατακῇ: ἣν δὲ ἀσθενέσ - τερον βούλῃ τὸ προσθετὸν προστιθέναι, ἐς ὀθόνιον ! Linden. 2 Del. Ermerins. 98 PLACES IN MAN a flux occurs, but if it has turned aside, the flux called the menses does not occur. This latter condition you must treat first with the following vapour-bath: add wild figs to some wine, and heat; place a gourd over the mouth of the vessel in which the mixture is being heated as follows: cut a gourd open in the middle, empty it out, and cut off a lit- tle at the tip, so that the gourd will cover the skin vessel tightly as a lid, in order that the odour will pass through the narrow part of the gourd and arrive at the uterus. Also foment with hot water, and employ direct applica- tions of warming medications—warming are those among the above that draw the menses, and also the following: cow’s dung, bull’s gall, myrrh, alum, all-heal juice, and anything else that is similar—apply a great amount of these, and evacuate downwards with laxative medications that do not provoke vomiting and are mild, in order that purging does not become excessive. You must make uterine applications as follows, if you wish them to be forceful: prepare semi-boiled honey, add some of the emmenagogues named, and when you are ready to insert them form the mixture into suppositories like those administered per anum, long and narrow. Lie the woman down on her back, raise the legs of the bed at the foot end, then insert the pessary, wrapping it in a cloth or something else of the kind, until it melts.* If you wish to make a milder application, bind the pessary 4] agree with Fuchs that, although Littré’s text is palaeo- graphically preferable, its sense seems questionable: “et on fera chauffer la partie soit sur un pot de chambre, soit...” 3 ῥάκει δέων ἢ Foes in note 136 after Cornarius’ panniculo intecto aut: ἀκηδίῃ V: ἀμίδι ἢ Littré. 99 ΠΕΡῚ TOMQN TON KATA ANOPOTION , x 5 > A ἐνδέων. Kal ἣν ὑγρότητος ἔμπλεαι οὖσαι al μῆτραι τὸ στόμα συνοιδήσωσιν καὶ ἀρροίην παράσχωσι, ‘ A lal ῥόον χρὴ ποιέοντα ἰᾶσθαι προσθετοῖσι φαρμάκοισι, καὶ πυριῶντα ὡς γέγραπται, οὕτω ποιεῦντα, ὥσπερ Ν κατὰ τὴν πρόσθεν ἀρροίην: καὶ εἰ ἐς τὸ πρόσθεν lal \ προσχωρέουσα ἀποστραφῇ, ῥόον χρὴ ποιέειν ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τῆς πρότερον ἀρροίης. ὅταν δὲ ῥόος ἢ ΄ ” ΄ χ Ae, Μ᾽ ὦ, Ψ λίην, οὔτε θερμαίνειν χρὴ θερμῷ ὕδατι οὔτ᾽ ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ οὔτε οὐρητικοῖσι χρῆσθαι οὔτε σιτίοισι δια- χωρητικοῖσι: τῆς γε κλίνης τὰ πρὸς ποδῶν ὑψηλό- > ΄ > 8, τερα εἶναι, ὡς μὴ ἡ κατάκλισις εὔροος ἢ" καὶ προσ- θετοῖσιν ἅμα τοῖς στύφουσι χρῶ. οἱ δὲ ῥόοι, ὁπό- ἊΝ 5 / “ ε 4 > , e , ταν μὲν εὐθέως ἵκηται ἡ κάθαρσις, εὐθέως ὑφαίμο- ves γίνονται, ὁπόταν δ᾽ ἧσσον ἴῃ, πυώδεες: καὶ τῇσι , “ lal c ἈΝ ’ νεωτέρῃσιν ὕφαιμα μᾶλλον, αἱ δὲ πρεσβύτεραι ’ὔ A ΕΝ ἊΝ / 4 μυξώδεα μᾶλλον ἔχουσι τὰ καταμήνια καλεύμενα. 100 PLACES IN MAN in fine linen. If the uterus becomes full of moisture, and its mouth swells shut, so that it cuts off the outflow, you must restore the flow by treating with medicinal pessaries and vapour-baths as described, i.e. by doing the same things as in the amenorrhea above. Also if the uterus moves forward and turns aside, you must provoke its flow as in the amenorrhea above. When the menstrual flow is excessive, it is imperative that you neither warm with hot water or anything else, nor employ diuretics or laxative foods. Rather the part of the bed towards the feet must be higher than the rest, in order that the downward slant will not favour flow, and at the same time you should use astringent pessaries. The flow, when the cleaning takes place at once, becomes bloody at once, but when the cleaning occurs less quickly, it is purulent. In younger women it is more bloody, while older women have menses, as they are called, that are more mucous. 101 GLANDS INTRODUCTION In chapter 11 of Joints, where the writer is discussing cautery in the axilla, we read: All men have glands, smaller or larger, in the axilla and many other parts of the body. But the general nature of glands (περὶ ἀδένων οὐλομελίης) will be described in another treatise, both what they are, and their signification and action in the parts they occupy. ! Galen remarks on this passage in his Commentary to Joints: The complete system of the nature of glands, which he promised to expound elsewhere, he called “ov- λομελίη"; however such a book of Hippocrates about the general nature of glands is not extant. But one of the more recent Hippocrateans wrote a pamphlet to which he affixed the inscription “Hip- pocrates on the general nature of glands”; this work falls far short of the genuine Hippocratic writings in both language and thought, nor has any of the earlier physicians made mention of it, nor do those who made lists (sc. of Hippocratic works) know the book.? ' Loeb Hippocrates vol. 3, 226f. 2 Galen vol. 18A, 379. 105 GLANDS Erotian, although not including the title in the list of Hippocratic works in his preface, does include several words present in Glands in his glossary, and one that must derive from it: A24 λύματα (Glands ch. 12), otherwise unknown in the Corpus, and cited in the correct number and case. Down to Littré and Petrequin, Galen’s judgement was accepted as sufficient in itself, and final. Ermerins, how- ever, argued that Glands is in fact the treatise promised by the author of Joints. He defends this view by pointing out Erotian’s knowledge of the work, and referring to the fact that its title and contents correspond exactly to the notice in Joints. Furthermore, he records a number of rare words that occur only in these two books. Generally, subsequent scholars have rejected Ermerins’ conclusion, seeking to buttress with engy sie evidence the impossi- bility of a unity of authorship.+ A number of points should be borne in mind. First, the prima facie case favours unity of authorship; onus of proof is on the side of denial. Second, Galen’s opinion in the matter is worthless as evidence: his absolute inability to separate the historical Hippocrates from the instru- ment of his own medical propaganda is now patent.° Third, the evidence put forth by Galen and his modern 3 See Nachmanson p. 450 and note 1. 4 See Joly pp. 104-10. 5 See W. D. Smith, The Hippocratic Tradition, Ithaca, 1979, pp. 123-76, and several of the articles in J. Kollesch and D. Nickel, Galen und das hellenistische Erbe, Stuttgart, 1993: e.g. P. Potter, “Apollonius and Galen ‘On Joints’”, pp. 117-23; G. E. R. Lloyd, “Galen on Hellenistics and Hippocrateans: Con- temporary Battles and Past Authorities”, pp. 125-43. 106 GLANDS followers ranges greatly in value: none of it seems abso- lutely irresistible, at least to me. The same, however, can be said of Ermerins’ efforts. All of which leaves me a weak unitarian, leaning towards agnosticism. Very systematic in its structure, the treatise progresses from a histological definition of glands (ch. 1), via brief general remarks on their pathology (ch. 2), and an account of their function (ch. 3), location, and relation- ship to hairs (chs. 4-6), to a discussion of the various par- ticular glands and their diseases: tonsils (ch. 7), axillary nodes (ch. 8), lymph glands of the intestine (ch. 9), brain (chs. 10-15), and breasts (chs. 16-17). Glands is represented in all editions of the collected Hippocratic works, including Zwinger’s. A new edition by Robert Joly has recently appeared in the Budé series; it is upon Joly’s edition that mine mainly depends. 107 VIII 556 Littré ΠΕΡῚ AAENON OTAOMEAIH> 1. Περὶ δὲ ἀδένων οὐλομελίης ὧδε ἔχει. φύσις μὲν αὐτῇσι σπογγώδης, ἀραιαὶ μὲν καὶ πίονες, καὶ », 2 ΄ ” A + 7 + + ἐστιν οὔτε σαρκία ἴκελα τῷ ἄλλῳ σώματι, οὔτε ἄλλο τι ὅμοιον τῷ σώματι, ἀλλὰ ψαφαρὰ καὶ φλέβας ἔχει / > Ἂν ΄ ες ΄ ΄, Ν συχνάς: εἰ δὲ διατάμοις, αἱμορραγέει λάβρως" τὸ εἶδος λευκαὶ καὶ οἷον φλέγμα, ἐπαφωμένῳ δὲ οἷον » * > ΄ 1 a ὃ , ΟΞ τς Ν εἴρια: κὴν Opyaans τοῖς δακτύλοις ἐπὶ πολὺ βιη- 4 ε > Ν ς Ν 5 4 > lal ‘\ > Ν σάμενος, ἡ ἀδὴν ὑγρὸν ἀφίησιν ἐλαιῶδες, καὶ αὐτὴ Ἅ ἣν Ν 3 ’ὔ θρύπτεται πολλὰ καὶ ἐξαπόλλυται. 2. Πονέουσι δὲ οὐ κάρτα, ἀλλὰ τῷ ἄλλῳ σώματι SEEN ͵΄ ὃ ὃ A 2 ἰδί A 2 A δὲ Ν ἐπὴν πονέωσι διδοῦσιν" ἰδίην νοῦσον: παῦρα δὲ καὶ τῷ σώματι ξυμπονέουσιν. αἱ νοῦσοι φύματα γίνον- ται, καὶ χοιράδες ἀναπηδῶσι, καὶ πῦρ ἔχει τὸ σῶμα: πάσχουσι δὲ ταῦτα, ἐπὴν ὑγρασίης πληρωθῶσι τῆς ἀπὸ" τοῦ ἄλλου σώματος ἐπιρρεούσης εἰς αὐτάς" ἐπιρρέει δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἄλλου σώματος διὰ τῶν φλεβῶν, ἃ ᾽ ss , nN ‘\ A “ » at δι’ αὐτῶν τέτανται πολλαὶ καὶ κοῖλαι, ὥστε ἀκο- λουθεῖν τὸ ὑγρὸν ὅ τι ἂν ἕλκωσιν εὐπετέως ἐς αὐτάς" >! ἂν » ‘ A ΤΣ ¢ 4 δὰ c Kv πολὺ ἔῃ Kal νοσῶδες ἡ pon, ξυντείνουσιν αἱ > / > Ν A ‘\ ” A “ - 5 ’ ἀδένες ἐπὶ σφᾶς τὸ ἄλλο σῶμα: οὕτω πυρετὸς ἐξά- ! Ermerins: ἐργ- V. 108 GLANDS 1. The general nature of glands is as follows. Their substance is spongy and they are rarefied and fatty; their tissues neither look like the rest of the body, nor resemble it in any other way, being instead friable and possessing many vessels: if you cut through a gland, it bleeds vio- lently. In appearance glands are white and phlegmy, to the touch they are like wool. If you knead one in your fingers, pressing it firmly, the gland discharges an oily fluid and itself breaks almost completely into small pieces, and disappears. 2. Glands rarely become ill, but when they do, they give their disease to the rest of the body; seldom, though, do they ail in sympathy with the body. Their diseases: tubercles form, scrofulas erupt, fever seizes the body. Glands suffer these things when they become filled with moisture flowing to them from the rest of the body. This moisture flows to them out of the rest of the body along the vessels that run through them, so numerous and hollow that whatever moisture they attract easily reaches them. If the flux is copious and diseased, the glands con- tract the rest of the body upon themselves: in this way 2 Joly: δὲ ἢ δὴν 3 Ermerins: ἐπὶ V. 109 558 ΠΕΡῚ AAENON OTAOMEATH®> Nees, Ν A 1 ε Ἰδέ πτεται, και αειρονται και φλογιῶσιν αι QOEVES. > A 3. ᾿Αδένες δὲ ὕπεισιν ἐν τῷ σώματι πλείους Kai” / A lol Ν a μείζους ἐν τοῖσι κοίλοισιν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐν τοῖσιν 3 ἐν τοῖσιν ἄλλοισιν | ὑγρηδών, + Noe. ἄρθροισι, καὶ ὅκου Ἂν Ν Ἂν «ε , ’ e Ν ε ἂν > 4 καὶ κατὰ τὰ αἱματώδεα χωρία: al μὲν ὡς TO ἐπιρρέον ΕΒ > ἊΝ lal 5 ’ὔ 5 ἊΝ / “ ἄνωθεν ἐς τὰ κοῖλα ἐπιδεχόμεναι ἐπὶ σφέας ἕλκω- “ 5 Ἂς A / σιν, αἱ δὲ ὥστε τὴν αὖθις γινομένην ὑπὸ τῶν πόνων ε ΄ > ὃ ΄ > , 4 Ν ΄ ὑγρασίην ἐπιδεχόμεναι, ἐξαρύωσιξ τὴν πληθύν, « Ψ,. Ν »“, “ 4 > » 2 ἥντινα μεθίησι τὰ ἄρθρα. οὕτω πλάδος οὐκ ἔνι ἐν ἴω 4 4 Ν 4 Ἅ a τῷ σώματι: εἰ γάρ TL καὶ γίνοιτο παραυτίκα, οὐκ ἂν “2 A ἐπιγίνοιτο πλάδος ὀπίσω: καταναισιμοῦται yap καὶ XN Ἂς Ἂς Ν 5 4 > Ν > 4 TO πολὺ καὶ TO ὀλίγον ἐς τὰς ἀδένας. 4. Καὶ οὕτω τὴν πλεονεξίην τοῦ ἄλλου σώματος ¢ > / / , Ν 4 5 “Ὁ αἱ ἀδένες κέρδος ποιεύμεναι, τροφὴ ξύντροφος αὐτῇ- 4 > “ “ Vd > A ἊΝ ἊΝ Va σίν ἐστιν: ὥστε ὅκου τελματώδεα, ἐκεῖ Kal ἀδένες:" an 4 , lal ἊΝ 4 ε Ν , σημεῖον, ὅκου ἀδήν, ἐκεῖ Kal τρίχες: ἡ yap φύσις ΄ 10€ Ν ΄ ἈΞ ΕΝ ΄, 3. -ς ποιέει ἀδένας καὶ τρίχας <Kal>° ἄμφω χρέος τωὐτὸ λ ΄ ε Ν » 6 Ν > ΄ ε ἊΣ FW, αμβάνουσιν, αἱ μὲν ἐς τὸ ἐπιρρέον, ὡς καὶ ἔμ- », «ε SS , Ν 3 Ν lal > / προσθεν εἴρηται: ai δὲ τρίχες THY ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδένων ΄ὔ΄ 27 4 / Ἂς »“ ἐπικαιρίην ἔχουσαι φύονταί τε καὶ αὔξονται, ἀνα- ἂν / Ἂς λεγόμεναι τό τε περισσὸν καὶ ἐκβρασσόμενον ἐπὶ Ν / ¢ Ν ay Ν Ν lal ” Ν τὰς ἐσχατιάς. ὅκου δὲ αὖον ἐὸν τὸ σῶμα, οὔτε ἀδὴν BA 4 Ν Ν ¢ Ν ΩΝ Ἃ Ν 4 οὔτε θρίξ: τὰ δὲ ἁπαλὰ Kai πονεύμενα καὶ κάθυγρα, ἀδενώδεα καὶ τρίχας «ἔχει; ἀδένες δὲ καὶ κατὰ al + Le », Ἂς ” ε 4 Ἂν Ν τοῖν οὐάτοιν ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα ἑκατέρωθεν κατὰ τὰς σφαγὰς τοῦ τραχήλου, τρίχες τε ἐνταῦθα ἑκατέρω- : - 9 : > ! Ermerins: -γῶσιν V. 2 Ermerins: ἢ V. 3 Ermerins: ὁκόσα V. 110 GLANDS fever is kindled, and the glands swell up and become inflamed. 3. Glands are present in greater number and size in the hollow parts of the body and the joints, and where moisture is present in other parts, and in regions rich in blood. Some glands are placed so as to attract and receive the moisture that flows down from above into the hollow parts, others again so as to take over the moisture that arises in exertions, and to drain off most of what the joints secrete. In this way, no collection of fluid is permitted to form in the body; for even if some fluid should suddenly arise, afterwards no collection can follow, since quantities both large and small are consumed inte the glands. 4. In this way, too, the glands profiting from the sur- plus present in the rest of the body, the nourishment of the body is also their nourishment. Thus, in any parts where there is fluid, there are also glands. Here is proof: where there is a gland, there too are hairs, for nature makes glands and hairs, and they both fulfil the same office, the one (i.e. glands) with regard to what flows to them, as was described above, while the hairs, taking advantage of what is provided from the glands, grow and increase by collecting the excess that is cast out to the sur- face. Where the body is dry, there is neither gland nor hair, whereas the parts that are tender, active in exertions and thoroughly moist are glandular and possess hairs. There are glands scattered about the ears on both sides near the jugular vessels of the neck, and there are hairs 4 €Eapvwor Littré: ἐν τοῖσιν ἄρθροισιν V. ° Ermerins. 6 Froben: ὡς V. ‘Ermerins: ἀδὴν ὧδε καὶ τρίχες V. 111 560 ΠΕΡῚ AAENOQN OTAOMEATH®> > ἊΝ A fe 5 / ὯΝ 4 θεν: ἐπὶ ταῖς μασχάλῃσιν ἀδένες καὶ τρίχες: Bov- A Ν 5 , > / 4 > ἄν Ἂς βῶνες καὶ ἐπίσιον ἰκέλως μασχάλῃσιν [ἀδὴν καὶ τρίχες]. ταῦτα μὲν κοῖλα τῶν ἐν τῷ σώματι καὶ ῥηΐ- δια ἐς περιουσίην | ὑγροῦ: καὶ γὰρ πονέει ταῦτα καὶ κινέεται μάλιστα τῶν ἐν τῷ σώματι. 5. Τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα ὁκόσα ἀδένας ἔχει μοῦνον, οἷον ἔντερα, ἔχει γὰρ καὶ ταῦτα ἀδένας ἐς τὸ ἐπίπλοον 3, a / μείζονας, τρίχας οὐκ ἔχει. καὶ γὰρ ἐν τοῖσι τέλμασι τῆς γῆς καὶ καθύγροισιν οὐ φύεται τὸ σπέρμα οὔτ᾽ 527 » ΄ a A ” > , > , ἐθέλει ἀναβαίνειν τῆς γῆς ἄνω, add’ ἀποσήπεται καὶ ἀποπνίγεται τῇ πλεονεξίῃ: βιῆται γὰρ τὸ σπέρμα. βιῆται δὲ καὶ ἐν τοῖσιν ἐντέροισιν ἡ πλη- ἊΝ Ἂν ὯΝ Ἑ ἊΝ 4 ἊΝ > a 4 , e θὺς καὶ TO ὑγρὸν πολύ, καὶ οὐκ ἂν φύσαι τρίχας. αἱ Ἂν 5 ΄ ΄ 2 A A 4 Ν δὲ ἀδένες μείζονες ἤ κου ἄλλοθι τοῦ σώματος: καὶ νέμονται αἱ ἀδένες ἐν τοῖσιν ἐντέροισιν ἐκπιεζόμεναι ΩΝ 4 Ν \ »~ > lal / > Ν > / τὸν πλάδον: τὰ δὲ ἔντερα EK τῶν τευχέων ἐς TA ἐπί- 5 / Ἂν; , Ν e 4 ἊΝ Ἂς πλοα ἐκδέχεται καὶ καθίησι τὴν ὑγρασίην: τὸ δὲ ἐπίπλοον διαδιδοῖ τῇσιν ἀδέσιν. » Ν Ἂς 6. Ἔχουσι καὶ οἱ νεφροὶ δὲ ἀδένας: καὶ yap οὗτοι κορίσκονται πολλῆς Vypacins: μείζους δὲ αἱ 5 ΄ 4 an « BA > , > lal 2. ‘ ἀδένες ταύτῃ ἢ αἱ ἄλλαι ἀδένες ἐοῦσαι: οὐ yap ἐμπίνεται τοῖσι νεφροῖσι τὸ ὑγρὸν τὸ ἐπιρρέον, > Ν ΄ πος , / “ 4 “Ἃ > ἀλλὰ διαρρέει ἐπὶ κύστιν κάτω, ὥστε 6 TL ἂν ἀπο- A > A A ° Ν κερδάνωσιν ἀπὸ τῶν ὀχετῶν, τοῦτο ἕλκουσι πρὸς σφέας. 7. Καὶ ἄλλαι δέ εἰσιν ἐν τῷ σώματι ἀδένες σμι- κραὶ [kat]? πάνυ, add’ οὐ βούλομαι ἀποπλανᾶν τὸν λόγον: ἐς γὰρ τὰς ἐπικαίρους ἡ γραφή. νῦν δὲ ἀνα- / wn ‘\ > > , βήσομαι TO λόγῳ, καὶ ἐρέω περὶ ἀδένων οὐλομελίης 112 GLANDS there on both sides; in the axillae there are glands and hairs; groins and pubis similarly to the axillae. These are hollow parts of the body and easy for excessive moisture to occupy, especially since they labour and move more than any other parts. 5. Other parts of the body which have only glands, like the intestines (these have quite large glands situated in the omentum), lack hairs. After all, in the earth’s marshes and wet places a seed fails to germinate and is unable to come up above the soil, being decomposed and suffo- cated by the excessive moisture, since the moisture over- powers the seed. So too do the abundance and great moisture in the intestines have an overpowering effect, and fail to bring forth hairs. The glands there are larger than in any other part of the body; they gain their nour- ishment in the intestines by squeezing out moisture for themselves: the intestines receive moisture from the ves- sels and send it to the omentum, the omentum in turn passes it on to the glands. 6. The kidneys, too, have glands, since they also are saturated with much moisture. The glands there are larger than the other glands, for the moisture that flows in is not soaked up by the kidneys, but flows through them down to the bladder, so that whatever the glands acquire from the pipes they draw to themselves. 7. In the body there are also other very small glands, but I do not want to wander off from my subject; this trea- tise, after all, pertains to the essentials. So now I shall go on in my argument and discuss the general nature of the ! Del. Potter. 2 Del. Ermerins. 113 562 ΠΕΡῚ AAENOQN OTAOMEAITH> 4 ΄ x ΄ 5 A ε 4 5, τραχήλου: τράχηλος τὰ μέρεα αὐτοῦ ἑκάτερα ἔνθα Ν + > "4: »” Ν ὮΝ 7 e καὶ ἔνθα ἀδένας ἔχει, Kal παρίσθμια καλέονται at > ΄, i) / / ε Ν ε ΄ ἀδένες αὗται: χρείη τοιήδε: ἡ κεφαλὴ ὑπέρκειται » ΄ τς τὰ Ν Ν Ν ΄ 1 A ἄνω KoiAn ἐοῦσα καὶ περιφερὴς καὶ «πλήρης; τῆς περὶ | αὐτὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἄλλου σώματος ὑγρασίης" καὶ ἅμα ἀναπέμπει τὸ σῶμα ἀτμοὺς ἐς τὴν κεφαλὴν / ΕΣ Δ 3 ε A > / 5 , παντοίους ἄνω, OVS αὖθις ἡ κεφαλὴ ὀπίσω ἀφίησιν: οὐ γὰρ δύναται ἐμμένειν τὸ ἐπιρρέον οὐκ ἔχον ἔνθα ἕδρην, ἢν μὴ τὴν κεφαλὴν πονέῃ, τότε οὐκ ἀνίησιν, > > 5 “ 4 > Ν Ἂς > la) Ν “ > Ἂν ἀλλ᾽ αὐτοῦ κρατέει: ἐπὴν δὲ ἀνῇ τὴν ἕλξιν, ἐς τὰς 5 4 ε ε Ἂς , ΩΝ > Ἂν / Ν ec a ἀδένας ἡ pon γίνεται, Kat οὐδὲν λυπέει TO ῥεῦμα, ἔστ᾽ ἂν ὀλίγον τε ἢ καὶ ξύμμετρον καὶ ἐγκρατέες 37 e > 4 a Ν Ν 5 A , * x ἔωσιν αἱ ἀδένες: ἣν yap πολὺ ἐπιρρυῇ δριμύ, ἣν μὲν ἢ δριμὺ καὶ κολλῶδες, φλεγμαίνει καὶ ἀνοιδίσκεται καὶ ξυντείνει ὁ τράχηλος, καὶ οὕτω προΐει ἐς οὖς" By ς on κὴν μὲν «ἐς: ἑκάτερα τὰ μέρεα, <Exdtepov>** ἣν δὲ » ΄ ΄ ΄ EN \ 5 A ἐς θάτερον, πονέει θάτερον: ἣν δὲ ἢ φλεγματῶδες ἮΝ Ν Ν > Ν ε « / γᾷ ἊΣ Ν ὃ καὶ πολὺ καὶ ἀργὸν ἡ pon, φλεγμαίνει δὲ καὶ ὧδε: καὶ 7 φλεγμονή, στάσιμον ἐὸν ὑγρόν, χοιράδες 3 ε fal ΄ αἱ νοῦσοι τραχήλου. ἐγγίνονται: αὗται δ᾽ εἰσὶν 8. Μασχάλῃσι δὲ ξυρρέει μὲν καὶ ἐνταῦθα, add’ 4 Ἂς δ ὃ / και WOE YLVOVTAL oe a > / > “ ὅταν πλῆθος ἢ δριμέος ἰχῶρος, ἷξ Ν 3 Ν Ἂν > A a -“ φύματα. κατὰ ταὐτὰ καὶ ἐν τοῖσι βουβῶσιν ἕλκει Ν > Ν A e 7 e 7 ε 3 4 4 τὴν ἀπὸ TOV ὑπερκειμένων ὑγρασίην ἡ ἀδήν: ἄλλως «τ᾽ εἰ πλῆθος λάβοι, βουβωνοῦται καὶ διαπυΐσκε- ται καὶ φλεγμαίνει ἰκέλως μασχάλῃσί τε καὶ τρα- 4 ἣν > > 4 ε 4 4 > Ν Ν χήλῳ: τὰ δ᾽ αὐτά οἱ δοκέει παρέχειν ἀγαθὰ καὶ ' Zwinger in margin. 2 Aldina. 114 GLANDS glands of the throat. The throat has glands here and there on both sides, and these glands are called the paristhmia. This is their function: the head is situated in the superior position, hollow, round, and filled with moisture it has from the rest of the body; at the same time, the body sends up vapours of every sort to the head, which the head in turn sends back; for this influx, having nowhere to settle, cannot remain in the head without making the head ill: in that case the head does not send it away, but it gains the upper hand there. If, however, the head relaxes its attraction, a flux to the glands occurs; this fluid causes no damage, as long as it is small in amount and propor- tional, and the glands can control it. But if there is a copi- ous sharp afflux, which is sharp and viscous, the throat fills with phlegm, swells up and is stretched tight, and as a consequence there is a discharge to the ear; if this hap- pens on both sides, each ear is involved, if on one side, then one ear suffers. If, on the other hand, the flux is like phlegm, copious and inert, swelling occurs in this case, too, but the swelling, since the moisture tends towards stasis, involves the formation of a scrofula. These are the diseases of the throat. 8. To the axillae, too, there are affluxes; when there is a great amount of sharp serum, tubercles form this way too. In the same way, the gland in the groins draws mois- ture from the regions above; especially if it takes in a great amount, the groins swell up, suppurate and fill with phlegm, just as happens in the axillae and the throat. In the groins, too, glands appear to produce the same good 3 δ᾽ εἰσὶν Potter: χρειήοις V: del. Ermerins. 4 Potter: δριμεῖς ἐχῶρες V. 5 Joly. 115 564 ΠΕΡῚ AAENON ΟΥ̓ΛΟΜΕΛΙΗΣ 4 LY A Ν 3 Ν lal κακά. καὶ ταῦτα μὲν ἀμφὶ τῶνδε. Ν ΝΣ ἃ + ’ὔ ‘\ 3 4 , 9. Ta δὲ ἔντερα ἔχει κόρον πολὺν ἀπό TE σιτίων καὶ ποτῶν" | ἔχει δὲ καὶ τὴν ὑπὸ τοῦ δέρματος ὑὕγρα- σίην: αὕτη πᾶσα ἀπαναισιμοῦται ἰκέλη τοῖς πρόσ- θεν: νούσους δὲ οὐ ποιεῖ τὰ πολλά, ὅκως περ καὶ ἐν τοῖσιν ἄρθροισι γίνεται: συχναὶ γάρ τοι ἀδένες καὶ > 4 Ἂν 5 ἴω \ > ἊΝ ἴω 5 ἀναπετέες, καὶ οὐ κοῖλαι, καὶ οὐ πολὺ πλῆθος ἐπαυ- ρισκόμεναι ἡ ἑτέρη τῆς ἑτέρης, ἐπεὶ μᾶλλον πλεονε- - 52 2 WS) ΄ ΄ ΄ 1 » δύ κτεῖν ἐθέλουσα οὐδεμίη τότε πλέον" ἔχειν δύναται, ἀλλ᾽ ὀλίγον ἑκάστη“ ξυρρέον ἐς τὸ ἄρθρον ἐς πολλὰ διαιρεόμενον" ἰσότης ἐστὶν αὐτῇσιν. 10. “H κεφαλὴ καὶ αὐτὴ τὰς ἀδένας ἔχει, τὸν ἐγκέφαλον ἴκελον adéve: ἐγκέφαλος γὰρ καὶ λευκὸς Ἂν / -“ ἂν 3 4 ἊΝ > Ἂν 5 Ἂν καὶ ψαφαρός, ὅκως περ καὶ ἀδένες, καὶ ταὐτὰ ἀγαθὰ τῇσιν ἀδέσι ποιεῖ τὴν κεφαλήν: ἐνεοῦσαν" «γὰρ! διὰ τὰ εἰρημένα μοι, τιμωρέων ὁ ἐγκέφαλος ἀποστε- ρέει τὴν ὑγρασίην, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς ἐσχατιὰς ἔξω ἀπο- ΄ ‘ ΄ Ses A cv , 4. πὸ , στέλλει TO πλέον ἀπὸ τῶν ῥόων. μείζων δ᾽ ὁ ἐγκέ- lal ᾿΄ > / Ν «ς / / 3 « φαλος τῶν ἄλλων ἀδένων, καὶ αἱ τρίχες μείζους ἢ αἱ »Μ 4 4 μὰ ἐν > / Ἂν 5 ἄλλαι τρίχες: μείζων τε γὰρ ὁ ἐγκέφαλος καὶ ἐν > μ » A A εὐρυχωρίῃ κέεται TH κεφαλῇ. ἊΝ Ἂν 4 ἊΝ “ Ν / 11. Ποιέει δὲ νούσους Kai ἥσσονας καὶ μείζονας xn « » > 4 / 4 ε ’ > x 4 lal ἢ αἱ ἄλλαι ἀδένες- ποιέει δέ, ὁκόταν ἐς τὰ κάτω τοῦ 4 Ν / , > , Lard σώματος τὴν σφετέρην πλεονεξίην ἀποστείλῃ. ῥόοι δὲ Sha A say > ΄ὔ 5 ὃ 9. Ν € ἀπὸ κεφαλῆς ἐνίοτε ἀποκρίνονται," δι’ ὥτων κατὰ ! Joly: πλίην V. 2 ὀλίγον ἑκάστη Littré: ἐς ὀλίγον ἑκάστης V. 116 GLANDS and bad effects. So much on this subject. 9. The intestines have a great nutritional abundance which comes from the foods and drinks; also they have the moisture under the skin. All this moisture is con- sumed just as in the cases above, but in most instances, contrary to what happens at the joints, it does not provoke diseases. For in the intestines the glands are thickly dis- tributed and wide open; neither do they have cavities, nor does one gland obtain a great quantity at the expense of another, since none is ever able to have an excessive amount—even though it might wish to have more than its share—but each gets a little of what flows to the part and is divided between many: i.e. there is an equal division among them. 10. The head too has glands, viz. the brain which is like a gland; for the brain is white and friable just like glands, and it renders the same benefits in the head as do glands. For whatever moisture occupies the head in the manner I have described, the brain helps by drawing off, and it sends away to the extremities most of what arises from fluxes. The brain is larger than other glands, and the hairs over it are longer than other hairs; for the brain is of greater size, and it lies in an open space in the head. 11. The brain provokes diseases that are both less and more severe than those provoked by other glands; it does this when it sends its own surplus to the lower parts of the body. Fluxes from the head are sometimes secreted 3 Joly: ἐοῦσαν V. 4 Ermerins. 5 ἐνίοτε ἀποκρ. Potter: ἕως ἀποκρίσιος V. ἘΠῚ 566 ΠΕΡῚ AAENON OTAOMEAIH®> φύσιν, δι’ ὀφθαλμῶν, διὰ ῥινῶν: τρεῖς οὗτοι: καὶ ” , ε ’ 5 4 > ’, », ἄλλοι δι’ ὑπερῴης ἐς φάρυγγα, ἐς στόμαχον: ἄλλοι ε ΄ Ol παᾶαντες Ν lal > ἊΝ a > ‘\ > , διὰ φλεβῶν ἐπὶ νωτιαῖον, ἐς τὰ ἰσχία, ἑπτά. 12. Οὗτοι τοῦ τε ἐγκεφάλου λύματά εἰσιν ἀπιόν- τες" καὶ εἰ μὴ | ἀπίοιεν, νοῦσος αὐτῷ. οὕτω δὲ καὶ A + 4 “Ἄ > Ἂν », 5 4 Ἂς Ν 2, τῷ ἄλλῳ σώματι, ἣν ἐς τὰ ἔνδον ἀπίωσι καὶ μὴ ἔξω, Ἂς 5 ων », 7 ” ¢ A ἣν Ν καὶ αὐτοῖς ὄχλος πολύς, κἄνδοθεν ἑλκοῖ: καὶ δριμὺ μὲν εἰ πρόοιτο ὁ ἐγκέφαλος ῥεῦμα, τὰς ἐπιρροὰς > , Ν ε a Ν Ν Ν > Ν EY > a ἐσθίει καὶ ἑλκοῖ: καὶ TO μὲν ἐπιὸν ἢν ἢ πλῆθος Ν ε ΄ > > 4 ε CY? », ΕῚ vn > 7 KGTLOV ἁλές, οὐκ ἀνέχει ὁ ῥόος, ἔστ᾽ ἂν ἐξαρύηται τὴν πληθὺν τοῦ κατιόντος: καὶ τὸ μὲν ἐπιρρέον ἀπο- / »᾿ “ ἊΝ 5 / > ἧς “ πέμπων ἔξω, ἕτερον δὲ ἐσδεχόμενος, ἐς τὸ ὅμοιον SEN ΄ ΄ ¢ Ne, ag, Ν ΄ , αἰεὶ καθιστάμενος: τά TE ὑγρὰ EAKOL™ καὶ ποιέει VOU- » δὲ > > ΧΦ τ ων Ν ΄ Ν σους. ἄμφω δὲ ἐν ἀηθίῃ" καταγυιοῖ τὴν φύσιν: καὶ “᾿ ΄ cy ee) Ν ͵΄ Ny \ N , A ἣν πάθῃ, dv’ ἐστὸν κακία: τὰ μὲν yap πάθη τῆς Ν lal φύσεως, οἱ προειρημένοι ῥόοι: δυσφορέουσι TO πλῆ- os, καὶ ὀδάξον καὶ: ἄλογον καὶ οὐ ξύνηθες ὄν: ὁ δὲ > 4 “ », Ἂν > ‘\ > c 4 > > ἐγκέφαλος πῆμα ἴσχει καὶ αὐτὸς οὐχ ὑγιαίνων: ἀλλ εἰ μὲν δάκνοιτο, τάραχον πολὺν ἴσχει, καὶ ὁ νόος > z Ἂς ε > / lal Ν σ΄ SN ἀφραίνει, Kat ὁ ἐγκέφαλος σπᾶται καὶ ἕλκει TOV oe ” Γ᾽ 5 δ᾽ > ΄ Ν ΄ ὅλον ἄνθρωπον, ἐνίοτε οὐ φωνέει καὶ πνίγεται, ἀποπληξίη τῷ πάθει τοὔνομα. ἄλλοτε δὲ δριμὺ μὲν ! Littré: τὸ αἷμα Ν. 2 Potter: ἕλκη V. 3 Potter: ἀκηδίῃ V. 4 Joly: ὀδάξον τὸ Ermerins: ὀδάξονται τὸ V. 118 GLANDS through the natural passages of the ears, eyes or nose: these are three possibilities; others flow through the palate into the throat or into the oesophagus, others through the vessels into the spinal marrow, or to the hips: seven possibilities in all.@ 12. These fluxes are purgations of the brain when they pass off, and if they do not pass off, the brain becomes ill. So too in the rest of the body, if they pass into the interior rather than to the exterior, it means great trouble for those parts, with ulcers forming in the interior. If the brain sends forth a fluxion that is sharp, this corrodes and ulcerates the channels by which it arrives. If what arrives is great in quantity and passes down all in a mass, the flux does not cease until it has drained off most of what is passing down. In continually sending one afflux away while at the same time receiving a new one, a constant state becomes established, and the moisture causes ulcer- ations and provokes diseases. Both these fluxes in their abnormality weaken the constitution, and if a person becomes ill, the evils are two. For first there are the affections of the constitution, the fluxes mentioned above; these patients bear up poorly under the quantity and the fact that it is irritating, inappropriate and unaccustomed. Secondly, the brain is harmed and is not healthy itself; and if it is irritated, it suffers a great disturbance, the mind is deranged, and the brain pulls and convulses the whole person, who sometimes becomes speechless and is suffocated; the name of this disease is apoplexy. Other @ Cf. Places in Man 10. 5 Littré after Dietz: év ἑωυτῷ V. 119 568 570 ΠΕΡῚ AAENON OTAOMEAITH®> > ΄ ἈΝ Ἢ] δ κ᾿ nO δ᾽ | a Ν 5 ἣν οὐ ποιέεται τὸ" ῥεῦμα, πλῆθος ὃν τὸ ἐμπεσὸν πονέει τοῦτο, καὶ ἣ γνώμη ταράττεται, καὶ περίεισιν ἀλλοῖα φρονῶν καὶ ἀλλοῖα ὁρέων: φέρων τὸ ἦθος τῆς νούσου σεσηρόσι μειδιήμασι καὶ ἀλλοκότοισι φαντάσμασιν. 3, / ‘ 13. “AhAos ῥόος ἐπ᾽ ὀφθαλμούς, ὀφθαλμίαι, Kat 3 re ε 5, > x > Ἂ tn e 4 οἰδέουσιν αἱ ὄψεις. εἰ δὲ ἐπὶ ῥῖνας ὁ κατάρρους, τὶ 4 A XN »“, 5 Ων 4 “ ὀδάξονται μυκτῆρας, καὶ ἄλλο οὐδὲν δεινόν: αἵ τε Ν ε Ἂς ’ 5 74 Ne Ν ὮΝ / yap ὁδοὶ τούτων εὐρέαι Kal ἱκαναὶ τιμωρέειν σφίσιν: ἊΝ Ν Ὡς 5 “ Ν > Ἂν > lal Ν Ν πρὸς δὲ καὶ ἀσύστροφον τὸ ἀπιὸν αὐτῇσι. τὰ δὲ + ἣν ἊΝ 4 ‘\ 4 Ὁ > > 4 οὔατα σκολιὸς μὲν πόρος καὶ στεινός: ὁ δ᾽ ἐγκέφα- hos πλησίον αὐτοῦ αὐτοῖσιν ἐμπιέζεται: νοσέων δὲ τὴν νοῦσον ταύτην, τὰ πολλὰ ἀποκρίνει κατὰ τὸ οὖς ἌΣ ΒΕΑΝ a A 2. NO EN ΄ , ἄπο TNS πυκινὴς pons <Kal>~ ava χρονον κεχωρι- 3 Ν cs lal a “ > \ ὦν, TE και PEEL δυσῶδες WTvUOV. OVUTWS ες TA ἔξω σταί δῆλοι τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ ῥόοι, καὶ οὐ πάμπαν θανατώδεες. a A 3, ’ὔ Ν 14. Ἢν δὲ ὀπίσω [τὸ ῥεῦμα] ἴῃ δι’ ὑπερῴης τὸ 3 “Φ ΄ 5 ἘΝ / cs \ ὃν ἀφικόμενον φλέγμα ἐς τὴν κοιλίην, ῥέουσι μὲν καὶ Ν » αἱ κοιλίαι τούτων, νοσέουσι δὲ οὔ: ἀναμένοντος ΄ A ΄ 5 Ν Χ5 ΄ ΄ κάτω τοῦ φλέγματος, εἰλεοὶ Kat? πάθη χρόνια" » 3. ΄ > τὶ ΄ “᾿ ἣν CoA \ ἄλλοις bu’ ὑπερῴης ἐπὶ φάρυγγα, ἣν πολὺ ῥυῇ Kal 3 A Δ « “ 4 / Ν A ἐπὶ πολύ, al νοῦσοι φθινάδες: κορίσκονται yap τοῦ ἊΝ lal λέγματος οἱ πνεύμονες, καὶ γίνεται | τὸ πῦον; μ τοῦτο διεσθίει τοὺς πνεύμονας" καὶ οἱ νοσέοντες οὐ - A fal “Ἃ ῥάϊον περιγίνονται: καὶ ἡ γνώμη τοῦ ἰητροῦ, καὶ ἣν > Ν - “Δ > / Ἂν ; > 4 a ἀγαθὸς καὶ ἣν ayxivoos, Ta πολλ᾽ ἀξυνετέει τῆς προφάσιος. ! Potter: ποιέει αὐτὸ V. 120 GLANDS times the fluxion is not made sharp, but the afflux, being great in quantity, causes pain; the reason is disturbed and the victim goes about thinking and seeing alien things; one bears this kind of disease with grinning laughter and grotesque visions. 13. Another flux is to the eyes—ophthalmia—and the organs of sight swell up. If the defluxion is to the nose, the nostrils become itchy, but nothing else untoward occurs, for these passages are wide and sufficient to look after themselves; furthermore what goes out through the nose does not tend to congeal. In the ears, the channels are curved and narrow; besides, the brain, being close, exerts pressure on them. Ifa person has this disease, gen- erally he secretes through the ear what comes from the frequent flux; with time this is separated off, and ill- smelling pus flows out. In this way fluxes are revealed to the eye as they flow to the exterior, and such are not alto- gether mortal. 14. If the phlegm that arrives from above goes back- ward through the palate into the cavity, these persons have a flux of the cavities, but do not become ill; if, how- ever, the phlegm tarries in the lower parts, ileus and chronic sufferings arise. In other persons, a flux through the palate into the throat, if it is copious and lasts a long time, produces consumptive diseases; for the lungs become saturated with the phlegm, and pus is formed, which eats its way through the lungs. These patients sur- vive only with difficulty; the physician’s understanding, even if he is good and he is shrewd, in most cases fails to grasp the cause. 2 Ermerins. 3 Ermerins: ὥρισταί V. 4 Del. Joly. 5 Joly: τὰ V. 121 572 ΠΕΡῚ AAENON OTAOMEAIH> "AdAn νοῦσος: διὰ φλεβῶν ἐπὶ νωτιαῖον ἀπὸ ΄ A ah OS A SUN N Katappoov κεφαλῆς: ἀΐσσει δὲ ἐντεῦθεν ἐπὶ ἱερὸν ὀστέον, ἄγων τὴν ἐπιρροὴν ὁ νωτιαῖος, καὶ ἐναπέ- al A ED) θετο τῇσι κοτύλῃσι τῶν ἰσχίων: [ἰσχία]; Kai Hv ΄ ΄ Ν 710 ΄ ἘΝ ταλ ὃ Ν ποιέῃ φθίσιν, [καὶ] μαραίνεται ὁ ἄνθρωπος ὧδε καὶ e Ν ’ὔ > > ΄ ‘\ Ἂν / Ν ὧδε καὶ ζώειν οὐκ ἐθέλει: ταχὺ γὰρ πονέει τὴν 4 Ν ΕΣ SS 4 Ν Ν χὰ σπάθην, καὶ ἄμφω τὼ πόδε καὶ μηρὼ παρέπονται, καὶ αἰεὶ τελέως ὄλλυνται χρόνῳ πολλῷ μελεδαινόμε- νοι, καὶ οὕτως ἀπηύδηκε καὶ θνήσκει. ταῦτά μοι «περὶ; ῥόων ἀπὸ κεφαλῆς εἴρηται. 15. Καὶ πάθεα ἐγκεφάλου καὶ ἄλλαι νοῦσοι, παραφροσύναι καὶ μανίαι, καὶ πάντα ἐπικίνδυνα, Ν ἐμ ε 3 / Ἂν « A > / 2 καὶ πονέει ὁ ἐγκέφαλος καὶ αἱ ἄλλαι ἀδένες: ἔχει Ν ἊΝ ’ὕ Ν + 4 > A 4 A yap Kat τόνον καὶ ἄλλη Evvodos ἐνταῦθα πάλιν τοῦ σώματος. 16. ᾿Αλλὰ καὶ ἀδένες ἐν τοῖσι στήθεσι μαζοὶ ΄ Ν | ΄ ΄ ΄ a Ν καλέονται, καὶ | διαίρονται γάλα ποιέουσιν: τοῖς δὲ > / ΄ 5, 4 ΄ Ν ε A ov ποιέουσι γάλα, <ov>** ποιέουσι μὲν αἱ γυναῖκες, οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες οὐ ποιέουσι. τῇσι μὲν γυναιξὶν ἀραιή 5 τῶν ἀδένων, ὥσπερ τὸ ἄλλο ¢ 7 (2 Te ἡ φύσις κάρτα A Ν Ν 4 . “ > ἂν “ σῶμα, καὶ τὴν τροφήν, ἥντινα ἕλκουσιν ἐπὶ σφᾶς, Lal Ν lal / ἀλλοιοῦσιν ἐς τὸ γάλα: Kal ἀπὸ τῆς μήτρης Tapa- γίνεται ἐπὶ τοὺς μαζοὺς ἐς τὴν μετὰ τὸν τόκον τῷ ° / Ν 4 παιδίῳ τροφήν, ἣν τινα ἀποπιέζει Kat ὑπερβάλλει 5, Ἂν [οἱ τὸ ἐπίπλοον ἐς τὰ ἄνω, στενοχωρούμενον ὑπὸ τοῦ ἐμβρύου. rn » , Τοῖσι δὲ ἄρρεσι καὶ ἡ στενοχωρίη καὶ ἡ πυκνό- fal 4 Ν εν 4 της τοῦ σώματος μέγα συμβάλλεται μὴ εἶναι μεγά- 122 GLANDS Another disease: a flux down from the head through the vessels to the spinal marrow; from there the afflux darts along the spinal marrow to the sacrum, to be deposited in the cups of the hips. If the flux leads to con- sumption, the person wastes away bit by bit and does not care to live; for soon he is affected in the shoulder blades, his two legs and thighs follow—in the end such patients always perish after a long period of care—and so he fails and dies. This is what I have to say about fluxes from the head. 15. Other diseases too are affections of the brain— derangements and delirious states—and all these things are dangerous. Both the brain and the other glands suf- fer; for the brain has a band connecting it to the other glands, and also there is another conjunction there com- ing back from the body. 16. The glands on the chest are called breasts, and these develop in individuals that make milk, not in those that do not make milk: women make milk, but men do not. In women the substance of the glands is very rar- efied, just like the rest of their bodies, and the nourish- ment these glands draw to themselves they alter into milk. This passes from the uterus to the breasts as nour- ishment for the baby after its birth, being squeezed out by the omentum and cast up to the higher regions of the body when it becomes cramped by the fetus. In males it is largely the compactness and density of their bodies that contribute to the smallness of these 1 Del. Ermerins. 2 Del. Linden. 3 Foes after Cornarius’ de. 4 Littré. 5 Zwinger in margin: καὶ κατὰ V. 123 5 - ί 4 ΠΕΡῚ AAENON OTAOMEATH®> λας Tas adévas: TO yap ἄρρεν ναστόν ἐστι καὶ οἷον - \ Nive ΄ ἊΣ, 59 ᾽ὕ Ν Ν A εἷμα πυκνὸν καὶ ὁρέοντι καὶ ἐπαφωμένῳ: TO δὲ θῆλυ ἀραιὸν καὶ χαῦνον καὶ οἷον εἴριον ὁρέοντι καὶ ἐπα- / © X Ν φωμένῳ: ὥστε τὴν ὑγρασίην οὐ μεθίησι τὸ ἀραιὸν Ν ᾽ὔ ἊΝ Ν + 5 » ᾽ὔ καὶ μαλθακόν: τὸ δὲ ἄρσεν οὐκ ἄν τι προσδέξαιτο, πυκνόν τε ἐὸν καὶ ἀστεργές, καὶ ὁ πόνος κρατύνει > aA Ν A “ 5 » ὃ > - / ΄ 1 lal αὐτοῦ TO σῶμα, ὥστε οὐκ ἔχει Ou’ οὗ λήψεταί TL TOV ἴα, “ 5 / -“ ε 4 Ν 4 περισσῶν. οὕτως ἀναγκάζει ὅδε ὁ λόγος καὶ στήθεα καὶ μαζοὺς καὶ τὸ ἄλλο σῶμα τῇσι γυναιξὶ χαῦνα Ν A 5 ἊΝ \ ἊΝ 5 ΄ τ Ν x καὶ μαλακὰ εἶναι καὶ διὰ τὴν apyinv καὶ διὰ τὰ προειρημένα" τοῖσι δὲ ἀνδράσι τὰ ἐναντία. Ν 17. Ποιέουσι καὶ μαζοὶ φύματα, φλεγμονάς, τὸ γάλα ἀποσήϊποντες: ἀγαθὰ δὲ ἔχουσι τοῖσιν ἔμπροσ- “ὔ > / Ν ᾽ὕ wn 5 θεν ὅμοια: ἀποστερίζουσι τὴν πλεονεξίην τοῦ ἄλλου σώματος. μαρτύριον τῇσι γυναιξὶν ἧσιν ἀφαιρεῖται ζ) » A / ε νούσῳ ἢ ἄλλῃ τινὶ ξυμφορᾷ" μαζός: καὶ ἡ φωνὴ θρασεῖα, καὶ ὑγρὰ εἰς στόμαχον, καὶ πτυελίζουσι, Ν NX ὡς 5» , Ν 5 Ν »"» ᾽ὔ καὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ἀλγέουσι: καὶ ἀπὸ τῶνδε νοσέουσιν; »"» ia ο ἰὸν γὰρ ἀπὸ τῆς μήτρης καὶ ἐπιρρέον τὸ γάλα ὥσ- ΄ 3 Sy, > Ν ” ΄ 4 Ν περ μεθίετο" καὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἐς τὰ ἄνω [τεύχεα],2 τὰ aA » 4 aA οἰκεῖα οὐκ ἔχον τεύχεα, συντυγχάνει τοῖσι κυρίοις lal ’ὔ ΄’΄ Ν 4 TOU σώματος, καρδίῃ, πνεύμονι, Kal ἀποπνίγονται. ! Ermerins: τὸ V. 2 Froben: νοῦσος ἢ ἄλλη τις ξυμφορὰ V. 3 Joly: μεθίη V. 4 Del. Joly. 124 GLANDS glands; for the male is close-pressed like a thick carpet both in appearance and to the touch. The female, on the other hand, is rarefied and porous like a flock of wool in appearance and to the touch: it follows that this rarefied and soft tissue does not reject moisture. The male cannot accept anything, first because of his naturally dense and unyielding substance, and then exercise, too, strengthens his body, so that it has no way of taking up any excess. Thus, this reasoning proves that the chest, breasts and rest of the body in females are porous and soft, both because of the sex’s inactivity and because of what has been said above, whereas in males the opposite is true. 17. The breasts develop tubercles and inflammations when their milk turns bad. Their positive actions are the same as noted above: to carry off the rest of the body’s surplus. Proof of this is provided by women that lose a breast either in a disease or because of some other accident: their voice becomes bold, fluid enters their oesophagus, they secrete excessive saliva, and they have pains in the head. They suffer these things because of the following: since milk continues to leave the uterus and flow out towards the upper regions of the body as it did before, not having a proper receptacle it lights upon the principal parts of the body such as the heart and lung, and the women suffocate. 125 FLESHES INTRODUCTION The only trace of this work to be found in ancient writ- ings appears in the Hippocratic glossaries of Erotian! and Galen, both of which contain the uniquely occurring word ἀνακῶς (Fleshes ch. 19). One or more of three other entries in Galen’s Glossary may also derive from Fleshes, although not necessarily so, since they do occur elsewhere in the Corpus: αἰών (Fleshes ch. 19 bis); συριγγώδη (chs. 3, 7, 15); τέως (chs. 8, 9, 13). The theory put forth in the first part of the treatise, and developed with such energy and care, marks its au- thor as one of the most extraordinary scientific minds of the Corpus; the reasoning here is comparable in power and originality to anything we find in Generation-Nature of the Child, Diseases IV, Regimen, or the Sacred Disease. Beginning from a division of the macrocosm into aether = heat, earth (cold and dry), and air (thick and moist), the author traces the effects of heat and cold on the various elements and their combinations, as they give rise to the tissues of the human body. His basic “chemi- cal” principles are: 1 Cf. Nachmanson p. 387, note 2 and Ὁ. 411. 129 FLESHES burns the fatty to form bone Hest bakes the gluey to form membranes ᾿ dries the moist to make it disappear melts the cold to make it flow away. Cold: congeals the liquid to make it stand still. Consistent application of these principles results in cogent explanations of the formation of the hollow parts and cords (ch. 3), brain (ch. 4), heart and vessels (chs. 5, 6), lung (ch. 7), liver (ch. 8), spleen and kidney (ch. 9), joints (ch. 10), nails (ch. 11), and hair (ch. 14). Only in the case of the teeth (chs. 12, 13) does the author fall back on the traditional “like to like” principle of other Hippo- cratic treatises. 2 The second part of the treatise explores the mecha- nisms of hearing (ch. 15), smell (ch. 16), sight (ch. 17), and speech (ch. 18), generally achieving a judicious syn- thesis of common Hippocratic anatomical beliefs and physiological principles (e.g. hearing as echo; seeing as reflection; phonation as resonance within the chest) with ideas otherwise unrecorded in the Corpus (e.g. smell as the perception of the drier by the moister; the cornea as a skin formed on the surface of moisture flowing from the brain when it comes into contact with external cold; the articulation of speech as the act of the tongue touching the palate and teeth). Chapter 19 takes up a theme remote from those of the first two sections, setting out to illustrate the special sig- nificance of the seven-day period in biology. Examples, 2 Cf. C. W. Miiller, Gleiches zu Gleichem, Wiesbaden, 1965, pp- 112-50. 130 FLESHES many of which are also alluded to in other Hippocratic treatises, include the time taken for the first formation of the fetus, the fact that the seven-month, but not eight- month, fetus is viable, and the special importance of the seven-day period, or fraction of it, in the course of acute diseases.? Several emendations to the text of Fleshes are pro- posed in: W. A. Heidel, “Hippocratea I”, Harvard Studies in Classical Philology, 25 (1914), 178-187 ( = Heidel). An edition, German translation, and commentary of Fleshes appeared as: K. Deichgraeber, Uber Entstehung und Auf- bau des menschlichen Kérpers ... mit einem sprach- wissenschaftlichen Beitrag von Ed. Schwyzer, Leipzig and Berlin, 1935 (= Deichgraeber or Schwyzer). Fleshes is also included in Joly’s Budé volume XIII (1978). 3 Cf. Wilhelm Roscher, Die Hebdomadenlehren der griechi- schen Philosophen und Arzte, Leipzig, 1906, pp. 44-86. 131 VIII 584 Littré ΠΕΡῚ SAPKON il Ἐ Ἂν Ν 7 ἴω N ig 4 lal Δ, "ὦ . Ἐγὼ τὰ μέχρι τοῦ λόγου τούτου κοινῇσι γνώ / A Ἂν μῃσι χρέομαι ἑτέρων τε τῶν ἔμπροσθεν, ἀτὰρ καὶ lal Ν », ἐμεωυτοῦ: ἀναγκαίως γὰρ ἔχει κοινὴν ἀρχὴν ὑποθέ- a , “4 Lal Ἂν; / σθαι τῇσι γνώμῃσι βουλόμενον ξυνθεῖναι τὸν λόγον ὯΝ Lal »“». Lal Ν Ν A τόνδε περὶ τῆς τέχνης τῆς ἰητρικῆς. περὶ δὲ τῶν ΄ * ὯΝ A μετεώρων ovdev! δέομαι λέγειν, ἣν μὴ τοσοῦτον ἐς 3, ΄ > A . A Ν ἄνθρωπον ἀποδείξω καὶ τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα, ὅκως" ἔφυ καὶ Ay TS © Ν / ἐγένετο, Kal ὅ TL ψυχή ἐστιν, καὶ ὅ TL TO ὑγιαίνειν, καὶ ὅ τι τὸ κάμνειν, καὶ ὅ τι τὸ ἐν ἀνθρώπῳ κακὸν Ἂν > 4 \@¢ > , lal ὮΝ > ’ καὶ ἀγαθόν, καὶ ὅθεν ἀποθνήσκει. νῦν δὲ ἀποφαίνο- αν Ν oe A ΄ μαι αὐτὸς <Tas>” ἐμεωυτοῦ γνώμας. 2. Δοκέει δέ μοι ὃ καλέομεν θερμόν, ἀθάνατόν τε εἶναι καὶ νοέειν πάντα καὶ ὁρὴν καὶ ἀκούειν καὶ εἰδέ- 4 Ἂν Ἂς 52 ΩΝ Ν 4 4 val πάντα καὶ τὰ ἐόντα Kal τὰ μέλλοντα ἔσεσθαι: ζ 4 τουτου > \ A Ψ > ΄ ΄ > οὖν TO πλεῖστον, ὅτε ἐταράχθη πάντα, ἐξε- χώρησεν εἰς τὴν ἀνωτάτω περιφορήν: καὶ ὀνομῆναί > Ν uA e Ν > , c / μοι αὐτὸ δοκέουσιν οἱ παλαιοὶ αἰθέρα. ἡ δευτέρα “ lal A Ν μοῖρα κάτωθεν αὐτῆς" καλέεται μὲν γῆ, ψυχρὸν καὶ A » Ν lal ξηρὸν καὶ πολὺ κινοῦν: Kal ἐν τούτῳ ἔνι δὴ πολὺ τοῦ ! Joly after Heidel: οὐδὲ V. 132 FLESHES 1. In this treatise I shall employ assumptions that are generally held—both those of my predecessors and my own—-since it is necessary to establish a common starting point, if I wish to compose this treatise about medicine. About what is in the heavens I have no need to speak, except insofar as is necessary in order to explain how man and the other animals are formed and come into being, what the soul is, what health and sickness are, what in man is evil and what good, and where his death comes from. From here on, then, I present opinions that are my own. 2. I believe that what we call heat is in fact immortal, that it perceives all things, and sees, hears and knows all that is and all that will be. Now at the time that the uni- verse was in a state of turbulence, the greatest part of this heat separated off into the uppermost revolving vault of heaven. This the ancients, I believe, called the “aether”. The second portion of material below this is called earth; it is cold, dry and in great motion, although it too contains 2 Ermerins: ὁκόσα V. 3 Ermerins. 4 Potter: τοῦτο V. 5 Deichgraeber: αὐτῆ V. 133 586 ΠΕΡῚ ΣΑΡΚΩΝ θερμοῦ. ἡ δὲ τρίτη μοῖρα ἡ τοῦ ἠέρος τοῦ ἐγγυτάτω πρὸς τῇ γῇ, ὑγρότατόν τε καὶ παχύτατον. 8. Κυκλεομένων δὲ τούτων, ὅτε συνεταράχθη, ἀπελείφθη τοῦ | θερμοῦ πολὺ ἐν τῇ γῇ ἄλλοθι «καὶ ἄλλοθι», τὰ μὲν μεγάλα, τὰ δὲ ἐλάσσω, τὰ δὲ καὶ ZA / lal 4 Ν ἴω ΄ὔ ε Ν A πάνυ σμικρά, πλῆθος πολλά. καὶ τῷ χρόνῳ ὑπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ ξηραινομένης τῆς γῆς, ταῦτα «τὰ; κατα- λειφθέντα περὶ αὐτὰ σηπεδόνας ποιέει οἷόν TEP? χιτῶνας. καὶ πολλῷ χρόνῳ θερμαινόμενον, ὅσον μὲν ἐτύγχανεν ἐκ τῆς γῆς σηπεδόνος λιπαρόν τε ἐὸν καὶ ὀλίγιστον τοῦ ὑγροῦ ἔχον, τάχιστα ἐξεκαύθη Ν 5 uA > / ες γ Ν 5 4 / καὶ ἐγένετο ὀστέα. ὁκόσα δὲ ἐτύγχανε κολλωδέ- στερα ἐόντα καὶ τοῦ ψυχροῦ μετέχοντα, ταῦτα δὲ / > 3 ΄ > ial > Ν Ν θερμαινόμενα οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἐκκαυθῆναι, οὐδὲ ξηρὰ γενέσθαι: οὐ γὰρ ἦν τοῦ λιπαροῦ ὡς ἐκκαυθῆγαι, 5 ἊΝ Ἂν A e A ε > ἊΝ Ἂν ͵ὔ οὐδὲ μὴν τοῦ ὑγροῦ ὡς ἐκκαυθὲν ξηρὸν γενέσθαι: διὰ τοῦτο εἰδέην ἀλλοιοτέρην ἔλαβε τῶν ἄλλων καὶ ἐγένετο νεῦρα καὶ φλέβες. αἱ μὲν φλέβες κοῖλαι, τὰ δὲ νεῦρα στερεά: οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνὴν πολὺ τοῦ ψυχροῦ αὐτοῖσιν." αἱ δὲ φλέβες τοῦ ψυχροῦ εἶχον: καὶ τού- A A Ἂν Ν / “ 4 του Tov ψυχροῦ τὸ μὲν πέριξ ὅσον κολλωδέστατον εν ε Ν A “ 5 Ἂς A > Ἂς Ν ἦν, ὑπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ ἐξοπτηθὲν μῆνιγξ ἐγένετο, τὸ δὲ Ν > Noy Ν CHEN a a ὃ ΄ Ν ψυχρὸν eveov? κρατηθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ διελύθη καὶ ἐγένετο ὑγρὸν διὰ τοῦτο. Κατὰ δὲ τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον καὶ ὁ φάρυγξ καὶ ὁ στόμαχος καὶ ἡ γαστὴρ καὶ τὰ ἔντερα ἐς τὸν ἀρχὸν ! Littré. 2 Ermerins. 134 FLESHES much heat. The third portion is the air closest to the earth; it is moistest and thickest. 3. Now while these things were mingled with one another in a state of turbulence as they rotated, much heat was left behind at various places in the earth, in some places great amounts, in others lesser amounts and in still others very small amounts, but these many in num- ber. As with time the earth was dried out by this heat, the materials left behind engendered putrefactions about themselves, which had the form of tunics. Now what was heated for a great time and happened to arise from the putrefaction of the earth as fat, and containing the least moisture, quickly burnt up and became bones. That, on the other hand, which happened to be more gluey and to contain cold could not be burnt up on being heated or become dry, since it contained neither any fat that could be burnt up nor any moisture that, on being burnt up, could become dry; for this reason it took a form rather different from the other things, and became cords and vessels. The vessels were hollow and the cords solid owing to the fact that in the cords there was not much cold; in the vessels, on the other hand, cold was present, so that in the case of the vessels the part of this cold around the outside that was most gluey was baked through by the heat and became membraneous, while the cold in the inside, on being mastered by the heat, dis- solved and became liquid. In this same way the pharynx, oesophagus, stomach and intestines as far down as the rectum too became 3 Froben: περὶ V. 4 Ermerins: αὐτὸ V. 5 Zwinger: éov V2. 135 588 ΠΕΡῚ ΣΑΡΚΩΝ κοῖλα ἐγένοντο: τοῦ γὰρ ψυχροῦ αἰεὶ θερμαινομένου Ν Ν 4 > / «“ 3 Ἂν A io x, TO μὲν πέριξ ἐξωπτήθη ὅσον αὐτὸ κολλῶδες ἦν, καὶ ἐγένετο χιτὼν ὁ περὶ αὐτὸν μῆνιγξ, τὸ δὲ ἐντὸς τοῦ ψυχροῦ, οὐ γὰρ ἐνῆν ἐν αὐτῷ οὔτε λιπαρὸν οὔτε a 4 4 Ν 9 , e “4 ‘\ Ν κολλῶδες πολύ, διετάκη καὶ ἐγένετο ὑγρόν. κατὰ δὲ Ν 5 Ν if ὯΝ ς , Ἂν Ν 5 τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον καὶ ἡ κύστις, πολὺ ψυχρὸν ἀπολει- φθέν, τὸ πέριξ αὐτοῦ ὑπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ θερμαινόμενον χιτὼν ἐγένετο μῆνιγξ, τὸ δὲ μέσον πολὺν χρόνον θερμαινόμενον διελύθη καὶ ἐγένετο ὑγρόν: οὐ yap | ἐνῆν ἐν αὐτῷ οὔτε τοῦ λιπαροῦ οὔτε τοῦ κολλώδεος" ὅσον δὲ περιῆν χιτὼν ἐγένετο. 5 Ν Ἂν Ν lo) » “ lal Ν LPs Ατὰρ καὶ περὶ τῶν ἄλλων, ὅσα κοῖλα, τὸν αὐτὸν ” / “ Ν > A χὰ ΄ὔ a fa! ἔχει τρόπον: ὅκου μὲν ἣν τοῦ KOAAWOEOS πλέον ἢ τοῦ λιπαροῦ, χιτὼν μῆνιγξ ἐγένετο: ὅκου δὲ τοῦ λιπαροῦ / >) lal / > / > 4 ε Ἂν \ πλέον ἢ τοῦ κολλώδεος, ὀστέα ἐγένετο. wWUTOS δὲ λόγος καὶ τῶν ὀστέων: ὅκου μὲν μὴ ἐνῆν τοῦ κολλώ- lal Ν ἴω Ἂν; lal lal > / Lal deos, τοῦ δὲ λιπαροῦ καὶ Tov ψυχροῦ, ἐξεκαίετο θᾶσ- σον διὰ τὸ λιπαρόν, καὶ ταῦτα τῶν ὀστέων καὶ / Ν / -“ Ν ἊΝ x σκληρότατα καὶ στριφνότατα- ὅκου δὲ λιπαρὸν καὶ A / lal Ν A > ἐν κολλῶδες παραπλήσια, ταῦτα δὲ τῶν ὀστέων σηραγγώδεα. περὶ μὲν τούτων οὕτως: τὸ μὲν Ἂν, ΄΄ Ν x Ν / > Ἂν lal ψυχρὸν πήγνυσιν: τὸ δὲ θερμὸν διαχέει, ἐν δὲ τῷ A ἊΝ / 4 -“ ‘\ A -“ πολλῷ καὶ ξηραίνει χρόνῳ: ὅκου δὲ τοῦ λιπαροῦ ξυνίῃ τι τούτοισι, θᾶσσον ἐκκαίει καὶ ξηραίνει: ὅκου Ν nv Ν lal 4 A A », A δὲ ἂν TO κολλῶδες Evvin TO ψυχρῷ ἄνευ τοῦ λιπα- ‘al > > 4 > , > Ν lal , pov, οὐκ ἐθέλει ἐκκαίεσθαι, ἀλλὰ τῷ χρόνῳ θερμαι- νόμενον πήγνυται. 136 FLESHES hollow: for as the cold in each case was heated, the part around the outside, being gluey, was baked through and became a tunic, the membrane around it, while the cold in the inside, not containing much that was fatty or gluey, melted completely and became liquid. In the same way the bladder too was formed: for when much cold was left behind, the part around the outside was warmed by the heat and became a tunic, a membrane, while the part in the inside, on being heated for a long time, dissolved and became liquid, since it contained nothing that was fatty or gluey, and what was around the outside became a tunic. In the case of the other hollow parts it happened in the same way: where there was more gluey material than fatty, a tunic, membrane, was formed, where there was more fatty than gluey, bones were formed. Concerning the bones the explanation is the same. Where fatty and cold material was present, but no gluey, it was burnt more quickly because it was fatty, and these were the hardest and solidest of the bones. But where fatty and gluey com- ponents were in equal proportions, the bones formed were porous.? These processes occur according to the following principles. Cold condenses, heat melts and, over a long period of time, also dries. Where any fat is present with other materials, heat burns it up and dries it very quickly; where, on the other hand, gluey material is present with cold but without fat, what is gluey refuses to be burnt up, but, on being heated for a time, condenses (i.e. into a membrane). 4T.e. a mixture of bone and membrane. ! Froben: ὑγροῦ V. 137 590 ΠΕΡῚ SAPKON 4. Ὁ δὲ ἐγκέφαλός ἐστι μητρόπολις τοῦ ψυχροῦ Ν A ie ~ Ἂς Ἂς A an Kal τοῦ κολλώδεος, TO δὲ θερμὸν τοῦ λιπαροῦ μητρόπολις: θερμαινόμενον γάρ, τὸ πρῶτον πάντων διαχεόμενον λιπαρὸν γίνεται: καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ὁ ἐγκέ- φαλος ὅτι ὀλίγιστον ἔχει τοῦ λιπαροῦ, Tov δὲ 4 “Ὁ > , > lal ε Ν. aA κολλώδεος πλεῖστον, οὐ δύναται ἐκκαυθῆναι ὑπὸ TOD θερμοῦ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ χιτῶνα μήνιγγα παχείην » Ν Ν Ἂν ’ 5 v2) e ων ἊΝ Ἂς ἔλαβε: περὶ δὲ τὴν μήνιγγα ὀστέα ὁκόσον τὸ θερμὸν ἐκράτησε, καὶ ἐν ὅσοισι τοῦ λιπαροῦ ἐνῆν. καὶ ὁ μυελὸς ὁ καλεόμενος νωτιαῖος καθήκει ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐγκε- » A ‘al A \ A φάλου: καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ τοῦ λιπαροῦ [ἢ τοῦ κολλώδεος] πολύ, ὥσπερ καὶ τῷ ἐγκεφάλῳ: διὰ τοῦτο οὐκ ἂν δικαίως καὶ αὐτῷ εἴη μυελὸς οὔνομα- > Ν “ ἴω ΕΣ al ε 5 nw + οὐ yap ὅμοιος τῷ ἄλλῳ μυελῷ, ὡς EV τοῖσιν ἄλλοι- σιν ὀστοῖσιν ἔνι: μοῦνος γὰρ μήνιγγας ἔχει, ὁ δὲ » 5 » ΄ Ν , | 7 » ἄλλος οὐκ ἔχει. τεκμήρια δὲ τούτων | σαφέα, εἴ τις 5 , 5 Ὁ“ 4 4 ἊΝ 7 Ν ἊΝ ἐθέλοι ὀπτᾶν νευρώδεά τε καὶ κολλώδεα, καὶ τὰ ἄλλα δέ: τὰ μὲν ἄλλα ταχὺ ὀπτᾶται, τὰ δὲ νευρώδεά τε καὶ κολλώδεα οὐκ ἐθέλει ὀπτᾶσθαι: ἐλάχιστον γὰρ ἔχει τοῦ λιπαροῦ: τὸ δὲ πιότατον καὶ λιπαρὸν τάχιστα ὀπτᾶται. 5. Τὰ δὲ σπλάγχνα ὧδέ μοι δοκέει ξυστῆναι: Ν Ν > A A ” / / ε Ν περὶ μὲν οὖν τῶν φλεβῶν εἴρηταί μοι πρότερον: ἡ δὲ ’ὔ Ν A , Ν lal ἴω A καρδίη πολὺ τοῦ κολλώδεος καὶ τοῦ ψυχροῦ ἔχει: καὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ θερμαινόμενον, κρέας ἐγένετο σκληρὸν καὶ γλίσχρον, καὶ μῆνιγξ περὶ αὐτήν, καὶ ἐκοιλώθη [οὐχ] ὥσπερ φλέβες: καί ἐστιν ἐπὶ τῆς 138 FLESHES 4. The brain is the metropolis* of the cold and gluey, and heat the metropolis of the fatty, since the first thing of all to melt, on being heated, becomes fat. Thus the brain, having the least fat but the most gluey material, cannot be burnt up by heat, but after a time engenders a tunic, the thick membrane (dura mater), and, around the mem- brane, bones, to the degree that heat gains mastery and any fat is present. The marrow called spinal extends down from the brain, and it, just like the brain, has little fat [or gluey material]. Thus, it does not rightly bear the name “marrow”, since it is not like the other marrow in the bones, it alone having a membrane, and they none. Proof of this difference would be obvious if you were to burn such cords, then something gluey, and then anything else. Whereas anything else is rapidly burnt through, the cords and whatever is gluey refuse to be burnt through because they have so little fat. And fat and what is very rich are quickest to burn. 5. The internal parts arise, in my opinion, as follows— about the vessels I have spoken above. The heart has much that is cold and gluey; as it was warmed by the heat, it became hard, tough flesh, and a membrane developed around it, and it was hollowed out [but not] like the 4 T.e. source, as the “mother-city” was the source of settlers in a Greek colony. b See chapter 3 above. ' Del. Deichgraeber. 2 Del. Ermerins. 139 592 ΠΕΡῚ YAPKON κεφαλῆς τῆς φλεβὸς τῆς κοιλοτάτης. δύο yap εἰσι A 4 > ‘\ tal 7 tal Ν 5, κοῖλαι φλέβες ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίης: τῇ μὲν οὔνομα 5 4 lal Ν ’ὔ ΄ Ἂν e ε 74 5 ’΄ ἀρτηρίη: τῇ δὲ κοίλη φλέψ, πρὸς ἡ ἡ καρδίη ἐστίν: Ν A + A Ne: OL ΝΠ ΠΕ ΄, καὶ πλεῖστον ἔχει τοῦ θερμοῦ ἡ καρδίη καὶ" ἡ κοίλη φλέψ, καὶ ταμιεύει τὸ πνεῦμα. πρὸς δὲ ταύταιν ταῖν φλεβοῖν ἄλλαι κατὰ τὸ σῶμα: ἡ δὲ κοιλοτάτη φλέψ, Ν e ε ΄ Ἂν a ΄ ε ΄ ΄ πρὸς ἡ ἡ καρδίη, διὰ τῆς κοιλίης ἁπάσης διήκει καὶ διὰ τῶν φρενῶν, καὶ σχίζεται ἐς ἑκάτερον τῶν lal Ν 5 Ν A > fee ΄ Ν 3 oh > / νεφρῶν: καὶ ἐπὶ TH ὀσφύϊ σχίζεται, καὶ ἀΐσσει ἐπί Ἂς 5 Ν > ε ’ὔὕ » 5 Ν Ἂν 5, τε τὰ ἄλλα καὶ ἐς ἑκάτερον σκέλος, ἀτὰρ καὶ ἄνωθεν a“ ’ὔ’ Ν A 5 7, Ἂν XN > Ν ’΄ ΩΝ ’ τῆς καρδίης πρὸς TO αὐχένι, TA μὲν ἐπὶ δεξιά, τὰ ὃ ΠΩ ΄ ‘ , SiN Ν \ ” \ ἐπ᾽ ἀριστερά: Kal τότε ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ἄγει καὶ 5 A 4 / c / ΑΨ. Ἂς Ἂν ἐν τοῖς κροτάφοισι σχίζεται ἑκατέρη: ἔστι δὲ καὶ > A > tal Ἂς uA XN / Ri Ἂν ἀριθμῷ εἰπεῖν τὰς φλέβας τὰς μεγίστας: ἑνὶ δὲ / > ‘\ tal 7 Ν \ > Ἂς la) > 4 λόγῳ ἀπὸ τῆς κοίλης φλεβὸς Kai ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρτηρίης ΕΒ “2 5 » 5 Ν Ἂς A Ἂν; ἴω ἄλλαι φλέβες ἐσχισμέναι εἰσὶ κατὰ πᾶν τὸ σῶμα: κοιλόταται δὲ αἱ πρὸς τῇ καρδίῃ καὶ τῷ αὐχένι καὶ ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ καὶ κάτωθεν τῆς καρδίης μέχρι τῶν ἰσχίων. 6. Καὶ τὸ θερμὸν πλεῖστον ἔνι ἐν τῇσι φλεψὶ καὶ τῇ καρδίῃ, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο πνεῦμα ἡ καρδίη ἔχει θερμὴ ἐοῦσα μάλιστα τῶν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ. ῥηΐδιον δὲ τοῦτο καταμαθεῖν, ὅτι θερμόν ἐστι τὸ πνεῦμα: ἡ , Ν ες A 4 / 322N Ν Ἂς καρδίη καὶ αἱ κοῖλαι φλέβες κινέονται αἰεὶ [καὶ τὸ ΄ tal 5 > lal / Ν Ἂν θερμότατον πλεῖστον ἔνι ἐν τῇσι φλεψίν: καὶ διὰ τοῦτο πνεῦμα ἡ καρδίη ἔχει θερμὴ ἐοῦσα μάλιστα ' Deichgraeber: ἢ V. 140 FLESHES vessels. The heart is at the head of the hollowest vessel (vena cavissima); for two hollow vessels come out of it: one has the name artery, the other hollow vessel (vena cava), and it is against this that the heart sits. The heart and the hollow vessel have the most heat, and control the breath. Attached to these two vessels are others to the body. The hollowest vessel, against which the heart sits, traverses the whole cavity and the diaphragm, and branches to each of the kidneys; it also branches at the loins, and proceeds to the other parts, and to each leg. Furthermore, above the heart in the region of the throat there are branches to the right and to the left. Then one of these on each side goes to the head, and branches at the temples. It is possible to enumerate the largest ves- sels: in a word, from the hollow vessel and the artery the other vessels branch off through the whole body; the most capacious ones are those at the heart and throat and in the head, and below the heart as far down as the hips. 6. The greatest amount of heat is in the vessels and heart, and for this reason the heart, being the hottest part in a person, holds the breath, which is very easy to under- stand, given that the breath is ποῖ. The heart and the hol- low vessels are in constant movement [and the greatest amount of heat is mostly in the vessels, and for this reason the heart, being the hottest part in a person, holds the 4 Cf. Nature of the Child 12. 141 594 ΠΕΡῚ ΣΑΡΚΩΝ ! ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἄλλως γνῶναι: ἴω > A 5 , τῶν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ]. “ + 4 ΄ > > , ς ἊΝ 5, ἊΝ πῦρ εἴ τις θέλει καίειν ἐν οἰκήματι ὁκόταν ἄνεμος μὴ 5 4 ἊΝ 7A Ν Ν A Ν Ν εἰσπνέῃ, φλὸξ κινέεται τοτὲ μὲν μᾶλλον, τοτὲ δὲ a ζ Ἂς Ν / ἧσσον: καὶ λυχνὸς" καιόμενος TOV αὐτὸν τρόπον κινέεται, τοτὲ μὲν μᾶλλον, τοτὲ δὲ ἧσσον, ἀνέμου 5 A a , οὐδενὸς KLVEOVTOS, OVTWA καὶ ἡμεῖς οἷοί TE ἐσμεν lal lal XN γινώσκειν πνέοντα: καὶ τροφή ἐστι τῷ θερμῷ τὸ Ν ὮΝ a ψυχρόν. τὸ δὲ παιδίον ἐν TH γαστρὶ συνέχον τὰ χεί- A / A Ν ΔΘ λεα μύζει ἐκ τῶν μητρέων τῆς μητρὸς καὶ ἕλκει τήν lal lal / 5 lal ‘A Te τροφὴν Kal TO πνεῦμα TH καρδίῃ εἴσω: τοῦτο yap θερμότατόν ἐστιν ἐν τῷ παιδίῳ, ὅταν περ ἡ μήτηρ ΄ \ ἊΝ ἴω Μἷ ’΄ ἊΣ wp ἀναπνέῃ: τούτῳ δὲ Kal τῷ ἄλλῳ σώματι THY κίνησιν » \ ἊΝ Ν A A A > / παρέχει τὸ θερμὸν καὶ Tots ἄλλοις πᾶσιν. εἰ δέ τις ἐρωτοίη πῶς τοῦτο OLOE τις, OTL ἐν τῇ μήτρῃ τὸ παι- ᾽ὔ΄ Ὁ ἊΝ , 4 5 Lal + > 4 dtov ἕλκει καὶ μύζει, τάδε αὐτῷ ἔστιν ἀποκρίνασθαι: lal Ν κόπρον ἔχον | ἐν τοῖσιν ἐντέροισιν γίνεται, καὶ ἀπο- πατέει ἐπειδὰν γένηται τάχιστα, καὶ οἱ ἄνθρωποι ΓΝ ἊΣ ΄ ἊΝ καὶ τὰ πρόβατα: καίτοι οὐκ ἂν εἶχε κόπρον, εἰ μὴ ἐν a ΄ ” 2Q5 HN ΄ \ \ τῇσι μήτρῃσιν ἔμυζεν, οὐδ᾽ av θηλάζειν τὸν μασθὸν ͵ὔ ἫΝ ἮΝ tal , ἠπίστατο γεννώμενον αὐτίκα, EL μὴ καὶ EV TH μήτρῃ A A A , \ ἔμυζε. καὶ περὶ μὲν τῆς κινήσιος τῆς καρδίης καὶ a A “ » τῶν φλεβῶν οὕτως ἔχει. Ξ , Ξ 7. Ὁ δὲ πνεύμων πρὸς τῇ καρδίῃ ἐγένετο ὧδε: “- ε lal ε / o ΄ ε ᾽ὕ τοῦ ὑγροῦ ὁκόσον ἣν κολλωδέστατον, ἡ καρδίη ' Del. Potter. ? Froben: αὐχμὸς V. FLESHES breath].4 The origin of this movement can also be under- stood from another example: if you light a fire inside a room when no wind is blowing in, the flame moves, some- times more, sometimes less. Also a lighted lamp moves in the same way, sometimes more, sometimes less, although no wind is stirring that we are able to perceive. And we know that the nourishment of hot is cold. For example the fetus in the belly continually sucks with its lips from the uterus of the mother and draws nourishment and breath to its heart inside, for this breath is hottest in the fetus just at the time that the mother is inspiring.° To this (the fetus’s heart) and to the rest of the body, too, heat gives movement, and to all other things. If anyone asks you how you know that the fetus draws and sucks in the uterus, you may reply as follows. Both humans and ani- mals have faeces in their intestines at the time of birth, and immediately at birth pass stools—but there would be no faeces, if the fetus did not suck in the uterus. Nor would a baby know how to suck from the breast immedi- ately at birth, if it did not also suck in the uterus. So it is with the movement of the heart and vessels. 7. The lung arose next to the heart as follows. The heart, warming that part of the moisture that was most 31 do not find the repetitiousness of this passage merely “trés typique de la maniére archaique” (Joly ad loc.), but suspect some sort of textual disturbance. b The connection of thought between this and the preceding sentence is that the cold, which is “the nourishment of the hot”, is drawn in from the outside by the hot and thus gives rise to movement. © Presumably the model here is that of a fireplace with the damper open. 143 596 ΠΕΡῚ 2APKON , ἊΝ 5 ΄ -“ 5 Ἂς ἊΝ θερμαίνουσα ταχὺ ἐξήρανεν ὅκωσπερ ἀφρὸν καὶ > 4 A \ 4 Ν 5 5 A ἐποίησε σηραγγῶδες, Kat φλέβια πολλὰ ἐν αὐτῷ. ἊΝ Ν la) > »Ἥ9 ΝΥ , e 4 > lal διὰ δὲ τοῦτο ἐποίησε TA φλέβια: ὁκόσον ἐν τῷ κολ- λώδει ἐνῆν ψυχρόν, τοῦτο μὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ διε- 4 Ν 5 » e / ἊΝ Ν 9, Ν lal , τάκη Kal ἐγένετο ὑγρόν: TO δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ κολλώδεος αὐτοῦ! 6 χιτών. Ν Ν - - ΄ Ν “ lal ay 8. To δὲ ἧπαρ ὧδε ξυνέστη: ξὺν TO θερμῷ πολὺ aA e A 5 Ν δ΄ “ Sis Ν cal τοῦ ὑγροῦ ἀπολειφθὲν ἄνευ τοῦ κολλώδεος καὶ τοῦ λιπαροῦ, ἐκράτησε τὸ ψυχρὸν τοῦ θερμοῦ, καὶ 5 ἊΨ 4 4 / ¢ 4 , ἐπάγη. τεκμήριον δέ μοι τόδε: ὁκόταν σφάξῃ τις ἱερεῖον, τέως μὲν ἂν θερμὸν ἢ, ὑγρόν ἐστι τὸ αἷμα: > ἧς Ν lal > “4 a / 3 Ν ων ἐπειδὰν δὲ ψυχθῇ, ἐπάγη: ἣν δέ τις αὐτὸ τινάσσῃ, > / ες ἊΝ OweeZ, > Ν Ν ΄ οὐ πήγνυται: αἱ yap tvés εἰσι ψυχραὶ καὶ κολλώδεες. ε δὲ Ν ΄ ὃ Ν ἘΞ law) Ν 9. Ὁ δὲ σπλὴν συνέστη ὧδε: σὺν τῷ ὑγρῷ“ καὶ κολλώδει ἐκάετο" θερμοῦ πλείστον, τοῦ δὲ ψυχροῦ ἐλάχιστον, τοσοῦτον μόνον ὁκόσον πῆξαι τὸ κολλῶ- δὲς αὐτό, ὅ εἰσιν αἱ ἶνες αἱ ἐνοῦσαι ἐν τῷ σπληνί: ἊΝ Ν Ν > , Sa > ε Ἂν Ν καὶ διὰ τὰς ἶνας ταύτας μαλακός ἐστιν ὁ σπλὴν καὶ ἰνώδες. Oi δὲ νεφροὶ ξυνέστησαν ὧδε: ὀλίγον τοῦ κολλώ- δεος, τοῦ ὑγροῦ! πλεῖστον | τοῦ ψυχροῦ πλεῖστον, καὶ ἐπάγη ὑπὸ τούτου, καὶ ἐγένετο σκληρότατον τὸ σπλάγχνον καὶ ἥκιστα ἐρυθρόν, ὅτι οὐ πολὺ τοῦ θερμοῦ ξυνέστη. e Ν 3 Ν ’ὔὕ Ν ἊΝ A lal Ν Ἂν O δὲ αὐτὸς λόγος καὶ περὶ τῶν σαρκῶν: τὸ μὲν ! Ermerins: αὐτὸς V. 2 Ermerins: θερμῷ V. 144 FLESHES gluey, quickly dried it out into a kind of foam, making it porous and filling it with many small vessels. This is how the heart formed the small vessels: any cold that was in the gluey material was melted by its heat and became liquid, while from the gluey part itself the membrane of the vessel arose.# 8. The liver was formed as follows. Where much moisture was left behind together with heat and in the absence of anything gluey or fatty, cold gained mastery over the heat, and the moisture congealed. This is my proof. When you slaughter a sacrificial animal, as long as its blood remains warm it is liquid, but when it becomes cold, it congeals. If, however, you shake it, the blood does not solidify, for its fibres are cold and giuey. 9. The spleen was formed as follows. With what was moist and gluey was kindled very much heat, and very little cold, just the right amount to condense the gluey material itself,> which constitutes the fibers that are in the spleen; it is because of these fibres that the spleen is soft and stringy. The kidneys were formed as follows. Little gluey material, a great amount of moist material, a great amount of cold: the viscus congealed on account of this, and became the toughest and the least red, since not much heat was present. About muscles the explanation is the same: cold 4 Cf. chapter 3 above. > For the condensing effect of heat on gluey material see chapter 3 fin. above. 3 Potter: καὶ τοῦ V. 4 Potter: θερμοῦ V. 145 598 ΠΕΡῚ 2APKON Ν », ἊΝ , Ἂν > ’ 4 Ἂς ψυχρὸν ἔστησε καὶ ξυνέπηξε καὶ ἐποίησε σάρκα, τὸ ἊΝ A A > 4 > \ tal , δὲ κολλῶδες τρῶγλαι ἐγένοντο: ἐν δὲ τῇσι τρώγλῃσι 7 Ἂ ε Ν “ Ν > inl Ἂν a ταύτῃσι TO ὑγρὸν ὥσπερ καὶ ἐν τῇσι φλεψὶ τῇσι μεγάλῃσιν. X\ ἊΝ Ν 5 ἊΝ A 4 lal A lal To δὲ θερμὸν ἐν παντὶ τῷ σώματι, πλεῖστον δὲ TO σώματι: καὶ τοῦ ψυχροῦ πολὺ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ: τοσοῦτο χὰ 5 ia) A ε ’ 4 A Ν ε / δέ ἐστι τοῦ ψυχροῦ ὁκόσον δύναται πῆξαι TO ὑγρόν" ἀλλὰ νενίκηται, ὥστε διακέχυται ὑπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ. ε \ > 4 lal ε PS) d 4 > » Η δὲ ἀπόδειξις τοῦ ὑγροῦ ὅτι θερμόν ἐστιν, εἴ τις ἐθέλοι τάμνειν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τοῦ σώματος, ὅκου il - θ ΄ Ν ΄ Ν ΩΝ θ αἷμα θερμὸν, Kal τεως μεν αν θερ- ἐθέλοι, ῥεύσεται \ > ς Ν », > Ν Ν a G / a μὸν ἢ, ὑγρὸν ἔσται: ἐπειδὰν δὲ ψυχθῇ ὑπό TE τοῦ ἐνεόντος ψυχροῦ καὶ τοῦ ἐκτός, ἐγένετο δέρμα καὶ ¢ 4 Ἂν " 3 Ν A Ν id 27 > 4 ὑμήν, καὶ εἴ τις ἀφελὼν τοῦτο TO δέρμα ἐάσειεν ὀλί- 4 + + / / > /, you χρόνου, ὄψεται ἄλλο δέρμα γινόμενον: εἰ δέ τις A SNy 3 A ” , ΄ ὅν oN \ A τοῦτο αἰεὶ ἀφαιρεῖ, ἄλλο δέρμα γίνοιτ᾽ ἂν πρὸς τοῦ A ΄ δὲ Ψ“ ΄ὔ ” “ Crees ψυχροῦ. τούτου δὲ εἵνεκα πλείω ἔλεξα, ὅκως" ἀπο- δείξω ὅτι τὸ ἔσχατον τοῦ σώματος πρὸς τοῦ ἠέρος > 7 4 / / ε ἊΝ A Lal Ν ἀναγκαίως ἔχει δέρμα γενέσθαι ὑπὸ τοῦ ψυχροῦ καὶ τῶν πνευμάτων προσβαλλόντων. 10. Τὰ δ᾽ ἄρθρα ὧδε ἐγένετο: ὅτε τὰ ὀστέα ξυνί- στατο, ὁκόσα μὲν αὐτῶν λιπαρὰ ἦν, τάχιστα ἐξε- 4 “ ,’ 4 > A / καύθη, ὥσπερ πρόσθεν λέλεκται EV τῷ προτέρῳ λόγῳ: ὁκόσον δ᾽ αὐτῶν κολλῶδες ἦν, τοῦτο δὲ οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἐκκαυθῆναι, ἀλλὰ μεταξὺ ἀπολειφθὲν τοῦ καιομένου <Kai>? ξηραινομένου ὑπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ νεῦρα καὶ σίαλον ἐγένετο: τὸ δὲ σίαϊλον, ὁκόσον τοῦ κολλώδεος ὑγρότατον ἣν, τόδε θερμαινόμενον παχύ- 146 FLESHES brought what was moist to a stand-still, congealed it, and turned it into muscle, while what was gluey formed canals; in these canals there is moisture just as in the large vessels. There is heat in the whole body, in fact it constitutes the greatest part in the body; in the moisture of the body, again, there is much cold; in fact so much cold that it could congeal this moisture, if it were not overwhelmed and so liquified by the whole body’s heat. Demonstration that the moist part in the body is kept hot. If someone should make a cut in a person's body any- where he wishes, hot blood will flow out and, as long as it is hot, it will be liquid. But when this blood is cooled by the internal cold and the external cold, a skin or mem- brane forms; if you remove this and let a little time pass, another skin will be seen to form; and if you keep on removing this, still another skin will form, because of the effect of the cold. I have dilated on this point in order to show that at the outer confines of the body next the air a skin must of necessity arise on account of the cold and of the winds that strike it. 10. The joints came into being as follows. When bones arose what was fat in them was very rapidly burnt up, as has been said above (ch. 3); what was gluey could not be burnt up, but, being left behind between what was burnt up and dried by the heat, became cords and fluid. As to the fluid, the most liquid part of what was gluey, this ! Schwyzer: ῥεύσει Te V. ? Ermerins: τέως V. 3 Zwinger in margin after Calvus’ perustum desiccatumque. 147 600 ΠΕΡῚ ΣΑΡΚΩΝ τερον ἐγένετο ὑγρὸν ἐόν: καὶ ἀπὸ τούτου σίαλον ἐγέ- νετο. 11. Οἱ δὲ ὄνυχες ἀπὸ τούτου ἐγένοντο τοῦ κολλώ- δεος: ἀπὸ γὰρ τῶν ὀστέων καὶ τῶν ἄρθρων αἰεὶ τὸ ὑγρότατον αὐτοῦ ἀπιὸν κολλώδεος γίνεται ἀπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ ξηραινόμενον καὶ ἐξαναινόμενον θύραζε ὄνυχες. 12. Οἱ δὲ ὀδόντες [ὕστερον] " γίνονται διὰ τόδε: ἀπὸ τῶν ὀστέων τῶν ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ καὶ ταῖν γνάθοιν ἡ αὔξησις γίνεται: τοῦ κολλώδεος <Kai>? τοῦ λιπα- pov τὸ ἐνεὸν ὑπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ ξηραινόμενον ἐκκαίε- ται, καὶ γίνονται ὀδόντες σκληρότεροι τῶν ἄλλων ὀστέων, ὅτι οὐκ ἔνεστι τοῦ ψυχροῦ. καὶ οἱ μὲν πρῶτοι ὀδόντες φύονται ἀπὸ τῆς διαίτης τῆς ἐν τῇ μήτρῃ, καὶ, ἐπὴν γένηται, ἀπὸ τοῦ γάλακτος θηλά- ζοντι τῷ παιδίῳ: ἐπειδὰν δὲ οὗτοι ἐκπέσωσιν ἀπὸ τῶν σιτίων καὶ τῶν ποτῶν: ἐκπίπτουσι δὲ ἐπειδὰν ἑπτὰ ἔτεα ἔῃ τῆς πρώτης τροφῆς: ἔστι δὲ καὶ οἷς πρότερον, ἣν ἀπὸ νοσερῆς τροφῆς φυέωσι: τοῖσι δὲ πλείστοισιν, ἐπειδὰν ἑπτὰ ἔτεα γένηται: οἱ δὲ μετα- φυέοντες συγκαταγηράσκουσιν, ἢν μὴ ὑπὸ νόσου διαφθαρῶσι. 13. Διὰ δὲ τοῦτο φύονται οἱ ὀδόντες ὕστερον τῶν ἄλλων: ἐν τῇ | γνάθῳ φλέβες εἰσὶ καὶ ἐκ τῆς κάτω κοιλίης" μούνοισι τῶν ὀστέων αὗται τὴν τροφὴν ΄ vm ΄ 6 Ν δὲ » ΄, ΄ »” παρέχουσι [τῷ ὀστέῳ]: τὰ δὲ ὀστέα τοιαύτην αὔξη- ' Potter: κολλῶδες V: del. Deichgraeber, Joly. 148 FLESHES thickened on being heated, but still remained liquid; this is the origin of the joint fluid. 11. The nails too arose from this gluey material; for the most liquid part of the gluey material which is contin- ually being discharged from the bones and joints is dried up and desiccated by heat to become nails at the exterior. 12. The teeth came into being for the following rea- son. The teeth grow out of the bones of the skull and jaws, when what is gluey and fatty in them is dried and burnt up by the heat. Teeth are harder than other bones because they contain no cold. The primary teeth take their growth from the regimen in the uterus,* and after birth from milk, in the child at the breast; when these have fallen out, the permanent teeth take their growth from foods and drinks. The primary teeth fall out when there have been seven years of the first regimen; in some cases this occurs earlier, if the children are being fed a regimen that is sickly—but in most cases when they are seven years old. The teeth that grow in afterwards grow old with the person, unless they are lost as the result of disease. 13. Teeth are formed later than the other bones for the following reason. In the jaws there are vessels which provide only them among bones with nourishment from the lower cavity. Now bones increase, as do all other 4 Cf. chapter 6 above. ? Del. Deichgraeber. 3 Zwinger in margin. 4 Littré after Coray: ἐπὶ τὰ V. 5 Foes in note 33 after Comarius’ ex inferno ventre: ἐν τῇ — κοιλίῃ V. 6 Del. Ermerins. 149 602 ΠΕΡῚ 2APKON «ες As 4 > A Ν 5 Ν ΨΚ 4 σιν ὁποῖά πέρ ἐστι, Kal τὰ ἄλλα δὲ πάντα τοιαύτην > , 5, ¢ lal > 4 > Ν ἊΝ c ἀποδίδωσιν αὔξησιν, ὁποῖα αὐτά ἐστιν: Kal yap αἱ a A a φλέβες αἱ ἐκ τῆς νηδύος <Kai>! τῶν ἐντέρων, εἰς ἃ / ἊΝ 4 ΩΝ Ἂν 4 > Ν lal συλλέγεται τὰ σιτία Kal τὰ ποτά, ἐπειδὰν θερμανθῇ a © 4 ταῦτα, ἕλκουσι TO λεπτότατον καὶ TO ὑγρότατον" ἊΝ A τὸ δὲ παχύτατον αὐτοῦ καταλείπεται, καὶ γίνεται κόπρος ἐν τοῖσιν ἐντέροισι τοῖσι κάτω: τὸ δὲ λεπτό- e 4 -“ 5 “A 4 Ἂς lal τατον at φλέβες ἕλκουσιν ἐκ τῆς νηδύος Kal τῶν ἐντέρων τῶν ἄνωθεν τῆς νήστιος, θερμαινομένων τῶν σιτίων: ἐπὴν δὲ περήσῃ τὴν νῆστιν ἐς τὰ κάτω Μἤ / Ἂς “2 > 4 c Ν ΝΥ ἔντερα, ξυνεστράφη καὶ κόπρος ἐγένετο: ἡ δὲ τροφὴ ἐπειδὰν ἀφίκηται ἐς ἕκαστον, τοιαύτην ἀπέδωκε τὴν ἰδέην ἑκάστου ὁκοία περ ἦν: ἀρδόμενα γὰρ ὑπὸ τῆς tal + 4 Ἂς Ἂς - Ν Ν τροφῆς αὔξεται ἕκαστα, τὸ θερμὸν καὶ τὸ ψυχρὸν Ν. Ν A Ἂν ὯΝ SS ἊΝ \ Ἂς ἊΝ Ἄν. καὶ τὸ κολλῶδες καὶ τὸ λιπαρὸν καὶ τὸ γλυκὺ καὶ τὸ ἊΝ Ν Ἂν > / ἊΝ Ἂν A 4 ε 4 πικρὸν καὶ τὰ ὀστέα Kal τὰ ἄλλα ξύμπαντα ὁκόσα ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἔνι. Ν A “ e 9. ie 4 5, / Διὰ τοῦτο ὕστερον οἱ ὀδόντες φύονται: εἴρηται δέ © nw ἴω 4 μοι καὶ πρότερον ὅτι μοῦναι τῶν ὀστέων αἱ γνάθοι φλέϊβας ἔχουσιν αὐταὶ ἐν ἑωυταῖσι: καὶ διὰ τοῦτο Ν (<4 4 a > Ἂς eA > / 'ν τροφὴ ἕλκεται πλέον ἢ ἐς τὰ ἄλλα ὀστέα. καὶ 4 ὩΣ Ἂν 4 Ν 3 4 ἣν πλέονα τὴν τροφὴν ἔχοντα καὶ ἀθροωτέρην τὴν 3, lal , ἐπιρροήν, ἀποτίκτει αὔξησιν αὐτὰ ad’ ἑαυτῶν τοιαύ- την οἷά πέρ ἐστιν αὐτά, τέως ἄν περ καὶ ἄνθρωπος “ 9 > ΄ > ΄ δὲ yf , > (ὃ ὅλος" αὐξάνηται. αὐξάνεται δὲ ἐπὴν γένηται ἐπίδη- Ν hos: ἐπίδηλος δὲ μάλιστα γίνεται ἀπὸ ἑπταετέος μέχρι τεσσαρεσκαιδεκαετέος, καὶ ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ a 4 A > / 4 Ν », οἵ τε μέγιστοι τῶν ὀδόντων φύονται καὶ ἄλλοι 150 FLESHES parts, by adding what is similar to their own particular quality. For when food and drink collect in the stomach and intestines, and are heated, the vessels arising there draw off the finest and moistest part, leaving the thickest part behind, which turns to faeces in the lower intestines. As the foods are heated, then, these vessels draw off the finest part from the stomach and the upper intestines— the part above the jejunum—and as the foods pass through the jejunum into the lower intestines, they solid- ify and become faeces. When the nourishment arrives, it gives up the particular quality corresponding to each part, for it is by being watered by this nourishment that every part increases, the hot, the cold, the gluey, the fat, the sweet, the bitter, the bones, and all the other parts that are in a person. Here is why teeth are formed at a later time. I men- tioned above that the jaws alone of the bones have vessels inside themselves, and this is why more nourishment is drawn to them than to other bones. Since they have more nourishment coming in a more massive afflux, they con- tinue to increase by adding what is similar to their own particular quality, until a person has reached adulthood. A person reaches adulthood when he has acquired his definitive form, and this generally occurs between seven and fourteen years of age. In that time all the teeth, 1 Zwinger in margin after Carnarius’ ac. 2 Joly: οὖλος V. 151 604 ΠΕΡῚ SAPKON πάντες, ἐπὴν ἐκπέσωσιν οἱ ἐγένοντο ἀπὸ τροφῆς τῆς 3 a / > 4 Ν \ > Ἂς 4 ἐπ ἐν τῇ μήτρῃ. αὐξάνεται δὲ καὶ ἐς τὴν τρίτην ἑβδο- (ὃ > @ , ΄ SNe! ΄ ΄ pada, ἐν ἡ νεηνίσκος γίνεται, «καὶ! μέχρι τεσσά- ἊΝ 7 e γα Ἂς 5 tal ’ ἊΝ ρων καὶ πέντε ἑβδομάδων: καὶ ἐν τῇ τετάρτῃ δὲ ἑβδομάδι ὀδόντες φύονται δύο τοῖσι πολλοῖσι τῶν ἀνθρώπων, οὗτοι καλέονται σωφρονιστῆρες. 14. Αἱ δὲ τρίχες φύονται ὧδε: ὀστέα εἰσὶ καὶ ic 3, © ΄ ἐγκέφαλος, ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἡ τοιαύτη αὔξησις, ὅτι τὸ πέριξ κολλῶδες,2 ὅπωσπερ τοῖσι νεύροισι, καὶ τοῦ λιπαροῦ » ww nw ἴω \ οὐκ ἔνεστιν: εἰ yap ἐνῆν τοῦ λιπαροῦ, ἐξεκαίετο ἂν ἐκ τοῦ θερμοῦ. τάχα δὲ θαυμάσειεν ἂν τις ὅτι καὶ ἐν τῇσι μασχάλῃσι καὶ ἐν τῷ ἐπισίῳ τρίχες πολλαὶ καὶ ἐν τῷ σώματι παντί εἰσιν: WUTOS λόγος περὶ τούτου" ὅπου τυγχάνει τοῦ σώματος τὸ κολλῶδες ὄν, ἐνταῦθα αἱ τρίχες γίνονται ὑπὸ τοῦ θερμοῦ. 15. ᾿Ακούει δὲ διὰ τόδε: τὰ τρήματα τῶν οὐάτων προσήκει πρὸς ὀστέον σκληρόν τε καὶ ξηρὸν ὅμοιον fe A Ν 4 Ν 5 4 / λίθῳ. τοῦτο δὲ πέφυκε πρὸς ὀστέον κοίλωσις , e Ν ’ὔ > , ἊΝ Ν σηραγγώδης: οἱ δὲ ψόφοι ἀπερείδονται πρὸς τὸ fA Ἂν ἊΝ 5 L? Ν an > A Ν Lal σκληρόν: τὸ δὲ ὀστέον τὸ κοῖλον ἐπηχεῖ διὰ τοῦ A ἊΝ Ν 4 ΩΝ Ν A > A Ν A σκληροῦ: τὸ δὲ δέρμα τὸ πρὸς TH ἀκοῇ πρὸς TO ὀστέῳ τῷ σκληρῷ λεπτόν ἐστιν ὥσπερ ἁράχνιον, 4 A 5 / / ἊΣ ‘\ ξηρότατον τοῦ ἄλλου δέρματος. τεκμήρια δὲ πολλὰ | ὅτι τὸ Enporatov ἠχεῖ μάλιστα: ὅταν δὲ μέγιστον / a ἠχήσῃ, τότε μάλιστα ἀκούομεν. καί εἰσί τινες OL ἔλεξαν φύσιν ξυγγράφοντες ὅτι ὁ ἐγκέφαλός ἐστιν ὁ ! Potter. 2 Ermerins: τοῦ — κολλώδεος V. 152 FLESHES including the largest, are formed, once those that came into being from the nourishment in the uterus have fallen out. He continues to grow into the third seven-year period, in which he becomes a young man, and even until the fourth and fifth seven-year periods. In the fourth seven-year period two more teeth are formed in many persons, and these are called the wisdom teeth. 14. Hair grows as follows.? It is the bones and the brain from which this growth occurs, since their exterior is gluey—just as it is in cords—and lacks fat, for if any fat were present, it would be burnt out by the heat. You may perhaps wonder that there is much hair in the axillae and on the pubis, and in fact over the whole body. The same explanation holds there: in any part of the body where anything gluey happens to be present, there hair occurs because of the effect of heat. 15. Hearing occurs for the following reason. The openings of the ears lead to a bone that is hard and dry like a stone, and besides there is a cavernous hollow next the bone. Sounds are directed towards this hardness, and through its hardness the hollow bone resounds. The skin in the ear next the hard bone is thin like a spider’s web, and drier than other skin. There are many proofs that what is driest echoes best; and when a thing echoes best, we hear best. There are some writers on nature who have 4 Cf. Glands chapters 4 and 10. bCf. chapter 4 above. 153 ΠΕΡῚ ΣΑΡΚΩΝ 5 ΄ A δὲ > a , 1 SEZ, Ἂν ε ἠχέων: τοῦτο δὲ οὐκ ἂν γένοιτο" αὐτός TE γὰρ ὁ 5 / Ε ’ > Ἂς A Ν 5 , > ἐγκέφαλος ὑγρός ἐστι, Kal μῆνιγξ περὶ αὐτόν ἐστιν ὑγρὴ καὶ παχείη, καὶ περὶ τὴν μήνιγγα ὀστέα: οὐδὲν = A ε A > A > \ ΄ \ N- pis ee οὖν TOV ὑγρῶν ἠχεῖ, ἀλλὰ ξηρά: τὰ δὲ ἠχέοντα ἀκοὴν ποιεῖ. 16. Ὀσφραίνεται δ᾽ ὁ ἐγκέφαλος ὑγρὸς ἐὼν τῶν “ > 4 “ Ἂς 5 ἮΝ Ν lal Sef. Ν “ ξηρῶν αὐτός, ἕλκων τὴν ὀδμὴν ξὺν τῷ ἠέρι διὰ τῶν βρογχίων ξηρῶν ἐόντων: προήκει γὰρ ὁ ἐγκέφαλος τῆς ῥινὸς ἐς τὰ κοῖλα: καὶ ταύτῃ αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐπίπροσθεν «οὔτε κρέας οὔτε!" ὀστέον οὐδέν, ἀλλὰ χονδρίον μαλακὸν ὅκως περ σπόγγος [οὔτε κρέας 9 Ne, Ν Ν > Ν A “ καὶ ὅταν μὲν ξηρὰ H τὰ κοῖλα τῆς + > 4 οὔτε ὀστέον]. ς , 5 ἴω ἴω 4 > Ν ι lal > ῥινός, ὀσμᾶσθαι τῶν Enpotépwv αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ἀκρι- βέστερός ἐστιν: ὕδατος γὰρ οὐκ ὀδμᾶται: ὑγρότερον γάρ ἐστι τοῦ ἐγκεφάλου, ἐὰν μὴ σαπῇ: σηπόμενον γὰρ τὸ ὕδωρ παχύτερον γίνεται καὶ τὰ ἄλλα πάντα" {x , Ἂν ε ᾽ὔ ε ca > ’ > / ὁκόταν δὲ ὑγρανθέωσιν at ῥῖνες, ov δύναται ὀσφραί- νεσθαι: οὐ γὰρ τὸν ἠέρα ἕλκει αὐτὸς πρὸς ἑωυτόν. 4 Ἂν Ἂν « > 4 ε 5 ᾽ὔ ~ ταύτῃ δὲ καὶ ὅταν ἀποτήκῃ ὁ ἐγκέφαλος πλεῖστον > ἊΝ > ᾿ ε A > Ἂν ε ’ὔ ‘\ ΝΣ ’ αὐτὸς ad’ ἑωυτοῦ ἐς τὴν ὑπερῴην καὶ τὴν φάρυγγα καὶ τὸν πνεύμονα καὶ ἐς τὴν ἄλλην κοιλίην, γινώ- σκουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι καί φασι καταρρέειν ἐκ τῆς A J Ἂν Ν > Ἂν ἂψ, a“ , κεφαλῆς: καταρρέει δὲ Kal ἐς τὸ ἄλλο σῶμα: καί ἐστι τροφὴ" τῷ θερμῷ. 17. Ὁρῇ δὲ διὰ τοῦτο: ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐγκεφάλου τῆς μήνιγγος φλὲψ καθήκει ἐς τὸν ὀφθαλμὸν διὰ τοῦ > / ε 4 Ν ’ὔ Lal al > Ἂς Lal ὀστέου ἑκάτερον: διὰ TavTaw ταῖν φλεβοῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐγκεφάλου διηθέεται τὸ λεπτότατον τοῦ κολλωδεσ- 154 FLESHES said that it is the brain which echoes, but this cannot be so: for the brain itself is moist, and the membrane around it is moist and thick, and around the membrane there are bones: now nothing moist echoes, but rather what is dry, and it is what echoes that gives rise to hearing. 16. The brain, being itself moist, perceives the smell of dry things, by drawing the odour along with air through the bronchial tubes which are dry; for the brain extends towards the hollows of the nose, and at that point there is no flesh or bone in the way, but soft cartilage like a sponge. When the hollows of the nose are dry, the per- ception of the smell of drier things is more acute. The brain does not perceive the smell of water, since water is moister than the brain, unless the water is putrefying—on putrefying, of course, water becomes thicker, as does everything else. When the nostrils become moist, the brain loses its sense of smell, since it cannot draw any air to itself. Also, when the brain melts off copious material from itself along that same path to the palate, throat, lung and the rest of the cavity, people recognize this, and say that there is a catarrh from the head; there is a catarrh to the rest of the body, too, and this provides nourishment for heat. 17. Seeing occurs because of the following. From the membrane of the brain a vessel descends into the eye through the bone on each side. Through these two ves- sels the finest of the gluey part filters from the brain, and ! Deichgraeber: -ηται V. ? Deichgraeber. 3 Heidel: τροπὴ V. 155 606 608 ΠΕΡῚ ΣΑΡΚΩΝ 4 Ν Ν lal > AN ἫΝ ε Ν »" / τάτου: καὶ διὰ τοῦτο αὐτὸ περὶ ἑωυτὸ δέρμα ποιέει A | er Ν 1 5 ΄ὕ » Ν ὃ Ν τοιοῦτον | οἷόν περ [περὶ] αὐτό ἐστι, τὸ διαφανὲς lal > » Ν Ν A Sus, ΝΟ a γι τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ τὸ πρὸς τοῦ ἠέρος, πρὸς ὃ προσβάλ- λει τὰ πνεύματα, κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον ὥσπερ περὶ τοῦ ἄλλου δέρματος ἔλεξα. πολλὰ δὲ ταῦτ᾽ ἐστὶ τὰ δέρματα πρὸ τοῦ ὁρέοντος διαφανέα, ὁκοῖόν περ αὐτό ἐστιν: τούτῳ γὰρ τῷ διαφανεῖ ἀνταυγέει τὸ φῶς καὶ τὰ λαμπρὰ πάντα: τούτῳ οὖν ὁρῇ τῷ ἀνταυ- γέοντι: 6 τι δὲ μὴ λαμπρόν ἐστι μηδὲ ἀνταυγεῖ, ΄ὕ 5 ε lal Ν Ν y+ Ν ἃς ἊΣ 5 ‘\ τούτῳ OVX OPN’ TO δὲ ἄλλο TO περὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς λευκὸν κρέας ἐστίν. ἡ δὲ κόρη καλεομένη τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ μέλαν φαίνεται διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι ἐν βάθει ἐστὶ καὶ χιτῶνες περὶ αὐτό εἰσι μέλανες: χιτῶνα δὲ 4 Ν 5 Ν “ te ΕΣ Ἂν 5 Μὰ καλέομεν τὸ ἐνεὸν ὥσπερ δέρμα: ἔστι δὲ οὐ μέλαν ὄψει, ἀλλὰ λευκὸν διαφανές. τὸ δὲ ὑγρὸν κολλῶδες:" / Ν > , > ἊΝ / 5 lal πολλάκις γὰρ ὁπώπαμεν ἐπὶ συρραγέντος ὀφθαλμοῦ 5 Ν ε Ν 4 vn Ν 3. Ν ΄ ¢ , ἐξιὸν ὑγρὸν κολλῶδες: KTV μὲν ἢ ETL θερμόν, ὑγρόν 5 5 ἣν ἊΣ ἴω > / ἊΝ “ ἐστιν: ἐπειδὰν δὲ ψυχθῇ, ἐγένετο ξηρὸν ὥσπερ λιβανωτὸς διαφανής, καὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων καὶ τῶν vA ΄ ’ὔ > ἊΝ Ν > A > A Lal “ θηρίων ὅμοιόν ἐστι. τὸν δὲ ὀφθαλμὸν ἀνιᾷ πᾶν ὅ τι a > / ἊΣ Ν / 4 Ν Ν ἂν ἐμπέσῃ, καὶ τὰ πνεύματα προσβάλλοντα, καὶ τὰ ἄλλα ὅσα λαμπρότερα ἢ κατ᾽ αὐτόν ἐστι, καὶ εἴ τις 5 , ὃ Ν “ὃ “ ε ya ” la 0) > EYXPLTEL, OLA TOOE, OTL OMOKpOLA <evuypos>~ ἐστιν, “ Ν ΄ ΝΡ (Ὁ A Ν Wee , 3 ὥσπερ TO στόμα καὶ ἢ γλῶσσα Kal TA ἄλλα χείλεα ἔνυγρά ἐστιν. 18. Διαλέγεται δὲ διὰ τὸ πνεῦμα ἕλκων εἴσω πᾶν τὸ σῶμα, | τὸ πλεῖστον δὲ ἐς τὰ κοῖλα αὐτὸς ἑωυτῷ: αὐτὸ δὲ θύραζε ὠθεόμενον διὰ τὸ κενὸν ψόφον 156 FLESHES because this happens it forms a skin about itself which is like it itself, the transparent part of the eye next the air which the winds strike, this occurring in the same manner as I have described above for the rest of the skin.* In fact, these transparent membranes situated in front of the part of the eye that sees are many, and like it itself, for it is in this transparency that light and all bright things reflect; through the agency of this reflection, then, the person sees. And whatever is not bright and does not reflect, the person does not see with. The rest of what is around the eyes is a white tissue. What is called the pupil of the eye appears black because it is deep within, and because the tunics around it are black—we call “tunic” the part inside like a skin; this skin is not black to look at, but rather a transparent white. The liquid in the eye is gluey, for often we have seen, when an eye is ruptured, a gluey fluid com- ing out; if this material is still warm, it is fluid, but when it has cooled, it is dry like transparent frankincense. It is the same in both humans and animals. The eye is dis- tressed by anything that falls upon it, both winds that strike it and things that are too bright for it; also, if you anoint it; this is because its surface is moist, like the mouth, the tongue and the rest of the lips. 18. Speech takes place through air, by a person draw- ing it inside his whole body, but mostly into his hollow parts; as this air is forced out through the empty space, it ἃ See chapter 9 fin. above. 1 Del. Zwinger. 2 Linden. 3 Joly: ἡ ἄλλη κοιλίη V. 157 610 WEPI SAPKON / ¢ ἊΝ ἊΝ 5 lal ε Υ Lal -} ἴω ποιέει: ἡ κεφαλὴ γὰρ ἐπηχεῖ. ἡ δὲ γχῶσσα ἀρθροῖ 4 > A 4 > A ‘\ προσβάλλουσα: ἐν τῷ φάρυγγι ἀποφράσσουσα καὶ 4 Ν Ἂς e Vd Ἂν; Ἂς A προσβάλλουσα πρὸς τὴν ὑπερῴην καὶ πρὸς τοὺς 3 ἊΝ ΄ / >) SS x i ’ὔ’ ὀδόντας ποιέει σαφηνίζειν: ἣν δὲ μὴ ἡ γλώσση > a ΄ ¢ ΄ 5 nn / apOpot προσβάλλουσα ἑκάστοτε, οὐκ av σαφέως διαλέγοιτο, ἀλλ᾽ ἡ ἕκαστα φύσει τὰ μονόφωνα. τεκμήριον δέ ἐστι τούτῳ, οἱ κωφοὶ οἱ ἐκ γενεῆς οὐκ =} , 4 > Ν ἊΝ / ἴω ἐπίστανται διαλέγεσθαι, ἀλλὰ τὰ μονόφωνα μοῦνον φωνέουσιν. οὐδ᾽ εἴ τις τὸ πνεῦμα ἐκπνεύσας πειρῷτο διαλέγεσθαι: δῆλον δὲ τόδε: οἱ ἄνθρωποι ὁκόταν βούλωνται μέγα φωνῆσαι, ἕλκοντες τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ > “4 >)! ἔξω ὠθέουσι θύραζε καὶ φθέγγονται μέγα ἕως av! ἀντέχῃ τὸ πνεῦμα, ἔπειτα δὲ καταμαραίνεται τὸ / Ν ec ΄ c , iA > lal φθέγμα: καὶ οἱ κιθαρῳδοί, ὁκόταν δέῃ αὐτοῖς μακροφωνέειν, ἐπ᾽ ἄκρον ἑλκύσαντες τὸ πνεῦμα ἔσω Ν 3 4 ον > ἊΝ ὌΝ la) Ν vA πολὺ ἐκτείνουσι τὴν ἐκφορὰν Kai φωνοῦσι καὶ φθέγ- γονται μέγα ἕως av! ἀντέχωσι τῷ πνεύματι, ἐπὴν δὲ τὸ πνεῦμα ἐπιλίπῃ, καταπαύονται" τούτοισι δῆλον “ Ἂς A 2) er) Ν ΄ὔ “cy NAW, a ὅτι TO πνεῦμά ἐστι TO φθεγγόμενον. εἶδον δὲ ἤδη ot σφάξαντες ἑωυτοὺς ἀπέταμον τὸν φάρυγγα παντά- Φ lal 4 vA Ν > , > re πασιν: οὗτοι ζῶσι μέν, φθέγγονται δὲ οὐδέν, εἰ μή τις συλλάβῃ τὸν φάρυγγα: οὕτω δὲ φθέγγονται: δῆλον δὲ καὶ τούτῳ, ὅτι τὸ πνεῦμα οὐ δύναται, διατε- τμημένου τοῦ φάρυγγος, ἕλκειν ἔσω ἐς τὰ κοῖλα, 5 Ν Ν Ν / 5 4 “ ” ἀλλὰ κατὰ TO διατετμημένον ἐκπνέει. οὕτως EXEL ἂν a », Ν 4 περὶ φωνῆς ἴσως καὶ διαλέξιος. ε Ν +77 > A > , c / 19. Ὁ δὲ αἰών ἐστι τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἑπταήμερος. πρῶτον μὲν | ἐπὴν ἐς τὰς ὑστέρας ἔλθῃ ὁ γόνος, ἐν 158 FLESHES produces sound through the resonance of the head. The tongue articulates by touching: as the tongue encloses the air in the throat and touches the palate and the teeth, it gives the sound clarity. If the tongue does not articulate by touching each time, the person does not speak clearly, but utters, as they all are by nature, mere sounds.* A proof of this is that persons deaf from birth do not under- stand how to speak, but utter only mere sounds. Nor is it possible to speak, if you try to after breathing out. This is clear: when people wish to speak loudly, they draw in breath which they then force out and shout loudly as long as their breath lasts; then their voice dies away. Those who sing to the accompaniment of the lyre, when they must sing an extended passage, first forcefully draw in their breath as much as possible, and then greatly extend their delivery, and recite and sing loudly as long as they still have breath; when their breath is gone, they stop. From these examples, it will be clear that it is the breath that speaks. I have seen persons that have cut their own throats sever the throat completely: these may live, but they cannot speak, unless someone closes their throat: then they can speak. From this, too, it is clear that the person cannot draw his breath into the hollow spaces, because his throat has been cut, but instead sends his breath out through the cut. So it is with the voice, and likewise with speech. 19. The period of life of man is seven days. To begin with, when the seed arrives in the uterus, in seven days it 4 On this difficult passage see Schwyzer’s explanation (p. 96), which I follow. 1 Ermerins: as V. 159 612 TIEPI 2APKON ἑπτὰ ἡμέρῃσιν EXEL ὁκόσα περ ἔστιν ἔχειν τοῦ σώματος: τοῦτο δέ τις ἂν θαυμάσειεν ὅκως ἐγὼ οἷδα: πολλὰ δὲ εἶδον τρόπῳ τοιῷδε: αἱ ἑταῖραι αἱ δημόσιαι, αἵτινες αὐτῶν πεπείρηνται πολλάκις, ὁκό- Ν + 2 tp ε 4 7 ταν Tapa ἄνδρα ἔλθῃ, γινώσκουσιν ὁκόταν haBo- 5 ΄ + , > ἊΝ ᾿ς σιν ἐν γαστρί, κἄπειτεν διαφθείρουσιν: ἐπειδὰν δὲ 4 tal > , “ 4 4 ‘\ ἤδη διαφθαρῇ, ἐκπίπτει ὥσπερ σάρξ: ταύτην τὴν ΄ > “ > ae, / > le 2 σάρκα ἐς ὕδωρ ἐμβαλών, σκεπτόμενος ἐν τῷ ὕδατι, e 4 + 4 τς 4 Ἂς ἴω 5 lal εὑρήσεις ἔχον πάντα τὰ μέλεα καὶ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν τὰς χώρας καὶ τὰ οὔατα καὶ τὰ γυῖα: καὶ τῶν χειρῶν e 4 Ν Ν / ‘ ες 4 ἊΝ ε 4 οἱ δάκτυλοι Kal TA σκέλεα καὶ οἱ πόδες καὶ οἱ δάκτυ- λοι τῶν ποδῶν, καὶ τὸ αἰδοῖον καὶ τὸ ἄλλο πᾶν σῶμα δῆλον. εὔδηλον δὲ καὶ ὅταν λάβῃ ἐς γαστέρα τῇσιν ἐπισταμένῃσιν: αὐτίκα ἔφριξε, καὶ θέρμη καὶ 3, 3, ἊΝ Ἂς βρυγμὸς καὶ σπασμὸς ἔχει, καὶ τὸ ἄρθρον καὶ τὸ A lal » oN σῶμα πᾶν Kal THY ὑστέρην ὄκνος" καὶ ὁκόσαι καθα- A Ni pat εἰσι καὶ μὴ ὑγραΐ, τοῦτο πάσχουσιν: ὁκόσαι δὲ A γι [πάσχουσι] παχεῖαι καὶ βλεννώδεις, οὐ γινώσκουσι ΄ A a Te , ” \ τούτων TOV γυναικῶν πολλαί: 7 δέ μοι ἔδειξαν, κατὰ τοῦτο δὴ καὶ ἐπίσταμαι εἰδέναι. Δῆλον δὲ καὶ τῷδε, ὅτι ἑπταήμερος ὁ αἰών, εἴ τις > 4 ε Ν ε / 4 vn / 4 ε Ν ἐθέλοι ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας φαγέειν ἢ πιέειν μηδέν, οἱ μὲν Ν 3 4 5 3. ~ > Ἂν / Ν πολλοὶ ἀποθνήσκουσιν ἐν αὐτῇσιν: εἰσὶ δέ τινες καὶ ἃ © ot ὑπερβάλλουσιν, ἀποθνήσκουσι δ᾽ ὅμως: εἰσὶ δέ a ° lal τινες Ol Kal ἐπείσθησαν ὥστε μὴ ἀποκαρτερῆσαι, ἀλλὰ φαγέειν τε καὶ mee: ἀλλ᾽ ἡ κοιλίη οὐκέτι καταδέχεται: ἡ γὰρ νῆστις συνεφύη ἐν ταύτῃσι lal ε ᾿ 5 Ν Ἄ | Ν ia » τῇσιν ἡμέρῃσιν: ἀλλὰ θνήσκουσι | καὶ οὗτοι. ἔστι 160 FLESHES has all the parts the body is to have. You might wonder how I know this: well, I have learned much in the follow- ing way. The common prostitutes, who have frequent experience in these matters, after having been with a man know when they have become pregnant, and then destroy the child. When it has been destroyed, it drops out like a piece of flesh. If you put this flesh into water and examine it in the water,* you will see that it has all the parts: the orbits of the eyes, the ears and the limbs; the fingers, the legs, the feet, the toes, and the genital parts, and all the rest of the body is distinct. It is also very obvious to women of experience when a woman becomes pregnant: at once she feels a chill; heat, shivering and tension set in, and she feels a sluggishness in her joints, whole body and uterus. Women that are in a clean state and not moist experience these things, but many of those that are stout and phlegmy do not recognize them. It is to the extent that these women have instructed me that I know about these things. It is also clear from the following that the period of life is seven days: if a person goes seven days without eating or drinking anything, in this period most die; some even survive that time, but still die; and others in fact are per- suaded not to starve themselves to death, but to eat and drink: however, the cavity no longer admits anything because the jejunum has grown together in that many days, and these people, too, die. It is also proven by the 4 Cf. Nature of the Child 13 for a similar experiment. 1 Del. Littré. 161 614 TIEPI SAPKON ἊΝ Ν ἴω ’ ΝΣ 7 τ 4 δὲ καὶ τῷδε τεκμήρασθαι: TO παιδίον ἑπτάμηνον γόνιμον! γενόμενον, λόγῳ γεγένηται, καὶ ζῇ, καὶ λόγον ἔχει τοιοῦτον καὶ ἀριθμὸν ἀτρεκέα ἐς τὰς ἑβδομάδας: ὀκτάμηνον δὲ γενόμενον, οὐδὲν βιοῖ πώποτε: ἐννέα δὲ μηνῶν καὶ δέκα ἡμερέων γόνος γίνεται, καὶ ζῇ, καὶ ἔχει τὸν ἀριθμὸν ἀτρεκέα ἐς τὰς ἑβδομάδας: τέσσαρες δεκάδες ἑβδομάδων ἡμέραι SEEN ὃ ΄ 5 ὃ ΄ Dues δὲ Ν ὃ ἠὃ a εἰσὶ διηκόσιαι ὀγδοήκοντα" “ ἐς δὲ τὴν δεκάδα τῶν ἑβδομάδων ἑβδομήκοντα ἡμέραι. ἔχει δὲ καὶ τὸ ¢ Le 4 lal 4 = La > ἑπτάμηνον γενόμενον τρεῖς δεκάδας ἑβδομάδων, ἐς δὲ Ν ὃ (ὃ ε / =BS / e / al € τὴν δεκάδα ἑκάστην ἑβδομήκοντα ἡμέραι, τρεῖς 4 Ἂς ec / e , / Ν / dexades δὲ ἑβδομάδων at σύμπασαι δέκα καὶ διηκό- σιαι. Ἂν « lal “ tal > 4 > / Καὶ at νοῦσοι οὕτω τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ὀξύταται γίνονται, ἡμερέων παρελθουσέων ἐν τῇσιν ἀνακρί- νονται καὶ ἀπέθανον ἢ ὑγιέες ἐγένοντο, «τεσσάρων, ἡμίσεος ἑβδομάδος: καὶ δευτεραῖαι ἐν μιῇ ἐβδο- (ὃ ἘΞ 0] \ a oS ὃ ε ΄ > “ε ὃ μάδι:" καὶ τριταῖαι ἕνδεκα ἡμέρῃσιν, ἐν μιᾷ ἐβδο- ’ὔ’ Ν. ε ’ ε ’ Ἂς A > ἂς μάδι καὶ ἡμίσει ἑβδομάδος: καὶ τεταρταῖα: ἐν δυσὶν ἑβδομάσιν: καὶ αἱ πεμίπταϊῖαι ἐν δυοῖν δεούσῃσιν + ε / “ ε 4 Ν ε Be εἴκοσιν ἡμέρῃσι, δυοῖν τε ἑβδομάδοιν καὶ ἡμίσει ἑβδομάδος. αἱ δὲ ἄλλαι νοῦσοι οὐκ ἔχουσι διαγνώ- μὴν ἐν ὁκόσῳ ὑγιέες ἔσονται ἀποφαίνεσθαι. οὕτω Ν Ν Ν 4 Ν ’ Ἂς 5 A A Ν Ν δὲ καὶ τὰ ἕλκεα τὰ μεγάλα τὰ ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ καὶ τὰ ἐν τῷ ἄλλῳ σώματι τεταρταῖα φλεγμαίνειν ἄρχεται, ! Potter: γόνον V: del. Ermerins. 2 Froben: ἑβδομήκοντα V. 3 Littré. 162 FLESHES following. The child born viable at seven months is born in phase, and lives, and has the correct synchrony and precise numerical relationship to seven-day periods. A child born at eight months never survives. At nine months and ten days a child is born and lives, and has a precise numerical relationship to seven-day periods: 4x 10 x7 = 280 days, and 10 x 7 = 70 days. The child born at seven months? counts exactly thirty seven-day periods: 10 x 7 = 70 days, and 3 x 10 x 7 = 210 days. Diseases are also most acute in patients according to this same pattern, the days in which they come to a crisis and either die or recover being <four (half a seven-day period), the second most acute occurring in a whole seven-day period,> the third most acute in eleven days (one and a half seven-day periods), the fourth most acute in two seven-day periods, and the fifth most acute in eighteen days (two and a half seven-day periods). Other diseases have no means by which to reveal in how many days patients will recover. Thus both large ulcers on the head and ulcers on the rest of the body begin to swell on 4 For the Greeks, normal pregnancy in the healthy woman lasted exactly seven forty-day periods (280 days), and children born at that term were called “ten months’” (δεκάμηνοι). See W. H. Roscher, Die Tessarakontaden und Tessarakontadenlehren der Griechen und anderer Volker, Leipzig, 1909, p. 97f. b Reckoning seven thirty-day months. 163 TIEPI SAPKON > ε Ν Ν 4 / ἂν > ἐν ἑπτὰ δὲ καθίστανται φλεγμήναντα Kal ἐν τεσσα- (ὃ a: ” 1 ὃ val ὃ ΄ Xx ρεσκαίδεκα «καὶ ἐν εἴκοσι!" δυοῖν δεούσῃησιν. ἣν » 2, aA 4 ‘\ \ a > 7 A δέ τις ἀνακῶς θεραπεύῃ καὶ μὴ καταστῇ ἐν τούτῳ TO / \ > lal ἴω ΄ -“ > / χρόνῳ τὰ ἐν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι μεγάλα ἕλκεα, ἀποθνή- + 5 A σκουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι. θαυμάσειε δ᾽ av τις καὶ τοῦτο Ψ > ey ὅστις ἄπειρος ἢ, EL ἑπτάμηνον γίνεται παιδίον: ἐγὼ \ ἘΝ STLEN: » Ἂς ΄ 3, ΄ , μὲν οὖν αὐτὸς ὄπωπα καὶ συχνά: εἰ δέ τις βούλεται Ν A 5 ΄ ε «᾿ Ἂν Ἂν 5 4 Δ καὶ τοῦτο ἐλέγξαι, ῥηΐδιον: πρὸς τὰς ἀκεστρίδας αἵ ΄ A 4 > \ & + Ν πάρεισι τῇσι τικτούσῃσιν ἐλθὼν πυθέσθω. ἔστι δὲ Ν 5 / ἊΝ > 4 ε a ε Ἂν καὶ ἄλλο τεκμήριον: τοὺς ὀδόντας οἱ παῖδες ἑπτὰ > Bi 4 A Ν 5 ε Ν BA i > ἐτέων διελθόντων πληροῦσι: Kal ἐν ἑπτὰ ἔτεσίν ἐστι Ν fd Ν, 5 lal > 4 ’ e / δὲ λόγῳ Kal ἀριθμῷ ἀτρεκέως Sexades ἑβδομάδων a Ν ᾽ὔὕ Ν «“ «ἕξ καὶ τριήκοντα καὶ ἥμισυ δεκάδος, ἑβδομάδες ΄ NS ea Ν ΄ a δὲ ΄ πέντε καὶ ἑξήκοντα καὶ τριηκόσιαι. τῆς δὲ φύσιος τὴν ἀνάγκην, διότι ἐν ἑπτὰ τούτων ἕκαστα διοικεῖ- ται, ἐγὼ φράσω ἐν ἄλλοισιν. 1 Zwinger in margin, from Calvus’ duovedeviginti. 2 Littré. 164 FLESHES the fourth day, and the swelling subsides on the seventh, fourteenth and eighteenth days. If treatment is carefully carried out, but large ulcers of the head fail to heal up in this period, the patients die. (Someone who lacks experi- ence might wonder whether a child can really be born in seven months, but I have seen it myself, and often. If anyone wishes proof, the matter is easy: let him go to the midwives that attend women who are giving birth and ask them.) There is yet another proof. Children have acquired all their teeth by the time they reach seven years. Now there are in seven years by measure and num- ber exactly thirty-six and a half tens of seven-day periods: 365 seven-day periods. The necessity of nature that com- pels each of these things to be ordered by seven, I shall explain elsewhere. 4 Apparently this note is an after-thought to the paragraph above on seven-months’ children. 165 PRORRHETIC I INTRODUCTION How the same recherché and presumably newly- coined title, Prorrhetic, came to be given to the two very different works we have before us here and below is un- known. Completely divergent in purpose, structure, and content, the most the Prorrhetics can be said to share is, as the name suggests, an interest in medical prediction. Once assigned, however, the names persisted. In Ero- tian’s census of Hippocratic writings we find among the semiotic: “Prorrhetic I and IJ—that it is not by Hip- pocrates, I shall demonstrate elsewhere.”! Suggesting that the “it” in Erotian’s parenthetical remark refers only to book 2 is the fact that over twenty glosses from book 1 appear in the Glossary, but none from book 2.5 Six of these glosses to Prorrhetic I cite Bacchius of Tanagra,® evidence that the work was already in the Hippocratic Collection by the third century B.C. Although Galen regards Prorrhetic I as a mixture of both genuine and spurious Hippocratic material drawn ! Erotian p. 9. 2 See Nachmanson ΡΡ. 273-78. 3 Erotian, s.v. A6, A8, E5, K6, A7, 31. 168 PRORRHETIC I from many sources, he valued the work enough to devote a lengthy commentary to it.° This commentary was written after his commentaries to Epidemics I and II, and before those to Epidemics III and VI.® Caelius Aurelianus’ Latin translation of Soranus’ Acute Diseases cites Prorrhetic I 16 by name: “For in his book entitled Prorrhetic (Praedictivo libro) he says that phrenitics drink little, are agitated by every sound, and are affected by tremor.” ? Prorrhetic I belongs to the genre of Hippocratic prog- nosis literature also represented by the Aphorisms and Coan Prenotions. It consists of a collection of 170 inde- pendent short prognostic or expectant chapters arranged by subject in the sections: 1-38: Phrenitis, mania, mental derangement 39-98: Bad or fatal signs 99-124: Spasms and convulsions 125-152: Haemorrhages 153-170: Swellings beside the ears. Interest is empirical and descriptive, with virtually no theoretic content. The conditions included are weighted towards the neurological (e.g. loss of speech, deafness, 4 For a thorough discussion of Galen’s position see V. Nutton, Galen on Prognosis, Corpus Medicorum Graecorum V 8,1, Berlin, 1978, pp. 175f. 5 Galeni In Hippocratis prorrheticum I commentarii, ed. H. Diels, CMG V 9,2, Leipzig and Berlin, 1915, pp. 1-178. 6 J. Ilberg, “Uber die Schriftstellerei des Klaudios Galenos,” Rheinisches Museum N.F. 44 (1889), pp. 229-38. 7 Caelius pp. 376f. 169 PRORRHETIC I delirium, coma, strabismus, headache, paralyses), al- though conditions of other kinds are also often included (e.g. ardent fever, diarrhoea, breathlessness). Most state- ments in the treatise have been worked through to the generalized form, but two frequent features suggest that the process of collecting and evaluating clinical data was still going on at the time of publication: i) in twenty-seven chapters the author poses ques- tions, (presumably to himself): e.g. (ch. 30) “Do patients that throb through their whoie body end up by losing their speech?” ii) in eleven cases specific patients are mentioned: 6:8: (ch. 13) “In patients with phrenitis a white evacuation is bad, as it was for Archecrates.” The great interest this treatise commanded at a time when medicine’s curative possibilities were limited is reflected in the many editions and translations listed by Littré (vol. 5, 509), and by the fact that in the eighteenth century it attracted two English translators: Francis Clifton, Hippocrates upon ... Prognosticks .. ., London, 1734. (A large number of the chapters of Prorrhetic I are translated in pp. 250-389 of this book, but arranged according to the translator's rather than the treatise’s order, and interspersed with copious other Hippocratic material.) John Moffat, The Prognostics and Prorrhetics of Hip- pocrates translated ... with Large Annotations .. ., London, 1788. (pp. 55-292) Besides appearing in the collected editions and transla- tions down to Ermerins and Fuchs, Prorrhetic I was the 170 PRORRHETIC I subject of a 1954 Hamburg dissertation, published later as: Hilde Polack, Textkritische Untersuchungen zu der hippokratishen Schrift ‘Prorrhetikos I’, Hamburg, 1976. Despite its modest title, this study contains a complete critical edition of the treatise followed by a very valuable philological commentary. My edition and translation depend almost entirely upon Dr. Polack’s work. {71 V510 Littré 512 ΠΡΟΡΡΗΤΙΚΟΝΑ e 4 > > “Ὁ ΄ὕ ‘\ 1. Οἱ κωματώδεες ἐν ἀρχῇσι γενόμενοι μετὰ a > , « ἐφ / > , κεφαλῆς, ὀσφύος, ὑποχονδρίου, τραχήλου ὀδύνης ἀγρυπνέοντες ἣρά γε φρενιτικοί εἰσιν; μυκτὴρ ἐν ΄ὔ 3 ΄ > / » Ν >) τούτοισιν ἀποστάζων ὀλέθριον, ἄλλως TE καὶ ἢν τεταρταίοισιν ἀρχομένοισιν. 2. Κοιλίης περίπλυσις ἐξέρυθρος κακὸν μὲν ἐν πᾶσιν, οὐχ ἥκιστα δὲ ἐπὶ τοῖσι προειρημένοισιν. 3. Αἱ δασεῖαι γλῶσσαι κατάξηροι φρενιτικαΐ. 4. Τὰ ἐπὶ ταραχώδεσιν ἀγρύπνοισιν οὖρα ἄχροα, μέλασιν ἐνῃωρημένα | παρακρουστικά: ἐφιδρῶντι! 7“ φρενιτικά. 3 i, Ν 5 Lal > / 5. Ἑνύπνια τὰ ev φρενιτικοῖς ἐναργέα. vn ϑι 6. ᾿Ανάχρεμψις πυκνή γε, ἣν δή τι καὶ ἄλλο σημεῖον προσῇ, φρενιτικά. 7. Τὰ ἐγκαταλιμπανόμενα καύματα ἐν ὑποχον- a A td 4 Μ Ἂς a δρίῳ πυρετοῦ περιψυχθέντος κακά, ἄλλως TE καὶ ἢν ἐφιδρῶσιν. 8. Αἱ προαπαυδησάντων παραφροσύναι κάκι- σται, otov καὶ θρασύνοντι. 9. Τὰ φρενιτικὰ νεανικῶς τρομώδεα τελευτᾷ. 172 PRORRHETIC I 1. Do patients who have been comatose at the begin- ning, but later lie awake with pains in the head, loins, hypochondrium and neck develop phrenitis? A running nose in these is a fatal sign, especially if it begins on the fourth day. 2. A very red discharge from the cavity is bad in all cases, not least in the ones mentioned above. 3. A rough tongue that is very dry indicates phrenitis. 4. Colourless urines in persons with troubled sleep- lessness, if they have dark material suspended in them, suggest derangement—in a person who perspires over his whole body, phrenitis. 5. The dreams of patients with phrenitis are vivid. 6. Frequent expectoration, if some other sign is pre- sent as well, indicates phrenitis. 7. If heat is left behind in the hypochondrium when a fever has grown cool, it is a bad sign, especially if the per- son perspires over his whole body. 8. Delirium in patients that are already failing is a very bad sign, as also in a person who becomes over-bold. 9. Phrenitis in the young ends with tremors. 1 H2 from Galen: -δρῶντα I. 2 R from Galen: vedpuxa I. 173 514 IIPOPPHTIKON A 10. Ta ἐν κεφαλαλγίῃσιν ἰώδεα ἐμέσματα μετὰ κωφώσιος ἀγρύπνῳ ταχὺ ἐκμαίνει. ll. Τὰ ἐν ὀξέσι κατὰ φάρυγγα ὀδυνώδεα σμιϊκρά, πνιγώδεα, ὅτε χάνοι, pH! ῥηϊδίως συν- άγοντι, ἰσχνῷ παρακρουστικὸν τὸ τοιοῦτον" φρενιτι- κοὶ ὀλέθριοι. 12. Ἔν τοῖσι φρενιτικοῖσιν ἐν ἀρχῇσι τὸ [μὴ] ἐπιεικές, πυκνὰ δὲ μεταπίπτειν, κακὸν τὸ τοιοῦτον. καὶ πτυελισμὸς κακόν. 13. Ἔν φρενιτικοῖσι λευκὴ διαχώρησις κακόν. ὡς καὶ τῷ ᾿Αρχεκράτει: ἦρά γε ἐπὶ τούτοισι καὶ νωθρότης ἐπιγίνεται; καὶ ῥῖγος ἐπὶ τούτοισι κάκι- στον. 14. Τοῖσιν ἐξισταμένοισι μελαγχολικῶς, οἷσι τρόμοι ἐπιγίνονται, καὶ κακόηθες. 15. Ot ἐκστάντες ὀξέως ἐπιπυρέξαντες σὺν ἱδρῶτι φρενιτικοί. 16. Βραχυπόται, ψόφου καθαπτόμενοι τρομώδεες γίνονται. 17. +Ta ἐξ ἐμέτου ἀσώδεος, φωνὴ κλαγγώδης, ὄμματα ἐπίχνουν ἴσχοντα," 1 μανικά. οἷον καὶ ἡ τοῦ ἝἙρμοζύγου ἐκμανεῖσα ὀξέως ἄφωνος ἀπέθανεν. 18. Ἔν πυρετῷ καυσώδει ἤχων προγενομένων μετὰ δ᾽ ἀμβλυωσμοῦ καὶ κατὰ τὰς ῥῖνας βάρεος προελθόντος ἐξίστανται μελαγχολικῶς. 1 H2 after Galen: μὲν I. 2 Del. H2 after Galen. 3 H2: ἴσχνωντα 1. 174 PRORRHETIC I 10. For a sleepless person who is deaf to vomit green- ish material during a headache indicates a rapidly approaching mania. 11. Slight, suffocating pains in the throat, felt on opening the mouth by a person with an acute disease who cannot close it easily and who is feeble, announce mania. Those with phrenitis are doomed. 12. In phrenitis, for signs that are reasonable at the beginning to change frequently is bad?; salivation is also bad. 13. In patients with phrenitis a white evacuation is bad, as it was for Archecrates. Does torpor follow in these? Chills too are a very bad sign in these patients. 14. For trembling to come on in patients that are out of their wits with melancholy is a malignant sign. 15. For persons out of their wits to be suddenly attacked by an acute fever and sweating indicates phreni- tis. 16. Persons who drink little and are over-sensitive to noise become tremulous. 17. + If subsequent to nausea and vomiting—the voice being shrill—the eyes take on a wool-like covering, + it announces mania, as in the daughter of Hermozygus who, while delirious, suddenly lost her voice and died. 18. If, during an ardent fever, ringing occurs in the ears together with dullness of vision and a heaviness in the region of the nose, these patients lose their wits in melancholy. 4 Cf. chapter 28 below. 175 516 518 IIPOPPHTIKON A 19. At παρακρούσιες σὺν φωνῇ κλαγγώδει yoo- σης σπασμοὶ τρομώδεες γενόμεϊνοι ἐξίστανται: σκληρυσμὸς ταύτῃσιν ὀλέθριον. 90. Αἱ τρομώδεες γλῶσσαι σημεῖον οὐχ ἱδρυμέ- , uns γνώμης. 21. Ἐπὶ τοῖσι χολώδεσι διαχωρήμασι τὸ ἀφρῶ- 5 4 ’ὔ + Ν 5 ὯΝ δες ἐπάνθισμα κακόν, ἄλλως τε καὶ ὀσφὺν προηλ- γηκότι παρενεχθέντι. Ν > ον ‘\ Ν 5 ΄ 5 Ἃ 22. Τὰ ἀραιὰ κατὰ πλευρὸν ἐν τούτοισιν adyn- ματα παραφροσύνην σημαίνει. 23. Αἱ μετὰ λυγγὸς ἀφωνίαι κάκιστον. 24. Αἱ per’ ἐκλύσιος ἀφωνίαι κάκιστον. > > ΄ A e a ΄ 25. Ἔν ἀφωνίῃ πνεῦμα οἷον τοῖσι πνιγομένοισι πρόχειρον πονηρόν: Apa γε καὶ παρακρουστικὸν τὸ τοιοῦτον; 26. Αἱ ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγον θρασέως παρακρούσιες θηρι- ώδεες. ε Ἂς / > > γ 2 > ’ 27. Αἱ μετὰ καταψύξεως οὐκ ἀπύρῳ ἐφιδρώοντι Ἂς Μ, ΄ (2 ε ἂν 3 4 τὰ ἄνω δυσφορίαι φρενιτικά, ws καὶ ᾿Αρισταγόρῃ, καὶ μέντοι καὶ ὀλέθρια. 28. Τὰ ἐν φρενιτικοῖσι πυκνὰ μεταπίπτοντα σπασμώδεα. 29. Τὰ οὐρούμενα μὴ ὑπομνησάντων ὀλέθρια: ἦρα τούτοισιν οὐρεῖται | οἷον ἐπὴν ὑποστᾶσι ταρά- ξειας; ! Polack: θράσος I. 176 PRORRHETIC I 19. When, in delirium associated with shrillness of the voice, trembling spasms of the tongue occur, these patients lose their wits; hardening of the tongue in this condition is a fatal sign. 20. Trembling of the tongue is a sign that the mind is not settling down. 21. A frothy scum on bilious stools is a bad sign, espe- cially in a person with diarrhoea and who had pain in his loins beforehand. 22. Intermittent pains in the side in such cases are a sign of derangement of the mind. 23. Loss of speech in conjunction with hiccups is a very bad sign. 24. Loss of speech in conjunction with faintness is a very bad sign. 25. In persons who have lost their speech perceptible breathing like that heard in suffocation bodes ill; does this also indicate oncoming mania? 26. Short periods of delirium characterized by over- boldness are malignant.* 27. Restlessness during a chill in a febrile patient who is perspiring over the upper part of his body indicates phrenitis, as in the case of Aristagora, and is a fatal sign. 28. Frequent changes in phrenitis announce con- vulsions.> 29. For a person to pass urine without intending to is a fatal sign. Is the urine passed in these cases like what you would stir up with a precipitate? 4 See chapter 123 below. bCf. chapter 12 above. 1 7|7| 520 IIPOPPHTIKON A 30. Οἱ παλμώδεες δι᾽ ὅλου apa ye ἄφωνοι τελευ- τῶσι; 31. Τὰ ἐν φρενιτικοῖσι μετὰ καταψύξιος πτυελί- ζοντα μέλανα ἐμεῖται. ΄, ;Ξ᾽ 32. Κώφωσις καὶ οὖρα ἐξέρυθρα, ἀκατάστατα “- ᾽, ἐναιωρήματα παρακρουστικόν:" τοῖσι τούτοισιν LKTE- a ΄ Ν Ν SEDER ΄ ΄, il ροῦσθαι κακόν. κακὸν δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ ἰκτέρῳ κώφωσις. 4 > 4 > 7 Ν, ’ a τούτους ἀφώνους. αἰσθανομένους δὲ συμβαίνει yive- σθαι: τούτοισι δὲ καὶ κοιλίαι καταρρήγνυνται, οἷον e , ‘\ 5 / Ἑρμίππῳ καὶ ἀπέθανε. 33. Κώφωσις ἐν ὀξέσι καὶ ταραχώδεσι παρακο- λουθοῦσα κακόν. 34. Αἱ τρομώδεες, ἀσαφέες, ψηλαφώδεες παρα- κρούσιες πάνυ φρενιτικαί, ὡς καὶ τῷ Διδυμάρχου ἐν 35. Αἱ ἐκ ῥίγεος νωθρότητες οὐ πάνυ παρ᾽ αὑτοῖ- σιν. 36. Οἱ περὶ ὀμφαλὸν πόνοι παλμώδεες ἔχουσι μέν τι καὶ γνώμης παράφορον, περὶ κρίσιν δὲ τού- τοισι πνεῦμα ἁλὲς συχνὸν ξὺν πόνῳ διέρχεται. καὶ οἱ κατὰ γαστροκνημίην πόνοι ἐν τούτοισι γνώμης παράφοροι. Ν Ἂς Ἂς > lal > / Μ 37. Τὰ κατὰ μηϊρὸν ἐν πυρετῷ ἀλγήματα ἔχει τι παρακρουστικόν, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἣν οὖρον ἐναιωρηθῇ λεῖον: καὶ ὁκόσα περὶ κύστιν ἴσχουσι τοιαῦτα ἅμα πυρετῷ: κοιλίη ταραχώδης τρόπον" χολερώδεα ! Potter: μώρωσις I. 178 PRORRHETIC I 30. Do patients that throb through their whole body end up by losing their speech? 31. What is salivated in cases of phrenitis with chills is vomited back up dark. 32. Deafness in conjunction with very red urines that contain suspended material but set down no deposit presages mania. For such a patient to become jaundiced is a bad sign. Deafness coming after jaundice is also a bad sign. These patients lose their speech but at the same time retain all their mental faculties. In such cases the cavity is also subject to violent discharges, as happened to Hermippus, and he died. 33. For deafness to come on in acute and disruptive diseases is a bad sign. 34. Delirium associated with trembling, confusion and groping with the hands points very definitely to phrenitis, as in the son of Didymarchus in Cos. 35. Patients who suffer torpor after chills are not alto- gether in their senses. 36. Pains about the navel accompanied by trembling may involve some disturbance of the mind, and at their crisis these patients pass a great quantity of wind and not without pain. Pains in the calf of the leg in such cases are also disturbing to the mind. 37. Pains in the thigh during fever point towards derangement of the mind, especially if the person’s urine contains smooth, suspended material; so also do pains about the bladder during fever. When the cavity is moved and passes bilious stools, persons with comatose torpors 2 Parisinus Graecus 2145: τρόπῳ I. 179 522 IPOPPHTIKON A MY) Ν > ΄ Si ¢ a κωματώδεες νωθροὶ οὐ πάνυ παρὰ" αὑτοῖσιν. > ON 4 tal ha ~ 38. Ἐπὶ κοιλίῃ vyph, κοπώδει, κεφαλαλγικῷ, ΄ ε / > “ 3 / - Ν διψώδει, ὑπαγρύπνῳ, ἀσαφεῖ, ἀδυνάτῳ, οἷσι τὰ τοι- A Ν A avTa, ἐλπὶς ἐκστῆναι. 39. Οἱ ἐφιδρῶντες καὶ μάλιστα κεφαλὴν ἐν ὀξέ- ε » ͵΄ ” ἊΣ ἘΚ ” σιν ὑποδύσφοροι, κακόν, ἄλλως TE καὶ ἐπ᾽ οὔροισι 4 ἊΝ Ν A / μέλασι, Kal TO θολερὸν πνεῦμα ἐν τούτοισι κακόν. « Ν ΄ δ mh SOA” ΔΟῚ la 5 40. Αἱ παρὰ λόγον κενεαγγικῶς" ἀδυναμίαι οὐκ 4 / ἐούσης κενεαγγείης κακόν. ’ὔ γι, Ν Ν 41. Κοιλίαι ἀπολελαμμέναι, σμικρὰ δὲ μέλανα σπυραϊθώδη Kat’ ἀνάγκην χαλῶσαι μυκτήρ τε σὺν ΄ὔ 7 , τούτοισιν ἐπιρρηγνύμενος κακόν. e / A Ν AN ἂς 4 42. Οἷσιν ὀσφύος ἄλγημα ἐπὶ πολὺ μετὰ καύμα- τος ἀσώδεος, ἐφιδρῶντες οὗτοι κακόν: ἦρά γε τού- 4 4 ἣν δ X Ν ε > er τοισι τρομώδεα γίνεται; Kal ἡ φωνὴ δὲ ws ἐν ῥίγει. y+ / ‘\ 4 43. Ακραια δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἀμφότερα ταχὺ μεταπίπτοντα ’ Ν ΄ ἊΝ «ε ’ὔὕ “4 κακόν: Kat δίψα δὲ ἡ τοιαύτη πονηρόν. 5 ΄ὔ lal > 4 / 44. Ἔκ κοσμίου θρασεῖα ἀπόκρισις κακόν. e Ν ΄ / / 45. Οἷσιν φωνὴ ὀξείη," ὑποχόνδρια τούτοισιν εἴσω εἰρύαται. + 4 A Ν Ν. 46. “Oppata apavpovpeva φαῦλον καὶ τὸ πεπη- γὸς ἀχλυῶδες κακόν. > 12 / 47. ᾿Οξυφωνίη κλαυθμώδης κακόν. ' Vaticanus Graecus 278 in margin: περὶ I. 2 Polack: -γικῷ I. 3 Polack: Φωνὴ ὀξείη οἷσιν 1. 180 PRORRHETIC I are not altogether in their senses. 38. In cases of diarrhoea, weariness, headache, thirst, mild sleeplessness, confusion and debility expect de- rangement. 39. To perspire in acute states, especially with a slight, unpleasant sweat over the head, is a bad sign, particularly in association with the passage of dark urines; laboured breathing in these patients is also a bad sign. 40. A weakness like the one that results from evacuant treatment, if occurring without a reason when no evacua- tion has taken place, is a bad sign. 41. If the cavity is blocked, but on being forced passes small, dark stools like those of sheep and goats, this, together with a haemorrhage from the nose, is a bad sign. 42. For patients suffering from pains in the loins in conjunction with nausea and fever to perspire over the body is a bad sign. Does trembling develop in them? Also, their voice changes the way it does in chills. 43. A rapid change in the extremities on both sides is a bad sign. A rapidly changing thirst also bodes ill. 44. An insolent reply from a polite person is a bad sign. 45. The voice becomes high by the hypochondrium being drawn tight inside. 46. For the eyes to lose their power of vision is an indifferent? sign, and for them to be fixed and clouded a bad one. 47. A high-pitched, broken voice is a bad sign. 4 In this treatise, “indifferent”, φαῦλος or φλαῦρος, is used euphemistically to mean “bad”; cf. Oxford English Dictionary, 5.0. ΤΌ. 181 524 526 ITLPOPPHTIKON A > = 48. “Oddvtav πρίσιες ὀλέθριον οἷς μὴ σύνηθες καὶ ὑγιαίνουσι, πνιγμοὶ ἐν τούτοισι κακὸν πάνυ. 4 + ὮΝ ἊΝ 4 ἊΣ 49. Προσώπου εὔχροια καὶ τὸ λίην σκυθρωπὸν πονηρόν. 50. Τὰ τελευτῶντα διαχωρήματα, εἰς ἀφρώδεα ἄκρητα παροξυντικά. « 5 4 > > / + > [4 51. Αἱ ἐκ καταψύξιος ἐν ὀξέσιν οὔρων ἀπολήψιες κάκισται. 52. Τὰ ὀλέθρια ἀσήμως ῥαστωνήσαντα θάνατον σημαίνει. 53. Ἔν ὀξέσι καὶ χολώδεσι ἔκλευκα ἀφρώδεα καὶ περίχολα διαχωρήματα κακόν, καὶ οὖρα τὰ τοιαῦτα κακόν: GPa γε τούτοισιν ἧπαρ ἐπώδυνον; 54. Αἱ ἐν πυρετοῖσιν ἀφωνίαι σπασμώδεα τρό- > / > 4 mov ἐξίστανται: ὀλέθριον. 55. Αἱ ἐκ πόνου ἀφωνίαι δυσθάνατοι. 56. Οἱ ἐξ ὑποχονδρίων ἀλγήματος πυρετοὶ κακο- 4 noes. 57. Δίψα παραλόγως λυθεῖσα ἐν ὀξέσι κακόν. 58. Ἱδρὼς πολὺς ἐγγενόμενος ἅμα πυρετῷ ἐν ὀξέσι φαῦλον. 59. Καὶ οὖρα δὲ πέπονα πονηρὰ καὶ τὰ ἐρυθρὰ ἐκ τούτων ἐπανθίσματα | ἰώδεα κατεχόμενα καὶ τὸ Ν 3 , / μικρὰ ἐπιφαίνεσθαι, στάξιες. 60. Καὶ ἔμετοι μετὰ ποικιλίης κακόν, ἄλλως τε x > ‘ > ’ BY καὶ ἐγγὺς ἀλλήλων ἰόντα. 61. Ὅσα ἐν κρισίμοισιν ἀλυσμοῖς ἐν ἱδρῶτι περιψύχεται κακόν" καὶ τὰ ἐπιρριγώσαντα ἐκ τούτων κακά. 182 PRORRHETIC I 48. To grind the teeth is a fatal sign in persons who do not habitually grind them when they are healthy, and difficulty in breathing in these is exceedingly bad. 49. A complexion of a good colour if associated with an over-sad countenance bodes ill. 50. Evacuations that at the end become frothy and unmixed indicate an exacerbation. 51. Stoppage of the urine subsequent to a chill in acute diseases is a very bad sign. 52. Fatal signs that relent without leaving any trace presage death. 53. In acute bilious diseases, very white frothy stools mixed with bile are a bad sign, as are like urines. Is the liver painful in these patients? 54. Loss of speech in fevers in which patients become deranged in a convulsive manner is a fatal sign. 55. Loss of speech arising from exertions brings a hard death. 56. Fevers arising from pains in the hypochondrium are malignant. 57. Thirst in acute diseases that resolves without a reason is a bad sign. 58. Copious sweating during fevers in acute diseases is an indifferent sign. 59. Mature urines, too, are an evil sign, and also a rusty red scum that separates out and covers them; also the appearance of little pieces—droplets—on the surface. 60. Attacks of vomiting in which material of different kinds comes up are a bad sign, especially if these occur closely one after another. 61. To be thoroughly cooled by a sweat during critical disturbances is a bad sign; an attack of shivering after- wards is also bad. 183 528 IIPOPPHTIKON A 62. Ἐμέσματα ἄκρητα, ἀσώδεα πονηρά. 63. Τὸ καρῶδες apa γε πανταχοῦ κακόν; 64. Μετὰ ῥίγεος ἄγνοια κακόν: κακὸν δὲ καὶ λήθη. 65. Αἱ ἐκ ῥίγεος καταψύξιες μὴ ἀναθερμαινόμε- ναι κακαί. 66. Οἱ ἐκ καταψύξιος ἱδρώδεες μὴ ἀναθερμαινό- μενοι κακοί: ἐπὶ τούτοισιν ἐν πλευρῷ καῦμα Kal τι ὀδυνῶδες καὶ τὸ ἐπιρριγῶσαι κακόν. 67. Τὰ κωματώδεα ῥίγεα ὑπό τι ὀλέθρια: καὶ τὸ φλογῶδες ἐν προσώπῳ μεθ᾽ ἱδρῶτα κακόν: ἐπὶ τού- τοις ψύξις τῶν ὄπισθεν σπασμὸν ἐπικαλεῖται. 68. Οἱ ἐφιδρῶντες ἄγρυπνοι ἀναθερμαινόμενοι κακόν. 69. Ἐξ ὀσφύος ἀναδρομή, ὀφθαλμῶν ἴλλωσις κακόν. 70. Ὀδύνη ἐς τὸ στῆθος ἱδρυνθεῖσα σὺν νωθρό- τητι κακόν: ἐπιπυρετήναντες οὗτοι καυστιϊκοὶ ὀξέως θνήσκουσιν. 71. Οἱ ἐπανεμεῦντες μέλανα ἀπόσιτοι παράφοροι Kal’ ἥβην μικρὰ κινδυνώδεες. οἷσιν ὄμμα θρασὺ ἢ κεκλιμένον, Tovtous! μὴ φαρμακεύειν, ὀλέθριον γάρ. μηδὲ τοὺς ὑποιδέοντας, σκοτώδεας ἐν τῷ πλανᾶσθαι ἐκλιμπάνοντας ἀποσίτους ἀχρόους. μηδὲ τοὺς ἐν πυρετῷ καυματώδει κατακεκλασμένους, ὀλέθριον γάρ. 1 Aldina after Galen: -τοισι I. 184 PRORRHETIC I 62. To vomit unmixed material in association with nausea bodes ill. 63. Drowsiness: is it a totally bad sign? 64. Loss of understanding in conjunction with chills is a bad sign; bad also is forgetfulness. 65. To be cooled subsequent to chills and not to be warmed again is bad. 66. To sweat subsequent to cooling and not be warmed again is a bad sign; if, in these patients, this is fol- lowed by burning heat in the side, any pain or subsequent chill is a bad sign. 67. Chills accompanied by coma are quite dangerous; fiery redness of the face after sweating is also a bad sign. In these patients a coldness of the back region announces a convulsion. 68. For sleepless persons who perspire over their body to be warmed up is a bad sign. 69. A pain shooting up from the loins, if accompanied by strabismus of the eyes, is a bad sign. 70. For a pain to become fixed in the chest at the same time there is torpor is a bad sign; if these patients later develop fever, they quickly succumb from the burning heat. 71. Persons in puberty that vomit up dark material, lose their appetite, and suffer derangement are in little danger. To persons who have one eye that protrudes or is slanted do not give purgative medications, since it would be fatal; nor to those with any degree of swelling, who are dizzy, who lose consciousness and have irregular move- ments, who lack appetite, or who have a bad colour; nor to those worn down by an ardent fever, for this would be lethal. 185 530 IIPOPPHTIKON A 1 καὶ 72. Καρδίης πόνος ἅμα ὑποχονδρίῳ ξυντόνῳ 7 , Ve > A eA κεφαλαλγίῃ κακόηθες καί τι ἀσθματῶδες ἐνίοτε: 5 s eo > ¢ A ε Ν ᾽’ὕ 5 apa γε οὗτοι ἐξαίφνης τελευτῶσιν, ὡς καὶ Λύσις ἐν > A ΄ > Οδησσῷ; τούτῳ οὖρα ἐζυμωμένα κατέρυθρα ἐγέ- veto βιαίως. 73. Τραχήλου πόνος κακὸν μὲν ἐν παντὶ πυρετῷ" κάκιστον δὲ καὶ οἷσιν ἐκμανῆναι ἐλπίς. 74. Κοπιώδεες, κωματώδεες, ἄγρυπνοι, ἀχλυώ- δεες, ἐφιδρῶντες πυρετοὶ κακοήθεες. 75. Αἱ ἐκ νώτου φρίκαι πυκναὶ καὶ ὀξέως | μετα- a 4 ” > la > 4 πίπτουσαι δύσφοροι. οὔρων ἀπόληψιν ἐπώδυνον σημαίνουσιν. 76. Οἱ ἀσώδεες ἀνημέτως παροξυνόμενοι κακόν. 77. Κατάψυξις μετὰ σκληρυσμοῦ σημεῖον ὀλέ- θριον. 78. “Amo κοιλίης λεπτὰ μὴ αἰσθανομένῳ διιέναι ἐόντι παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ κακόν, οἷον τῷ ἡπατικῷ. 79. Τὰ μικρὰ ἐμέσματα χολώδεα κακόν, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἐὰν ἐπαγρυπνῶσι: μυκτὴρ ἐν τούτοισιν ἀπο- ’ > 4 στάζων ὀλέθριον. e > 4 , > ΄ Ν Ψ 80. Αἷς ἐκ τόκων λευκά: ἐπιστάντων δὲ ἅμα A 4 νιν > Ν > 4 > “Ὁ > , πυρετῷ κώφωσις Kai ἐς πλευρὸν ὀδύνη ὀξεῖα ἐνίστα- ται: ὀλέθριον. 81. [Oi]? ἐν πυρετοῖσι καυσώδεσιν ὑποπερι- ψύχουσι, διαχωρήμασιν ὑδατοχόλοισι, συχνοῖσιν 1 H2 after Galen: -ropos I. ? Del. Littré. 186 PRORRHETIC I 72. Pain in the cardia, in conjunction with tension of the hypochondrium and headache, is malignant, and sometimes associated with a degree of breathlessness: do these patients suddenly die like Lysis in Odessus? He developed very effervescent, reddened urines. 73. A pain in the neck is a bad sign in every fever, but worst in patients in whom there is reason to expect delirium. 74. Fevers accompanied by weariness, coma, sleep- lessness, dimness of vision, and sweating over the whole body are malignant. 75. Chills starting from the back that are frequent and change rapidly are hard to bear; they signal a painful blockage of the urine. 76. Exacerbations of nausea unaccompanied by vom- iting are a bad sign. 77. Chills together with constipation are a fatal sign. 78. For thin evacuations of the cavity to be passed unawares by a person who is in his senses is a bad sign, just as in a patient with a liver complaint. 79. Scanty bilious vomitus is a bad sign, especially if the patients remain awake; in these a dripping nose is a fatal sign. 80. It is a fatal sign for women, who after giving birth have been subject to transient white fluxes which ended with a fever, to be attacked by deafness and a sharp pain in the side. 81. In ardent fevers accompanied by slight shivering and recurring watery, bilious evacuations, an eye looking 187 532 IIPOPPHTIKON A ὀφθαλμός [ze]! ἰλλαίνας" σημεῖον κακόν, ἄλλως TE καὶ ἢν κάτοχοι γένωνται. 82. Τὰ ἐξαίφνης ἀποπληκτικὰ λελυμένως ἐπιπυ- ρετήναντα χρόνῳ ὀλέθρια, οἷόν τι ἐπεπόνθει καὶ ὁ Νουμηνίου υἱός. 83. Ἧισιν ἐξ ὀσφύος ἀλγήματος ἀναδρομὴ ἐς καρδίην πυρετῶδες, φρικῶδες: ἀνεμέουσαι ὑδατώδεα, λεπτά, πλέονα, | παρενεχθεῖσαι ἄφωνοι: ἐμέσασαι μέλανα τελευτῶσιν. 84. Ὄμματος κατάκλεισις ἐν ὀξέσι κακόν. 85. “Apa γε τοῖσιν ἀσώδεσιν ἀνημέτοισιν, ὀσφυαλγέσιν, ἢν ὀλίγα θρασέως παρακρούσωσιν, ἐλπὶς μέλανα διελθεῖν; 86. Φάρυγξ ἐπώδυνος ἰσχνὴ μετὰ δυσφορίης πνιγμώδης ὀλεθρίη ὀξέως. 87. Οἷς πνεῦμα ἀνέλκεται καὶ φωνὴ πνιγμώδης ὁ σπόνδυλός τε ἐγκάθηται, τούτοισιν ἐπὶ τελευτῆς ὡς συσπῶντός τινος πνεῦμα γίνεται. 88. Οἱ κεφαλαλγικοὶ κατόχως παρακρούοντες κοιλίης ἀπολελαμμένης, ὄμμα θρασύνοντες, ἀνθη- pol, ὀπισθοτονώδεες γίνονται. 89. Ἐπὶ ὀμμάτων διαστροφῇ" πυρετώδει, κοπιώ- dev ῥῖγος ὀλέθριον: [ὀξέως. οἷς πνεῦμα ἀνέλκεται: καὶ φωνὴ ἀσαφής" πυρετώδει, κοπιώδει ῥῖγος ὀλέθ- ' Del. H? after Galen manuscripts. ? Polack: ἰλλύνας I. 3 H2 from Galen: -στροφῆς I. 188 PRORRHETIC I awry is a bad sign, especially if these patients become cataleptic. 82. Sudden paralytic conditions followed by mild fevers over an extended time are fatal, as for example the one Numenius’ son suffered. 83. Women who experience a pain shooting up out of their loins towards the cardia and who are febrile and have chills vomit up copious, thin, watery material, become deranged and lose their speech, and they end? by vomiting dark vomitus. 84. The closing of an eye in acute diseases is a bad sign. 85. In patients who experience nausea but do not vomit, and who have pains in the loins, is it to be expected that, if they are delirious in a somewhat violent manner, they will evacuate dark stools? 86. A painful throat without swelling, if accompanied by a general distress, presages suffocation and a rapid death. 87. Patients in whom the breath is drawn short, the voice choked, and the spine depressed, breathe in the end like a person having a spasm. 88. Patients with headaches, who suffer a cataleptic delirium, whose cavity is intercepted, who protrude their eyes, and whose skin is of a good colour, become opistho- tonic. 89. Ina person who is febrile and wearied, strabismus of the eyes followed by a chill is a fatal sign [rapidly. Patients in whom the breath is drawn short, the voice unclear—in a person who is febrile and wearied, a chill is ἃ Alternative translation: “succumb”. 189 534 536 IIPOPPHTIKON A l ὧν ε ΄ὔ΄ δὲ > ΄ ΄ ριον] καὶ οἱ κωματώδεες δὲ ἐν τούτοισι πονηρόν. ε > A Ν «ες / > ΄ 90. Αἱ ἐν πυρετοῖσι πρὸς ὑποχόνδριον ὀδύναι 5 ’ὔ΄ e Lal ’ὕ 7 Δ 3 ἀναύδως, ἱδρῶτι λυόμεναι, κακοήθεες, τούτοισιν ἐς ἰσχία ἀλγήματα ἅμα πυρετῷ καυσώδει: καὶ ἣν κοι- λίη καταρραγῇ. ὀλέθριον. 91. Οἷσιν αἱ φωναὶ ἅμα πυρετῷ ἐκλείπουσι μετὰ Ι ἀκρασίης τρομώδεες καὶ κωματώδεες τελευτῶσιν. 92. Οἷσι καυστικά, μεμωρωμένα, κάτοχα, ποι- κίλλοντα ὑποχόνδρια καὶ κοιλίην ἐπηρμένοι σίτων 5 , > A 5 ΄ \ ἀπολελαμμένων ἐφιδροῦσιν: ἦρα τούτοισι τὸ θολε- Ν lal ἣν Ν ἊΝ Ν 4 / pov πνεῦμα Kal TO γονοειδὲς διελθὸν λύγγας σημαΐί- ἣν 4 AL ow. 4 4 νει; καὶ κοιλίη δὲ ἔπαφρα χολώδεα προσδιέρχεται; Ν A > , 5 ἊΝ > 4 ‘\ TO λαμπῶδες ἐν τούτοισιν οὐρηθὲν ἐπωφελέει-: καὶ κοιλίαι δὲ τούτοισιν ἐπιταράσσονται. 93. Οἷσι κῶμα γίνεται ἐπ᾽ ὀμμάτων διαστροφῆς, [ὀλέθριον ὀξέως: οἷσι πνεῦμα ἀνέλκεται, φωνὴ δὲ 7) > Ν ΡΣ; ΄ ΄ Ν acadns|* ἐπάφρων προσδιελθόντων πυρετὸς παρο- EVVETAL. 94. Kai ἐκ κεφαλαλγίης ἀφωνίαι ἅμα ἱδρῶτι 4 4 A e Ν / > πυρετώδεες λυγγώδεες: χαλῶντα ὑπὸ odds, ἐπαν- ιόντα χρονιώτερα: ἐπιρριϊγοῦν τούτοισι πονηρόν. 95. Χεῖρες τρομώδεες, κεφαλαλγέες, τραχήλου > 4 ε 4 > , 4 ὀδυνώδεες, ὑπόκωφοι, οὐρέοντες μέλανα δεδασυσ- 1 Del. H2 after Galen. 2 Del. Polack after Galen. ἃ Repetitions from chapters 86 and 87 above, and from the beginning of this chapter. 190 PRORRHETIC I a fatal sign], and those of them with coma are also in an evil way. 90. In a person who loses his speech, pains to the hypochondrium that occur during fevers and are resolved with a sweat are malignant: these patients have pains that move to the hip-joints, and at the same time an ardent fever; if the cavity has a violent discharge, it is also a fatal sign. 91. Patients who lose their speech during a fever die incontinent, of tremor and coma. 92. In persons with burning fever, stupor, catalepsy and variation in the state of their hypochondrium, and who also swell up in the cavity, because of the obstruction of foods, and sweat over their whole body, does laboured breathing and the passage of material like seed indicate the onset of hiccups? Does their cavity also evacuate frothy, bilious stools? For these patients to pass urine with a scum on it is an advantageous sign. Their cavities are also disturbed. 93. In cases where coma comes on after strabismus of the eyes [it presages a rapid death. Patients in whom the breath is drawn short and the voice unclear], if frothy evacuations occur the fever grows virulent. 94. Loss of speech subsequent to a headache, if accompanied by sweating, also indicates fever and hiccups®; evacuations during these are recurrent and quite longstanding. For these patients to have chills afterwards is an evil sign. 95. Trembling of the hands, headache, pains in throat, partial loss of hearing, dark, cloudy urines: in whomever > A repetition from chapters 86 and 87 above; cf. also chapter 89. © Cf. chapter 92 above. 191 538 540 IIPOPPHTIKON A ΄, e A re ΄ tA “ μένα, οἷσι ταῦτα ἢ, προσδέχεσθαι μέλανα ἥξειν, > / ὀλέθριον. 96. Αἱ μετὰ ἐκλύσιος κατόχως ἀφωνίαι ὀλέθριοι. 97. Πλευροῦ ἀλγήματα ἐν πτύσει χολώδει ἀλό- > , > Pr yos ἀφανισθέντα ἐξίσταται. 5 / 5 ᾽ὔὕ / ες / 98. Ev τραχήλου ἀλγήματι κωματώδει, ἱδρώδει ΄,ὕ | a > ΄ Ν 5 ΄ ε Ν κοιλίη φυσηϊθεῖσα, εἰ δέ τι πρὸς ἀνάγκην, ὑγρὰ A e A > / 57 5 v2 χαλῶσα, ὑποπεριπλυθεῖσα ἐκ τούτων ἄχολα, ἐξί- σταται. τὰ τοιαῦτα διασωζόμενα μακροτέρως διανο- σέει. ἦρά γε καί εἰσιν αἱ ἄχολοι περιπλύσιες εὐηθέ- στεραι καὶ τὸ φυσῶδες ὄγκῳ προσωφελέει; ἊΝ / A > / e A 99. Κοιλίης περίτασις [πρὸς ἀνάγκην vypa χαλῶσα,]} ταχὺ ὀγκυλωμένη, ἔχει τι σπασμῶδες, οἷον καὶ τῷ ᾿Ασπασίου υἷῳ: τὸ ἐπιρριγοῦν τούτοισιν > ᾽ὔὕ 5» ᾽ὔὕ i A A > ὀλέθριον: ἐκ τούτων σπασμώδης γενηθεὶς Kai ἐμφυ- σηθείς, μακροτέρως διανοσήσας, στόμα σαπεὶς χλωρὸν ἀπεγένετο. 100. Ta κατ᾽ ὀσφὺν καὶ λεπτὸν χρόνια ἀλγήματα καί τι πρὸς ὑποχόνδρια γριφώμενα ἀποσιτικὰ ἅμα a Τῷ > Ν 57 / > Ν πυρετῷ" | TOUTW €S κεφαλὴν ἄλγημα σύντονον ἐλθὸν κτείνει ὀξέως τρόπον σπασμώδεα. Ν 5 “ Ἂς > / A 101. Ta ἐπιρριγοῦντα καὶ ἐς νύκτα μᾶλλον παρο- , ” , 9 > A “ ξυνόμενα, ἄγρυπνα, φλεδονώδεα" ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις, ἔστιν ὅτε οὔρεα ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοὺς χαλῶντα ἐς σπασμοὺς 3 A , ἀποτελευτᾷ κωματώδεας. 1 Del. Potter. 2 Littré after Galen: φλεγμον- I. 192 PRORRHETIC I these things occur expect dark material to come: a fatal sign. 96. Loss of speech in conjunction with a cataleptic weakness is a fatal sign. 97. When pains in the side associated with bilious expectoration disappear without any reason patients become delirious. 98. In the case of a pain in the neck accompanied by coma and sweating, if the cavity fills up with wind and if at all forced releases moist stools, and on being washed downwards non-bilious material comes out of these, the patient becomes deranged. Such cases, even when recov- ery occurs, remain ill for a longer period of time. Are these non-bilious washings really benign? Does the wind assist by means of its mass? 99. Distension of the cavity [, if forced, releases moist stools]* that quickly swells up suggests a convulsion, as in the son of Aspasius. For chills to follow in these patients is a fatal sign. One patient who became convulsive and was puffed up with wind remained ill for quite a long time, and then, forming yellow-green pus in his mouth, died. 100. Chronic pains in the loins and flanks that lanci- nate to any degree towards the hypochondrium, provoke a distaste for food and bring on fever—in such a patient a violent pain moving to his head quickly kills him by con- vulsions. 101. Chills occurring during diseases that have their exacerbations more at night, if accompanied by sleepless- ness, babbling in the sleep, and sometimes urinary incon- tinence, end in convulsions and coma. 4 See chapter 98 above. 193 542 544 IIPOPPHTIKON A 102. Οἱ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἐφιδρῶντες οὔροισι πέποσι, KAVOTLKOL, ἀκρίτως περιψύχοντες, διὰ ταχέων περι- γι Ψ, 4 ’ὔ΄ > 4 καέες, νωθροί, κωματώδεες, σπασμώδεες, ὀλέθριοι. 103. Τῇσι δὲ ἐπιφόροισι κεφαλαλγικὰ καρώδεα ἣν ΄ “4 A ” ἊΝ ᾽ὔ Ν μετὰ βάρους γινόμενα φαῦλα, ἴσως δὲ ταύτῃσι καὶ “ 4 “ > “ σπασμῶδές τι παθεῖν ὀφείλει. 104. Καὶ τὰ ἐν | φάρυγγι ἰσχνῷ ἀλγήματα πνι- 4 », A A Ν 5 ΩΝ γώδεα ἔχει τι σπασμῶδες, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἀπὸ κεφα- λῆς ὁρμῶντα, οἷον καὶ τῇ Θρασύνοντος ἀνεψιῇ. 105. Τὰ τρομώδεα σπασμώδεα γινόμενα ἐφι- δρῶσι φιλυπόστροφα: τούτοισι κρίσις ἐπιρριγώσα- σιν. οὗτοι ἐπιρριγέουσι περὶ κοιλίην καύματι προ- κληθέντες. 106. Ὀσφύος πόνος κεφαλαλγικῷ καὶ καρδιαλ- γικῷ μετὰ ἀναχρέμψιος βιαίης ἔχει τι σπασμῶδες. 107. +Tovro ἄφονον, ἅμα κρίσις, ῥῖγος. 108. ᾿Απὸ κοιλίης | ὑποπέλια ταραχώδεα καὶ οὖρα λεπτά, ὑδατώδεα ὕποπτα. 109. Φάρυγξ τρηχυνθεὶς ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγον καὶ ἡ κοιλίη βορβορύζουσα κενῇσιν ἐξαναστάσεσι καὶ μετώπου y+ 4 ¢ > vn Ν ἄλγημα, ψηλαφώδεες, κοπιώδεες, ἐν στρώμασι καὶ ἱματίοισιν ὀδυνώδεες, τὰ ἐκ τούτων αὐξόμενα δύσκολα. ὕπνος ἐν τούτοισι πολύς, σπασμώδεες καὶ τὰ ἐς μέτωπον ἀλγήματα βαρέα καὶ οὔρησις δυσκο- , λαίνουσα. 194 PRORRHETIC I 102. Patients that sweat over their whole bodies from the beginning, and have mature urines, that have burning heat, are cooled without a crisis and then quickly become burning hot again, and that suffer torpor, coma and a ten- dency to convulsions, are doomed. 103. In pregnant women, for stuporous headaches to arise in conjunction with a feeling of heaviness is an indif- ferent sign, and they are probably bound to suffer some sort of convulsion. 104. To have suffocating pains in the throat in the absence of any swelling gives an indication of convulsions, especially if the pains start out from the head, as for example in the female cousin of Thrasynon. 105. Trembling and convulsions that occur in con- junction with sweating over the whole body tend to relapse; in these patients, the crisis occurs when a later chill arrives; they become chilled after being warmed by burning heat about the cavity. 106. Pain in the loins in conjunction with headache, pain in the cardia, and violent expectoration gives an indi- cation of convulsions. 107. + This loss of speech ... at the same time crisis and chills. + 108. Mildly livid discharges from the cavity, and urines that are smooth and watery, are suspicious. 109. The throat becoming rough over a short period of time, the cavity rumbling with empty contractions, and pain in the forehead; persons who grope about with their hands, who are wearied, and who are pained by their blankets and clothes: what grow out of these things are troublesome. Sleep in these persons is excessive, they tend to have convulsions, the pains in their forehead are severe, and their micturition is difficult. 195 546 548 TIIPOPPHTIKON A Ν BA > / i ε͵ὔ + a ας a 110. Kat ovpov ἐπίστασις, ols ρίγεα ἐπὶ τοῖσι σπασμώδεσι καὶ tws αὐτὴ dpi~acat ἐφιδρῶσιν. 111. Αἱ ἐς ἄκρητα τελευτῶσαι καθάρσιες | ἐν πᾶσι μὲν παροξυντικαί: τούτοισι δὲ καὶ πάνυ. ἐκ τοιούτων καὶ τὰ παρ᾽ οὖς ἀνίστανται. 112. Καὶ αἱ ταραχώδεες θρασύταται ἐπεγέρσιες ΄ ” \ 3. Ὁ A σπασμώδεες, ἄλλως TE καὶ μεθ᾽ ἱδρῶτος. 113. Καὶ αἱ τοῦ τραχήλου καὶ μεταφρένου κατα- i Ν oe a ΄ > , Kat ὅλου τοῦ σωματος" εν του- ψύξιες δοκέουσαι τοισι δὲ καὶ πυώδεες οὐρήσιες [καὶ ἀφρώδεες " ἅμα ἀψυχίῃ καὶ ὄμματος ἀμαύρωσις σπασμὸν ἐγγὺς σημαίνει. 114. ΠΠήχεων ἀλγήματα μετὰ τραχήλου σπασμώδεα, ἀπὸ προσώπου δὲ ταῦτα: καὶ κατὰ φάρυγγα ὠχροΐ, taxvol, πτυαλίζοντες, ἐν τούτοισιν ε > | « ἱὃ A > , 3 > ΄ οἱ ἐν | ὕπνοισιν ἱδρῶτες [ἐν τούτοισιν" ἀγαθόν. ay ΄ Ν aA ¢ lal ΄ A , apa γε καὶ τῷ ἱδρῶτι κουφίζεσθαι τοῖσι πλείστοισιν οὐ πονηρόν; οἱ ἐς τὰ κάτω πόνοι τούτοισι εὔφοροι. 115. Οἱ ἐν πυρετοῖσιν ἐφιδρῶντες, κεφαλαλγέες ΄ > / 4 50 κοιλίης ἀπολελαμμένης" σπασμώδεες. 116. Τὰ ὑποψάθυρα ὑγρὰ διαχωρήματα περιψύ- χοντα οὐκ ἀπύρως φλαῦρα, τὰ ἐπὶ τούτοισι ῥίγεα / \ , > / > / εν κύστιν καὶ κοιλίην ἐπιλαμβάνοντα ὀδυνώδεα. ἦρα A » Ὁ“ a“ TO κωματῶδες τούτοισιν ἔχει TL σπασμῶδες; οὐκ ἂν θαυμάσαιμι. ΤᾺ after Galen: ἐοῦσαι I. 2 Del. Polack. 3 Del. R after Galen. 4 R after Galen: - μένοι 1. 196 PRORRHETIC I 110. Stoppage of urine, too, occurs in persons who have chills subsequent to a convulsion, and + as it shud- ders + in persons who perspire over their whole body. 111. Cleanings that end in an unmixed state are in all cases associated with paroxysms, in the ones mentioned especially so. Subsequent to such things, the region be- side the ear also swells up. 112. Waking up in a disturbed, over-bold state also indicates the onset of convulsions, especially if it is ac- companied by sweating. 113. Also chills of the neck and back that seem to occupy the whole body; in these patients the passage of purulent [and frothy] urines, associated with fainting and dimness of the eye, indicates that a convulsion is near. 114. Pains of the forearms and the neck announce convulsions; these originate from the face. In patients that are yellow-green in the throat, have no swelling, and salivate, to sweat during sleep is a good sign. Is it not injurious, in most cases, to be relieved by the sweat? Pains moving to the lower parts in these patients are easy to bear. 115. If fever patients who sweat over their whole bod- ies and have headaches become obstructed in their cavity, they are liable to convulsions. 116. To pass loose, moist stools that chill and provoke fever is an indifferent sign; subsequent chills that affect the bladder and cavity are painful. Does the presence of coma in these patients give any indication of convulsions? I would not be surprised. 197 550 552 LPO PERK O INGA 117. Ta ἐν ὀξέσιν ἐμετωδέως ἑλκόμενα φλαῦρα Ν ς Ν ΄ | ΄ 2 καὶ αἱ λευκαὶ διαχωρήσιες | δύσκολοι. περίγλισχρα > 4 “4 > , , Lal ἐκ τοιούτων διελθόντα ἐξίσταται καύματι πολλῷ. ἄρα ἐκ τούτων κωματώδεες νωθροὶ ὑποσπασμώδεες [νωθροὶ]! ἐπιγίνονται; ἐκ τοιούτων μακροτέρως ἐπι- νοσεῖ. NPA γε περὶ κρίσιν οὗτοι χολώδεες δύσπνοοι; 118. Τὰ ἐξ ὀσφύος ἐς τράχηλον καὶ κεφαλὴν ἀναδιδόντα παραλύσαντα παραπληκτικὸν τρόπον σπασμώδεα παρακρουστικά: ἄρα καὶ λύεται τὰ τοι- αῦτα σπασμῷ; ἐκ τῶν τοιούτων ποικίλως διανοσέ- ουσι διὰ τῶν αὐτῶν ἰόντες. « 5 ε ~ 5 , Ν > 119. Ou ἐν υστερικοισιν ἀπύροις σπασμοὶ εὔχε- / - \ ΄ pées οἷον καὶ Δορκάδι. 120. Κύστις ἀποληφθεῖσα ἄλλως τε καὶ μετὰ , 5, “ ‘\ / > κεφαλαλγίης ἔχει TL σπασμῶδες. TA ναρκωδέως ἐν 7 > / 4 > Ν > , τοιούτοισιν ἐκλυόμενα δύσκολα, οὐ μὴν ὀλέθρια. Apa γε καὶ παρακρουστικὸν τὸ τοιοῦτον; 121. Ἦρά γε καὶ κατὰ | κρόταφον ὀστέων δια- κοπαὶ σπασμὸν ἐπικαλέονται; τὸν μεθύοντα πληγῆ- ναι πολὺ ἐν ἀρχαῖσι τοῦτο ποιεῖ. 122. Τὰ σπασμώδεα ἐν ἱδρῶτι πτύελα παραρ- ρέοντα πυρετώδει ἐόντι εὐήθεα. pa γε τούτοισιν ἐπί τινας ἡμέρας κοιλίαι καθυγραίνονται; οἴομαι δὲ τούτοισιν ἐς ἄρθρον ἀπόστημα ἔσεσθαι. 123. Τὰ ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγον θρασέως παρακρούοντα ᾽ὔ >) Ν Ν 5 Ἂν ’΄ εὺ ΄ὔ μελαγχολικά: ἢν δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ γυναικείων ἢ, θηριώ- 1 Del. Polack. 198 PRORRHETIC I 117. In acute diseases, retching is an indifferent sign, and the passage of white motions troublesome. With sticky material passing after that, the person loses his senses and has great burning heat. Is this followed by a comatose torpor and a tendency to convulsions? From such conditions the illness goes on for a longer time. Do these patients suffer from bile and dyspnoea about the crisis? 118. Paralyses that move up from the loins to the neck and head, disabling in the manner of apoplexy, lead to convulsions and delirium. Are such conditions resolved by the convulsions? After them patients experience changing symptoms and go through the same stages. 119. Convulsions in afebrile hysterical disorders are easy to manage, as for example in the case of Dorcas. 120. Stoppage of the bladder, especially in association with headache, gives some indication of convulsions. For such patients to have numbness when they recover is troublesome, but not in the least dangerous. Does such a condition also incline towards delirium? 121. Do gashes to the bones at the temple also pro- voke a convulsion? For a drunken person to be struck hard does, right at the beginning. 122. Convulsions and excessive salivation during a sweat in a person with fever are benign. Does the cavity remain very moist over a number of days in these patients? I believe they will suffer an abscession to some joint. 123. Delirium characterized by over-boldness for short periods indicates melancholy; if it arises from the 4 Cf. chapter 26 above. 199 554 556 POP PTO NGA ὩΣ δεα: ἐπὶ πλέον δὲ ταῦτα ξυμπίπτει: ἦρά γε καὶ σπασμώδεες αὗται; GPa γε καὶ μετὰ κάρου ἀφωνίαι σπασμώδεες; οἷον τῇ τοῦ | σκυτέως θυγατρί: ἤρξατο γυναικείων παρεόντων πυρέξαι. 124. Οἷσι σπασμώδεσι ὀφθαλμοὶ ἐκλάμπουσιν ἀτενές, οὔτε παρὰ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς εἰσί, διανοσέουσί τε μακροτέρως. 125. Τὰ ἀνάπαλιν αἱμορραγεῦντα κακὸν οἷον ἐπὶ σπληνὶ [φλεγμαίνοντι]ῖ μεγάλῳ ἐκ δεξιοῦ ῥυέντα καὶ τὰ Kal’ ὑποχόνδριον ὡσαύτως. ἐφιδρῶντι δὲ κάκιον." 126. Τὰ ἐκ ῥινῶν μικροῖς ἱδρῶσι περιψυχόμενα κακοήθεα. 127. Μεθ’ αἱμορραγίην μελάνων δίοδος κακόν, πονηρὸν δὲ καὶ τὰ ἐξερυθρώδεα. ἦρά γε τεταρταῖα αἱμορραγῆσαι; κωματώδεες ἐκ τοιούτων σπασμῷ τελευτῶσιν: Apa μελάνων προδιελθόντων | καὶ κοι- λίης ἐπαρθείσης; 128. Τὰ αἱμορραγέοντα ἐφιδροῦντα κακοήθεα: ovTOL συντόμως διαλεγόμενοι λαθραίως τελευτῶσι. 129. Μεθ’ αἱμορραγίην βραχείην καὶ μελάνων διαχώρησιν ἐν ὀξέσι κώφωσις κακόν: αἵματος δια- χώρησις τούτοισιν ὀλέθριον, κώφωσιν δὲ λύει. 130. Ἔν ὀσφύι ἐπωδύνῳ καρδιαλγικὰ προσιόντα σημεῖα αἱμορροώδεα, οἶμαι δὲ καὶ προγενόμενα. 131. Τὰ τεταγμένοισι χρόνοισιν αἱμορραγεῦντα ! Del. Aldina. 2 Aldina after Galen: κακόν I. 200 PRORRHETIC I menses, it is malignant—these often coincide. Are these women subject to convulsions? Is loss of speech in con- junction with stupor also indicative of convulsions?—as for example in the shoemaker’s daughter: her fever began during her menses. 124. Persons with convulsions whose eyes are bright and fixed, and who are out of their senses, remain ill for an extended period of time. 125. To lose blood on the opposite side is a bad sign, as for example to bleed on the right side in cases of splenomegaly or other such conditions about the hypo- chondrium; in a person who is perspiring over the whole body it is even worse. 126. To be cooled by a nose-bleed in association with minor sweating is a malignant sign. 127. To pass black stools after a haemorrhage is a bad sign, and very red evacuations bode ill too. Do these haemorrhages occur on the fourth day? Patients who become comatose after these signs end by having convul- sions. Have dark stools passed through before; has the cavity been raised? 128. Haemorrhage in conjunction with sweating over the whole body is malignant; these patients speak only briefly, before dying without any obvious reason. 129. To become deaf in acute diseases after a brief haemorrhage and passing dark stools is a bad sign. For these patients to pass blood in their stools is a fatal sign, although it does relieve their deafness. 130. In a patient with lumbar pain the addition of a pain in the cardia presages a haemorrhage, and I think also indicates that a haemorrhage has occurred before. 131. Conditions that include haemorrhages at fixed 201 558 560 IIPOPPHTIKON A διψώδεα ἐκλυόμενα: μὴ αἱμορραγήσαντα ἐπιληπτι- κῶς τελευτᾷ. 132. Τὰ εὐθὺ ταϊἱραχώδεα καὶ ἄγρυπνα, ἀποστά- ἕαντα, ἑκταῖα κουφισθέντα, νύκτα πονήσαντα, ἐς τὴν αὔριον ἐφιδρώσαντα, κατενεχθέντα, παρακρού- σαντα αἱμορραγέει λάβρως. 133. Οἷσιν αἱμορραγίαι πλείους, παρεληλυθότος χρόνου κοιλίαι πονηρεύονται, ἢν μὴ τὰ οὖρα πεπανθῇ. ἢρά γε τὸ ὑδατῶδες οὖρον τοιοῦτον σημαίνει; 134. Αἱ ἐν κρισίμοισι περιψύξιες τῶν αἱμορραγι- κῶν νεανικαὶ κάκισται. 135. Οἱ καρηβαρικοί, κατὰ βρέγμα ὀδυνώδεες ἄγρυπνοί τε αἱμορραγικοί, ἄλλως τε καὶ HV τι ἐς τράχηλον συντείνῃ. 136. Τὰ ἀγρυπνήσαντα ἐξαίφνης ἀλυσμῷ aipop- ραγικά, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἣν τι προερρυήκῃ" apa γε καὶ φρίξαντα κάτοχα, κεφαλαλγικά; 137. Τραχήλου ὀδυνώδεα, βλέφαρα ὀδυνώδεα, ὄμματα ἐξέρυθρα ἐόντα, αἱμορραγικά. 138. Οἷσι κοιλίης ἐπιστάσης αἱμορραγέει, καὶ ἐπιρριγέουσιν: ἦρά γε τὸ αἱμορραγέειν τούτοισι κοι- λίην λειεντεριώδη ποιέει καὶ ἐπίσκληρον ἢ ἀσκαρί- δας ἢ καὶ ἀμφότερα; 139. Οἷσιν ἐξ ὀσφύος ἀναδρομὴ ἐς κεφαλὴν καὶ χεῖρα ναρκώδεες, καρδιαλγικοὶ ἢ χολώδεες αἷμορ- ραγέουσι λάβρως καὶ κοιλίη καταρρήγνυται, τού- ! H2 after Galen: πεπαίνῃ I. 202 PRORRHETIC I times are resolved through thirst, but if no blood is passed, they end in epilepsy. 132. In a person who suddenly becomes troubled and sleepless, who has a nose-bleed which brings relief on the sixth day, but at night has a turn for the worse, and towards the morning sweats over his whole body, and who is weighed down and delirious, violent haemorrhages will occur. 133. In persons who have many haemorrhages, with the passage of time the cavity gets into a bad state, unless the urines are mature. Does the passage of watery urine point to this condition? 134. In patients with haemorrhages, violent chills on the critical days are a very bad sign. 135. Patients that have heaviness of the head and pain in the bregma suffer sleeplessness and haemorrhages, especially if there is tension in the neck. 136. To be sleepless and then suddenly restless points towards a haemorrhage, especially if there has been any haemorrhage before. Do chills in conjunction with catalepsy also give an indication of headache? 137. Pains in the neck, pains in the eyelids, and the eyes being very red indicate the onset of haemorrhage. 138. Patients who have haemorrhages in conjunction with a stoppage of the cavity will also have chills. Does their bleeding make the cavity lienteric and somewhat constipated? Or does it engender worms? Or does it do both? 139. Patients in whom a pain shoots up from the loins to the head, who become numb in a hand, who have pain about their cardia, and who are bilious bleed violently and have a violent discharge of the cavity: generally their 203 562 564 IMPOR PLURK ON SAT A 4 e > ‘A ἊΝ 7) τοις γνῶμαι ταραχώδεες ὡς ἐπὶ TO πολύ. 140. Οἷσιν ἐφ᾽ αἱμορραγίῃ λάβρῃ πυκνὴ μελά- νων συχνῶν διαχώρησις, ἐπιστάσης δὲ αἱμορραγέ- e , | > ΄ “ Ἂς a , ovow, οὗτοι κοιλίας | ὀδυνώδεες ἅμα δὲ τῇσι φύσῃ- σιν εὔφοροι. ἦρα οἱ τοιοῦτοι ψυχροῖσιν ἐφιδροῦσι πολλοῖσι; τὸ ἀνατεταραγμένον ἐν τούτοισιν οὖρον > Ν > ΗΝ A e ’ 4 > Ν οὐ πονηρὸν οὐδὲ τὸ ὑφιστάμενον γονοειδές. ἐπὶ ἊΝ ΑΝ - ε Ἧ > ΄ὔ συχνὸν δὲ οὗτοι ὑδατώδεα οὐρέουσιν. 141. Οἷσιν ἀπὸ ῥινῶν ἐπὶ κωφώσει καὶ νωθρίῃ μικρὰ ἀπόσταξις, ἔχει τι δύσκολον: ἔμετος τούτοισι ξυμφέρει καὶ κοιλίης ταραχή. 142. Αἷς ἐκ ῥίγεος πυρετοὶ κοπιώδεες, γυναικεῖα κατατρέχει: τράχηλος ἐν τούτοισιν ὀδυνώδης αἷμορ- ραγικόν. 143. Τὰ σείοντα κεφαλῆς καὶ τὰ ἠχώδεα αἷμορ- / a al / “, Ν ED) ραγέει ἢ γυναικεῖα καταβιβάζει, ἄλλως TE καὶ ἣν κατὰ ῥάχιν καῦμα παρακολουθῇ. ἴσως δὲ καὶ δυσεντερικόν. 144. Οἱ κατὰ κοιλίην παλμοὶ ὑποχονδρίου ἐντά- σει ὑπομάκρῳ | ὀγκώδει αἱμορραγικοί: φρικώδεες οὗτοι. 145. Τὰ ἐκ ῥινῶν λάβρα" βίαια πολλὰ ῥυέντα ΝΜ, , Ξε Ν ΄ ΄ , ἔστι δ᾽ οἷσι σπασμοὺς προάγεται: φλεβοτομίη λύει. 146. Αἱ πυκναὶ καὶ κατὰ μικρὰ ἐπαναστάσιες ὑπόξανθοι, γλίσχρα ἔχουσαι μικρὰ κοπρώδεα μετὰ ὑποχονδρίου ἀλγήματος καὶ πλευροῦ ἰκτεριώδεες. ! Potter: κεφαλὰς I. 2 H2 after Galen: λαῦρα I. 204 PRORRHETIC I minds are disordered. 140. Persons who after a violent haemorrhage pass frequent, dark, copious stools, and haemorrhage again when these stop, have pain in the cavity, but bear the internal wind easily. Do these patients break out with copious, cold sweats over their whole body? If their urine contains material stirred up in it this does not bode ill, nor does the presence of a sediment resembling seed. They pass watery urine frequently. 141. For persons with deafness and torpor to have a weak haemorrhage from the nostrils indicates trouble. Vomiting is beneficial for them, as is also an evacuation of the cavity. 142. In women who have a debilitating fever after a chill, the menses run down; if their throat is sore, it sug- gests that a haemorrhage will follow. 143. Agitation of the head and ringing in the ears pro- vokes a haemorrhage or brings down the menses, espe- cially if followed closely by a burning heat along the spine. There is also some probability of dysentery. 144. A throbbing in the cavity together with persistent tension and swelling of the hypochondrium points to a haemorrhage; these patients are likely to shiver. 145. Copious, forceful, violent haemorrhages from the nostrils lead in some persons to convulsions; phle- botomy resolves the condition. 146. Yellowish stools with small, sticky pieces, passed frequently a little at a time in association with pains in the hypochondrium and the side, are a sign of jaundice. Are 205 566 IIPOPPHTIKON A ἦρά ye ἐπαναστάντων τούτων ἐκλύονται; οἶμαι δὲ καὶ αἱμορραγεῖν τούτους, τὰ γὰρ ἐς ὀσφὺν ἀλγή- ματα ἐν τούτοισιν αἱμορραγικά. 147. Ὑποχονδρίου ἔντασις μετὰ καρηβαρίης καὶ κωφώσιος καὶ τὰ πρὸς αὐγὰς ὀχλέοντα αἱμορρα- γικά. 148. Αἱ ἑνδεκαταῖαι στάξιες δύσκολοι, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἣν δὶς ἐπιστάξῃ. 149. Ta | ἐν φρίκῃσιν ἅμα ἱδρώσαντα κρισίμως:" ἐς δὲ τὴν αὔριον φρίξαντα, παραλόγως ἀγρυπνέοντα αἱμορραγήσειν οἴομαι πεπαινομένων. 150. Οἷσιν ἐξ ἀρχῆς αἱμορραγίαι λάβροι ῥῖγος ἵστησι. 151. Τὰ ἐξ αἱμορραγίης ῥίγεα πονηρά. 152. Οἷσι κεφαλαλγίαι καὶ τραχήλου πόνοι καὶ ὅλου δέ τις ἀκράτεια τοῦ σώματος τρομώδης," αἱμορραγίαι λύουσιν. ἀτὰρ καὶ οὕτω χρόνῳ λύον- ται. 153. Οὖρα τοῖσι παρὰ τὰ ὦτα ταχὺ καὶ ἐπ᾽ ὀλί- γον πεπαινόμενα φλαῦρα. καὶ τὸ καταψύχεσθαι ὧδε πονηρόν. 154. Τὰ ὑποκαρώδεα καὶ ἰκτερώδεα οὐ πάνυ 3 > ΄ e ΄ ΄ αἰσθανόμενα, οἷσι λύγγες, κοιλίαι καταρ- 4 yA [αἴτια] vA ΕΣ Ν Ν > ΄ὔ - 5 A ρήγνυνται, ἴσως δὲ Kal ἐπίστασις,“ οὗτοι ἀλλοιοῦν- > ΄ Ν Ν Ἂν Ἂ SY ται" ρα τουτοισι και TA παρα TA WTA; ! Foes: αὐτὰς I. 2 τις... τρομώδης Aldina from Galen: τοῦ σώματος τὰ ἄκρα τρομώδεις I. 206 PRORRHETIC I these patients delivered from the pains by going to stool? I think that they may bleed, too, since pains that move to the loins presage a haemorrhage for them. 147. Tension of the hypochondrium, in association with heaviness of the head, deafness, and impairment of vision, indicates the person will haemorrhage. 148. A nose-bleed on the eleventh day is troubling, especially if it occurs twice. 149. To sweat and at the same time shiver signals the arrival of the crisis; if on the following day there are shiv- ering and unexplained sleeplessness, I think the person will haemorrhage mature blood. 150. In patients that have violent haemorrhages from the beginning, these are checked by a chill. 151. Chills subsequent to a haemorrhage bode ill. 152. In patients with headache, pains in the neck, and a degree of tremulous disability of the whole body, haemorrhages relieve the condition; but even thus, the relief comes only in time. 153. In patients with swellings beside their ears, urines that are passed early and that quickly become mature are an indifferent sign. To become chilly in this condition bodes ill. 154. If, in patients with lethargy and jaundice that are not very well in their senses, hiccups occur, then the cavity has a violent discharge and possibly also a stop- page; these patients are changeable. Does swelling beside the ears also occur in them? 3 Del. Aldina after Galen. 4 Aldina: -στάσης I. 207 568 570 IPOPPHTIKON A 155. Ta ἐπισχόμενα μετὰ plyeos οὖρα πονηρά, ἄλλως τε καὶ προκαρωθέντι.' τὰ πρὸς οὖς ἦρα ἐπὶ τούτοισιν ἐλπίς; 156. Ἔκ στροφωδέων ὑπόστασις ἰλυώδης, ὑπο- πέλιος, | κακή. apa γε ἐκ τοιούτων ὑποχόνδριον ὀδυνᾶται; δοκέω δὲ δεξιόν. ἦρα καὶ ἀχλυώδεες οἱ τοιούτοι καὶ τὰ παρὰ «τὰ ὦτα; τούτοισιν ὀδυνώδεα ἐπ᾿ ὀλίγον; κοιλίη καταρραγεῖσα τούτοισιν ὀλέ- θριον. 157. Ἔν τοῖσιν ἀσώδεσι τὰ παρ᾽ οὖς μάλιστα. 158. [Τὰ] ἐπὶ εἰλεοῖσι δυσώδεσι πυρετῷ ὀξεῖ, ὑποχονδρίῳ μετεώρῳ χρονιωτέρῳ, τὰ παρ᾽ οὖς ἐπαρ- θέντα κτείνει. 159. Ἔκ κωφώσιος ἐπιεικέως τὰ | παρ᾽ ὦτα, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἢν ἀσῶδές τι ἐπιγένηται, καὶ τοῖσι κωματώδεσιν. (160.) Ἐπὶ τούτοισι φλαῦρα τοῖς παραπληκτικοῖσι. 161. Ta σπασμώδεα τρόπον παροξυνόμενα κατό- χως τὰ Tap’ οὖς ἀνίστησι. 162. Τὸ σπασμοτρομῶδες, ἀσῶδες κατόχως σμικρὰ πρὸς οὖς ἀνίστησιν. 163. Ἦρά γε, οἷσι τὰ παρ᾽ ὦτα, κεφαλαλγικοὶ οὗτοι; Hpa γε ἐφιδροῦσι τὰ ἄνω, ἤν τι καὶ ἐπιρρι- γέωσιν; ἦρά γε καὶ κοιλίη καταρρήγνυται; καί τι καὶ κωματώδεες; ἀτὰρ καὶ τὰ ὑδατώδεα οὖρα ἐναιω- ρούμενα λευκοῖσι καὶ τὰ ποικίλως ἔκλευκα δυσώδεα ! Polack after Galen: -θέντα I. 2 Polack: τὰ παρ᾽ ὦτα Galen. 208 PRORRHETIC I 155. For urines to be checked during a chill bodes ill, especially in a person already affected by drowsiness. Should you expect them to swell beside the ears? 156. A slimy, somewhat livid sediment in the urines appearing after a colic is a bad sign. Does pain in the hypochondrium develop out of this? On the right, I think. Do such patients suffer dimness and have pains beside <the ears> for a short time? A violent discharge of the cavity in these patients is a fatal sign. 157. Swelling beside the ear is most common in per- sons with nausea. 158. If, during an acute fever in a case of foul- smelling intestinal obstruction where the hypochondrium is raised for a longer time, the area beside the ear swells up, it kills the person. 159. After deafness, a swelling beside the ears is prob- able, especially if some kind of nausea is experienced, and in patients with coma. (160.) For deaf patients it (i.e. a swelling beside the ears) is an indifferent sign when paral- ysis is present. 161. Cataleptic crises that have a convulsive turn pro- voke swellings beside the ear. 162. Convulsions associated with tremor, nausea and catalepsy cause minor swellings beside the ear. 163. Do swellings beside the ears lead to headaches? Do these patients sweat over the upper part of their bod- ies, when they happen to have chills? Does their cavity have a violent downward discharge? Are they at all comatose? Do watery urines with white material sus- pended in them or variegated white, foul-smelling urines 3 Del. Aldina after Galen. 209 572 IIPOPPHTIKON A. ποιεῖ τὰ παρ᾽ οὖς; ἦρά γε, οἷσι τὰ τοιαῦτα οὖρα, στάξιες πυκναί; ἦρά γε καὶ γλῶσσα τούτοισι λείη; 164. Οἷσι πνευματίῃσιν ἐοῦσιν ἴκτεροι καὶ πυρε- Ν 5 » 3 7 ’ ¢ “ἡ aA τοὶ ὀξέες ἐπιγίνονται, μεθ᾽ ὑποχονδρίων σκληρῶν καταψυχθεῖσι τὰ παρὰ τὰ ὦτα μεγάλα ἀνίσταται. 165ὅ. Τὰ κωματώδεα, ἀσώδεα, ὑποχονδρίου ὀδυ- ὃ S71 Ν > Mt) > ΄ Ν νώδεα ἱμικρὰ] σμικρὰ ἐμετώδεα, ἐν τούτοισι τὰ παρὰ τὸ οὖς ἐπανίσταται, πρόσθεν δὲ καὶ τὰ | περὶ τὸ πρόσωπον. 4 4 7 4 7 166. Κοιλίης μέλανα κοπρώδεα χολώδεα [κροκώ- Sea]? διείσης κῶμα ἐπιφανὲν τὰ Tap’ οὖς ἀνίστησι. 167. Βήχια λεπτὰ μετὰ πτυελισμοῦ ἰόντα τὰ πρὸς οὖς λαπάσσει." 168. Ἔκ κεφαλαλγίης κῶμα καὶ κώφωσις καὶ φωνῆς μώρωσις παρακολουθοῦντα παρ᾽ οὖς τι ἐξε- ρεύγεται. ¢ 7 4 Ν , 169. Ὑποχονδρίου σύστασις μετὰ καύματος 5 / Ἂς 4 ‘\ Ν 3 > , ἀσώδεος Kal κεφαλαλγίης τὰ πρὸς οὖς ἐπαίρει. 4 170. Τὰ ἐπώδυνα παρ᾽ οὖς ἀκρίτως" καταμωλυν- θέντα φλαῦρα. 1 Del. Aldina. 2 Del. Polack. 3 Parisinus Graecus 2145: λάπασι I. 4 Aldina: ἀκρήτως I. 210 PRORRHETIC I provoke swellings beside the ears? In patients with urines of this kind, do frequent nose-bleeds occur? Is their tongue smooth? 164. Patients with difficult breathing in whom jaun- dice and acute fevers occur, and who have chills together with a hardness of the hypochondrium, swell up greatly beside the ears. 165. Patients with coma, nausea, [mild] pain in the hypochondrium, and a slight tendency to vomiting swell up beside the ear, and also anteriorly about the face. 166. If, with the cavity passing dark, fecal, bilious, [saffron-coloured] stools, a coma comes on, it leads to swellings beside the ear. 167. Mild coughs that produce sputum bring down swellings beside the ear. 168. Coma, deafness, and sluggishness of speech fol- lowing closely upon a headache produce some kind of eruption beside the ear. 169. Contraction of the hypochondrium in conjunc- tion with a nauseating burning-heat and headache pro- vokes swellings beside the ear. 170. Painful swellings beside the ear that wither away without any crisis are an indifferent sign. 211 PRORRHETIC II INTRODUCTION Although he clearly knows of the treatise’s existence, Erotian considers it spurious and does not include any word from it in his Glossary.! Galen, on the other hand, glosses six terms from “the greater Prorrhetic (which some call the second).”2 In his treatise Prognostic, he also quotes the line “I, however, shall not prophesy any- thing like this” from ch. 2 of Prorrhetic II, taking the oc- casion to indicate that he agrees with “some physicians who hold Prorrhetic II not to be among the genuine Hip- pocratic books.”° The contents of Prorrhetic II can be summarized as follows: ! See Erotian p. 9, where he lists Prorrhetic I and IT among the semiotic books, and Nachmanson p. 458. 2Galen vol. 19, 69 ayAin; 19, 77 ἀμβλνωσμός; 19, 88 βδέλλῳ; 19, 109f. κατάστημα; 19, 120 μᾶσσον and 19, 149 ὑποξύρους. 19, 127 παράλαμψις also appears to be from Pror- rhetic II (ch. 20), since this is the only occurrence of the word in the Hippocratic Collection. 3 Galen vol. 14, 620 = CMG V 8,1, pp. 88-90. 215 216 1-4: PRORRHETIC II General exposition, with examples, of the possi- bilities and limitations of medical prediction. Signs related to diet Heredity Signs in dropsy Signs in consumptions Signs in gout : Signs in the sacred disease : Signs in ulcers : Signs in wounds : Signs in spreading lesions : Signs in headwounds : Signs in wounds to the joints : Signs in spinal diseases Diagnosis of blood in the throat : Signs in ophthalmias and wounds : Signs of the eye : Signs in dysenteries : Signs in lienteries : Signs indicating fertility in women : Signs in female disorders : Pains and headaches : Facial colouring : Signs of nyctalopia : Signs in splenomegaly : Distortions of the face : Signs concerning recovery : Shoulder pain : Signs in sciatica : Pains and swelling of joints : Signs in skin diseases PRORRHETIC II The account is centred on the symptoms and course of the diseases described, their “differential diagnosis”,4 and their prognosis. No treatments are given, and no specific cases are presented. The text of Prorrhetic II, besides appearing in all the collected editions, receives careful study in: Johannes Opsopoeus, Hippocratis ... Prorrheticorum lib. II ... Graecus et Latinus contextus accurate renovatus ..., Frankfurt, 1587. (=Opsopoeus) More recently, the work was the subject of a French thesis, which I have not been able to consult: B. Mondrain, Edition critique, traduction et commentaire d’un traité hippocratique, le Prorrétique IT, Diss. Paris, 1984. My edition is founded on a collation of the sole inde- pendent manuscript, I, made from microfilm. 4 “Differential diagnosis, the determination of which one of two or more diseases or conditions a patient is suffering from, by systematically comparing and contrasting their symptoms.” Dorland’s Illustrated Medical Dictionary, s.v. 217 IX6 Littré ΠΡΟΡΡΗΤΙΚΟΝΒ a > “ 4 3 , 1. Tov ἰητρῶν προρρήσιες ἀπαγγέλλονται συχναί τε καὶ καλαὶ καὶ θαυμασταΐ, οἵας ἐγὼ μὲν 3, A 5, + » / οὔτ᾽ αὐτὸς προεῖπον οὔτ᾽ ἄλλου του ἤκουσα προλέ- lal x / »Μ γοντος. εἰσι δ᾽ αὐτῶν αἱ μὲν τοιαίδε: ἄνθρωπον 2 > 4 3 Ν A 3 “ A ΄ δοκέειν ὀλέθριον εἶναι καὶ τῷ ἰητρῷ τῷ μελεδαίνοντι > lal ‘ Lal + > , A ad ΩΝ “ αὐτοῦ καὶ τοῖσιν ἄλλοισιν, ἐπεισιόντα δὲ ἰητρὸν ἕτε- A 4 e ἊΝ A A pov εἰπεῖν ὅτι ὁ μὲν ἄνθρωπος οὐκ ἀπολεῖται, A ο , ὀφθαλμῶν δὲ τυφλὸς ἔσται: καὶ παρ᾽ ἕτερον δοκέ- 3, A Ν Ν οντα παγκάκως ἔχειν εἰσελθόντα προειπεῖν τὸν μὲν + 3 , lal Ν Ἂν -“ ἮΝ ἄνθρωπον ἀναστήσεσθαι, χεῖρα δὲ χωλὴν ἕξειν καὶ », Af > 4 > lal > Ν a ἄλλῳ τῳ δοκέοντι οὐ περιέσεσθαι εἰπεῖν αὐτὸν μὲν ε , 5 A Ν A Ν 4 ὑγιέα ἔσεσθαι, TOV δὲ ποδῶν τοὺς δακτύλους μελαν- ᾽ὔ Τὰ ἂν A ’ θέντας ἀποσαπήσεσθαι: καὶ τἄλλα τοιουτότροπα ~ 5 ο x προρρήματα λέγεται ἐν τοιούτῳ τῷ εἴδει. ἕτερος δὲ τρόπος προρρήσιος, ὠνεομένοισί τε καὶ διαπρησσο- A a A ‘\ μένοισι προειπεῖν τοῖσι μὲν θανάτους, τοῖσι δὲ μανίας, τοῖσι δὲ ἄλλας νόσους, ἐπὶ πᾶσι τούτοισί τε ral Ν καὶ τοῖσι προτέροισι χρόνοισι προφητίζειν καὶ ΄ 5 4 ΕΣ Ν A , πάντα ἀληθεύειν. ἄλλο δὲ σχῆμα προρρήσεων ὃ l ΄ Ν > Ν ΄ Ν Ἂς A τόδε" λέγεται: τοὺς ἀθλητὰς γινώσκειν καὶ τοὺς TOV νούσων εἵνεκα γυμναζομένους τε καὶ ταλαιπωρέον- 218 PRORRHETIC II 1. There are reports of physicians making frequent, true and marvellous predictions, predictions such as I have never made myself, nor ever personally heard any- one else make. Here are some examples. A person seems to be mortally ill both to the physician attending him and to others who see him, but a different physician comes in and says that the patient will not die, but go blind in both eyes. In another case where the person looked in a very poor state, the physician that came in foretold that he would recover, but be disabled in one arm; to another person who was apparently not going to survive, one said that he would recover, but that his toes would become black and gangrenous. Other predictions of this kind are reported in the same form. A different type of predicting is to foretell in merchants and adventurers death to some, madness to others, and other diseases to others; and in making revelations concerning present and past times to be correct in every detail. Another form of prediction is recounted as follows: to discover in athletes and in people that are carrying out exercises and exertions prescribed 1 Foes: τάδε I. 219 ITLPOPPHTIKON B » ey Lal " A Tas, ἤν Te ἢ τοῦ σιτίου ἀπολίπωσιν, ἢ ἑτεροῖόν TL a“ an “Δ lal φάγωσιν, ἢ ποτῷ πλέονι χρήσωνται, ἢ τοῦ περιπά- 5 ἊΝ a > 4 4 74 Tov ἀπολίπωσιν, ἢ ἀφροδισίων τι πρήξωσι: τούτων ΄ 20.4 , 2Q5 > ΄ » > πάντων οὐδὲν λανθάνει, οὐδ᾽ εἰ σμικρόν TL εἴη ἀπει- , “ | “ > A e , θήσας ὥνθρωπος. | οὕτως ἐξηκριβῶσθαι οὗτοι πάν- τες οἱ τρόποι λέγονται τῶν προρρησίων. > al A 2. “Ey δὲ τοιαῦτα μὲν ov μαντεύσομαι, σημεῖα δὲ γράφω οἷσι χρὴ τεκμαίρεσθαι τούς τε ὑγιέας ἐσομένους τῶν ἀνθρώπων καὶ τοὺς ἀποθανουμένους, ΄ὔ 5 5 / 1 ΄ὕ a 5 A ε / > / τούς TE ἐν ὀλίγῳ χρόνῳ ἢ EV πολλῷ ὑγιέας ἐσομέ- “. vous ἢ ἀπολουμένους: γέγραπται δέ μοι καὶ περὶ ἀποστασίων ὡς χρὴ ἐπισκέπτεσθαι ἑκάστας. [2.] δοκέω δὲ καὶ τοὺς προειπόντας περί τε τῶν χωλω- σίων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων τῶν τοιούτων ἤδη ἀποστηριζο- μένου τοῦ νοσήματος προειπεῖν, καὶ δήλου ἐόντος ὅτι οὐ παλινδρομήσει ἡ ἀπόστασις, εἴ περ νόον 3 Ν lal oY Ν + ἊΣ 5 / εἶχον, πολὺ μᾶλλον ἢ πρὶν ἄρχεσθαι τὴν ἀπόστα- 4 > / Ν Ν »» » σιν γινομένην. ἐλπίζω δὲ καὶ τἄλλα προρρηθῆναι > / a ε 5 / a Ν cal ἀνθρωπινωτέρως ἢ ws ἐπαγγέλλεται: ἃ δὲ τοῖσιν ὠνεομένοισί τε καὶ περναμένοισι λέγεται προρρηθῆ- ναι, θανάτους τε καὶ νοσήματα καὶ μανίας, ταῦτα δέ μοι δοκέει τοιαῦτα γενέσθαι, καὶ οὐδέν τι χαλεπὰ > A A , \ ΄ ΄ εἶναι προειπεῖν τῷ βουλομένῳ τὰ τοιάδε διαγωνίζε- σθαι. πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ τοὺς ὑφύδρους τε καὶ φθι- Py 3 νώδεας τίς ἂν οὐ γνοίη; ἔπειτα τοὺς παραφρονήσον- 5 Ν ΟΝ Ν ΄ “, > a e Ν τας ἐστι μὴ πολὺ λανθάνειν, ει τις εἰδείη OLOL TO ! Aldina: ὀλιγίστῳ I. ? Linden: ἕφ- I. 220 PRORRHETIC II because of illnesses whether they have failed to eat some of their meal, or have eaten something of a different kind, or have taken too much to drink, or omitted part of their walk, or practised venery; none of these things escapes their notice, not even if the person disobeys in but little. This is how precise all these kinds of predictions are reported to be. 2. I, however, shall not prophesy anything like this; rather I record the clinical signs from which one must deduce which persons will become well and which will die, and which will recover or die in a short or a long time. I have also written about the apostases,* and how one must meditate upon each of them. [2.]> I believe, in fact, that those who make predictions about lameness and other conditions of that kind make their predictions, if they are sensible, only after the disease has become fixed and it is clear that the abscession will not revert, rather than before the abscession begins to occur. I also intend in the other kind of cases to make predictions more in line with human possibilities than what is reported. The reported predictions of such things as death, disease and madness in buyers and sellers, these things have, I think, come to pass somewhat as follows—indeed, it is not so difficult for a person who wants to have successes of this kind to make predictions. In the first place, who would not recognize patients with dropsy or consumption? Fur- ther, cases of impending mental derangement are not very likely to escape one’s notice, if one knows in which ἃ See note on technical terms. b Littré’s chapter 2 begins here. I have followed Vander Lin- den in making a new chapter at the beginning of this paragraph, which seems a more appropriate break. 221 10 IIPOPPHTIKON B / wn vv / ΕΝ ’ὔ νόσημα τοῦτο ἢ ξυγγενές ἐστιν, ἢ πρόσθεν ποτ᾽ 5 / > Ν - ε ΕΣ > / ἐμάνησαν: εἰ yap οὗτοι ot ἄνθρωποι οἰνόφλυγες > x an aN a aN A ‘ A εἶεν, ἢ κρεηφαγοῖεν, ἢ ἀγρυπνοῖεν, ἢ τῷ ψύχει ἢ τῷ 4 S) / ε » \ 5 Pi 5 / θάλπει ἀλογίστως ὁμιλοῖεν, πολλαὶ ἐλπίδες ἐκ τού- των τῶν διαιτημάτων παραφρονῆσαι αὐτούς. | τούς Ν ε oh 4 »᾿, ε ᾽ὔ an -“ τε τὰς αἱμορροΐδας ἔχοντας, εἴ τις ὁρῴη τοῦ χειμῶ- νος πολυποτέοντάς τε καὶ εὐχρόους ἐόντας, ἔστι A Ν Ν Ν » » προειπεῖν ἀμφὶ τούτων: ἐς γὰρ τὸ ἔαρ καταρραγῆναι Ν - Ν 5 / “ 5 / Ἂν ε / τὸ αἷμα πολλαὶ ἐλπίδες, ὥστε ἀχρόους TE καὶ ὑδαλέ- ΄ a ous ὑπὸ τὴν θερείην τούτους εἶναι. » Ν ἊΝ γ / 4 Αλλὰ χρὴ προλέγειν καταμανθάνοντα πάντα ταῦτα, ὅστις τῶν τοιούτων ἐπιθυμέει ἀγωνισμάτων" + Ν ἴω ᾽ὔ ἴω Ν v2 ἔστι Yap EK TOV γεγραμμένων προειπεῖν καὶ θάνα- Ἂς , Ν > ᾽ὔ + shee Ν. 5, τον καὶ μανίην καὶ εὐεξίην. εἴποιμι δ᾽ ἂν καὶ ἄλλα / A > Ν Ν 5 4 5 / πάμπολλα τοιαῦτα, ἀλλὰ τὰ εὐγνωστότατα ἔδοξέ / / Ν ε 72 μοι γράψαι: συμβουλεύω δὲ ws σωφρονεστάτους εἶναι καὶ ἐν τῇ ἄλλῃ τέχνῃ καὶ ἐν τοῖσι τοιούτοισι [ν 57 lal προρρήμασι, γνόντας OTL ἐπιτυχὼν μὲν ἄν τις TOU προρρήματος θαυμασθείη ὑπὸ τοῦ ξυνεόντος ἀλγέ- > a - / \ οντος, ἁμαρτὼν δ᾽ av τις πρὸς τῷ μισεῖσθαι τάχ᾽ ἂν Ν / »,᾿; e Ν oe ΄ὔ / Kal μεμηνέναι δόξειεν. ὧν δὴ ἕνεκα κελεύω σωφρό- Ἂν » / νως τὰ προρρήματα ποιέεσθαι καὶ τἄλλα πάντα [καὶ] 1 ταῦτα: καίτοι γε ἀκούω καὶ ὁρῶ οὔτε κρίνον- ἴω AN. , ἣν / τας ὀρθῶς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὰ λεγόμενά TE καὶ ποι- εύμενα ἐν τῇ τέχνῃ οὔτ᾽ ἀπαγγέλλοντας. > A , 3. ᾿Αμφὶ δὲ τῶν γυμναζομένων καὶ ταλαιπωρεόν- των τὰς μὲν ἀτρεκείας τὰς λεγομένας ὡς λέγουσιν οἱ λέγοντες οὔτε δοκέω εἶναι, οὔτ᾽ εἴ τις δοκέει κωλύω 222 PRORRHETIC II persons this condition is hereditary, or which have ever been mad before; for if these persons give themselves over to drunkenness, or eat meat, or go without sleep, or thoughtlessly come into contact with cold or heat, then the likelihood is great that from these courses of action they will become deranged. Or if one sees sufferers from haemorrhoids who drink copiously and have a ruddy colour in winter, one can make a prediction about them: towards spring there is a great likelihood that a defluxion of blood will occur, so that they will be colourless and watery in the summer. But anyone who desires to win such successes should make predictions only after learning about all these details; it is indeed possible from what is written to fore- tell death, or madness, or good health. I could mention a great many similar things, but have decided to record only what is most common. I advise you to be as cautious as possible not only in other areas of medicine, but also in making predictions of this kind, taking into account that when you are successful in making a prediction you will be admired by the patient you are attending, but when you go wrong you will not only be subject to hatred, but perhaps even be thought mad. For these reasons, then, I recommend that in making predictions and all other such practices you be cautious. And indeed I know, both by what I hear and by what I see, that people neither judge correctly what is said and done in medicine, nor report it accurately. 3. The alleged “precise knowledge” concerning exer- cises and exertions, as those who speak about it call it, I personally hold not to exist, although, if someone does 1 Del. Littré. 223 12 IIPOPPHTIKON B 4 ε Ν , Ν Ν > ἊΝ 4 Ἂς δοκέειν: ὑπὸ σημείου μὲν γὰρ οὐδενὸς βλάπτεται τὰ ὑπονοήματα οὔτε καλοῦ οὔτε κακοῦ, ᾧ χρὴ πιστεύ- > / 2 5 aA > ΄ὔ΄ wy + »Μ σαντα εἰδέναι εἴτε ὀρθῶς ἀπήγγελται εἴτ᾽ οὔ: ἄλλως δὲ ἐκποιέει τῷ βουλομένῳ πιστεύειν, οὐ γὰρ ἐμπο- ἊΝ σ΄ ie Ν > lal », > Ν - a dav ἵσταμαι. δοκέω δὲ αὐτῶν εἴ τι ἀληθὲς λέγεται ἢ A A Ν Ν a , lal τῶνδε TOV περὶ τοὺς γυμναζομένους, ἢ ἐκείνων TOV πρότερον γεγραμμένων, πρῶτον μὲν τῶν σημείων τεκμήρασθαι τοῦτο γνόντα, ἔπειτα ἐνδοιαστῶς τε lal -“ Ἂν ἊΝ Ν καὶ ἀνθρωπίνως προειπεῖν, ἅμα δὲ καὶ τοὺς ἀπαγ- / / aA oN ε 5 / γέλλοντας τερατωδεστέρως διηγεῖσθαι ἢ ws ἐγένετο. ral Ν , Ν ἐπεὶ οὐδ᾽ ἐν τῇσι νούσοισιν εὐπετὲς γινώσκειν τὰ ἁμαρτήματα: καί τοι κατάκεινταί γε οἱ ἄνθρωποι καὶ lal φ Ν διαιτήμασιν | ὀλιγοτρόφοισι χρῶνται, ὥστε μὴ 4 a“ e lal (- ΄ὔ Ν πάμπολλα δεῖ ὁρᾶσθαι ὑποσκεπτόμενον τὸν μελε- δαίνοντα. οἱ μὲν γὰρ πίνουσι μόνον, οἱ δὲ πρὸς τῷ ΄ ov ΕΛ vn 7 > 4 > 4 πίνειν ἢ ῥύφημα ἢ σιτίον ὀλίγιστον ἐπιφέρονται: = A Ν ᾿Ξ A ΄ ἀνάγκη οὖν ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ τοὺς μὲν τῷ ποτῷ πλέονι χρησαμένους δυσπνοωτέρους γίνεσθαι, καὶ οὐρέον- - τας πλέον φαίνεσθαι, τοὺς δὲ τῷ ῥοφήματι ἢ τῷ σιτίῳ πλεονάσαντας διψᾶν τε μᾶλλον καὶ πυρεταί- νειν" εἰ δέ τις ἀμφότερα, καὶ τῷ ποτῷ καὶ τοῖσι περὶ τὰ σιτία ἀμέτρως χρήσαιτο, πρὸς τῷ πυρεταίνειν καὶ δυσπνοεῖν καὶ τὴν γαστέρα περιτεταμένην ἂν καὶ μείζω ἔχειν. Ἔξεστι δὲ καὶ ταῦτα πάντα καταβασανίζειν κάλ- λιστα καὶ τἄλλα τοῖσι δοκιμίοισιν, οἷσιν ἔχομέν τε καὶ χρεόμεθα εὖ πάντα. πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ τῇ γνώμῃ Ν “A > A », "0 TE και TOLOLV ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ἄνθρωπον κατακειμένον 224 PRORRHETIC II believe in it, I will not oppose his belief. For such suppo- sitions are not discredited by any sign, either good or bad, which you can trust in order to be certain whether or not the matter has been accurately reported. At all events, a person who wants to believe may do so, and 1 will not stand in his way. And I believe, if some of these cases— either the latter ones about exercises, or the former ones noted above—have in fact been accurately reported, first that they were recognized on the basis of signs, then that they were foretold tentatively as befits human knowledge, and furthermore that the reporters have related the tale more portentously than it really happened. And in truth even in diseases it is not easy to recognize deviations; for patients rest in bed and employ unnourishing diets, so that, of course, there is not very much for the treating physician to see when he makes his examination. Some patients only drink, while others take besides their drink a very little gruel or food; of necessity, then, in such an instance those who have taken more drink are seen to become more dyspnoic and to pass more urine, while those who have taken more gruel or food will rather be thirsty and have fever. If a patient makes both mistakes, taking excessive amounts of both drink and food, besides having fever and dyspnoea, he will have a distention of the belly and it will swell. It is possible properly to examine all these conditions, as well as any others, by employing the methods of inves- tigation that are available and effectively used. For, in the first place, it is easy to know by judgement and observa- tion, in the case of a person lying ill in a fixed place and 225 14 IMPOR PATIK ONE B wn Lal Ν A ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ Kal ἀτρεκέως διαιτώμενον ῥᾷόν ἐστι A » a γνῶναι, nv τι ἀπειθήσῃ, ἢ περιοδοιπορέοντα καὶ πάμπολλα ἐσθίοντα: ἔπειτα τῇσι χερσὶ ψαύσαντα A ΄ὕ \ A A a , > > τῆς γαστρός τε καὶ τῶν φλεβῶν ἧσσόν ἐστιν ἐξαπα- lal a“ -“ Lal ἴων τᾶσθαι ἢ μὴ ψαύσαντα. αἵ τε ῥῖνες ἐν μὲν τοῖσι ’ὔ΄ A πυρεταίνουσι πολλά TE καὶ καλῶς σημαίνουσιν" αἱ Ἂν 5 Ν / 4 > SS aA > 4 ΄ γὰρ ὀδμαὶ μέγα διαφέρουσιν: ἐν δὲ τοῖσιν ἰσχύουσί 5 A 3S a“ τε Kal ὀρθῶς διαιτωμένοισιν οὐκ οἶδα τί ἂν χρησαί- μην, οὐδ᾽ ἐν τούτῳ τῷ δοκιμίῳ. ἔπειτα τοῖς ὠσὶ τῆς φωνῆς ἀκούσαντα καὶ τοῦ πνεύματος, ἔστι διαγινώ- a A ἴω σκειν, ἃ ἐν τοῖσιν ἰσχύουσιν οὐχ ὁμοίως ἐστὶ δῆλα. 5 a Tid. 1 ΄ a Ν ” A ΄ ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως" πρόσθεν ἢ τὰ ἤθεα τῶν νοσημάτων τε Ν lal > / > / «ς > 4 > Ἄς »" καὶ τῶν ἀλγεόντων ἐκμάθῃ ὁ ἰητρός, οὐ χρὴ προλέ- 9 ΕΝ ο yew οὐδέν: Kal” yap ἂν δυσπνούστερος ὥνθρωπος γένοιτο, | ἔτι πλανωμένης τῆς νόσου, καὶ πυρετή- 4 ο νειεν ὀξυτέρῳ πυρί, καὶ ἡ γαστὴρ ἐπιταθείη: ὥστε Ἂς A 5 > Ν ἊΝ 4 Ἂν, “Δ διὰ ταῦτα οὐκ ἀσφαλὲς προλέγειν πρόσθεν πρὶν ἂν κατάστασιν λαβεῖν τὸ νόσημα: μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον τὸν . “Δ ΄ χρόνον ὅ τι ἂν παράλογον γένηται λέγειν χρή. ἴω ἊΝ Ν Ν ἊΝ 3 7 / 4 4 δῆλα δὲ τὰ διὰ τὴν ἀπειθίην γινόμενα κακά: αἵ τε γὰρ δύσπνοιαι καὶ τἄλλα ταῦτα τῇ ὑστεραίῃ πεπαύ- “Ἀ \ ὍΝ σεται, ἣν δι’ ἁμαρτάδα γένηται: ἣν οὖν τις ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν προϊδὼν" λέγῃ, οὐχ ἁμαρτήσεται. > “ ἴω 4. Ἐγὼ μὲν νῦν τόνδε τὸν τρόπον ἐσηγέομαι τῶν ἐπισκεψίων, καὶ περὶ τῶν οἴκοι μενόντων, οἷα ἐξα- rh Ν A A 4 ἣν. A μαρτάνουσιν, καὶ περὶ τῶν γυμναζομένων TE καὶ τῶν ! Littré: οἵως I. 226 PRORRHETIC II charged with a strict regimen, whether he is disobeying in some matter, or whether he is taking his prescribed walks and eating a great deal. Furthermore, by using your hands to palpate his abdomen and the vessels, you are less likely to make a mistake than if you do not do this. Also, in patients with fevers your nose gives many true indica- tions, for their odours differ greatly, although in persons that are well and following a proper diet I do not know what use I would find for even this criterion. And then, by listening with your ears to the voice and the breathing, it is possible to recognize things that are not equally clear in healthy persons. In any case, until a physician has learned the habits of particular diseases and patients, he ought not to make any prognostication, for while a per- son’s disease is still unsettled, he may become quite short of breath, and suffer a very acute fever, and tightness of his belly; as a result, for this reason it is not safe to make an advance statement before the disease becomes settled. After that time, you should indicate whatever is abnor- mal; for evils that arise because of disobedience will be revealed as such, since the shortness of breath and the rest of the symptoms will cease on the following day, if they arose only because of a dietary mistake. So that if someone sees this crisis in advance and announces it, he will not go wrong. 4. Now I shall explain this type of investigation of the faults committed by those who remain at home, by those who do exercises, and by all the others. People who ΖΗ: ov I. 3H: περιϊδὼν I. 227 16 HP OR PH MKCON as + ΄ \ » 2? ΄ ΄ > ΄ Ν ἄλλων πάντων: τὰς δ᾽ ἀκριβείας κείνας ἀκούω τε καὶ καταγελῶ τῶν ἀπαγγελλόντων: σμικρὰ μὲν γὰρ ἀπειθούντων τῶν ἀνθρώπων, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅπως ἂν λέ eal Pa δ᾽ + ΄ NEE ΄ “ ἐλέγξαιμι:' εἰ δ᾽ εἴη μείζονα τὰ ἁμαρτήματα, ὅντινα Pe « » a τρόπον ὑποσκέπτεσθαι χρὴ γράφω. χρὴ δὲ πρῶτον », - μὲν τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐν ᾧ μέλλει τις γνώσεσθαι τὰ 4 © A A a ἀπειθεύμενα, ἅπασαν ἡμέρην ὁρᾶν ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ TE χωρίῳ καὶ τὴν αὐτὴν ὥρην, μάλιστά T ἦμος ἠέλιος Ν A νεωστὶ καταλάμπει: τοῦτον γὰρ TOV χρόνον UTOKEKE- >) 3, a 3 3, νωμένος ἂν εἴη, καὶ νῆστις ἂν ἔτι ἐστί, καὶ τεταλαι- Ἂν lal A πωρηκὼς οὐδὲν πλὴν τῶν ὀρθρινῶν περιπάτων, ἐν οἷς ἥκιστα ἀπειθεῖ, ἦν γε ἐπανεγερθεὶς ὥνθρωπος ἐς Ν / A © 4 τὴν περίοδον καταστῇ, ὥστε ἀνάγκη τὸν δικαίως / / © A » διαιτώμενον μάλιστα ταύτην τὴν ὥρην ὁμαλῶς ἔχειν a lal , τὴν κατάστασιν τοῦ χρώματός TE καὶ τοῦ ξύμπαντος ΄ \ το γεν 5 ΄ » Δ ΄ >on ” σώματος, διὸ καὶ ὁ ἐπιμελόμενος ὀξύτατός T ἂν εἴη ἂν ἊΝ ΄ Ν Ν 5 Ν ε Ν an Ν καὶ τὸν νόον καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑπὸ τοῦτον τὸν tA 5 4 Ν ‘\ Ν A > , ἴω χρόνον. ἐνθυμέεσθαι δὲ χρὴ καὶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τῆς 9 ΄ A \ ΄ τε γνώμης“ τοὺς τρόπους, τοῦ τε σώματος τὴν δύνα- + ς 5 Ὁ ee , > lal »“ μιν: ἄλλοι γὰρ ἄλλα ῥηϊδίως ἐπιτελοῦσι τῶν προσ- τασσομένων καὶ χαϊλεπῶς. A Ν Ss ε / > / Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν ὁ λιμαγχεόμενος εἰ πλείονα φάγῃ τε καὶ πίῃ, τούτοισι δῆλος ἔσται: καὶ ὀγκηρό- τερον αὐτοῦ τὸ σῶμα φανεῖται, καὶ λιπαρώτερον καὶ 3 “᾿ a εὐχρούστερον ἔσται, ἣν μὴ κακῶς διακεχωρήκῃ TA ἀπὸ τῆς γαστρὸς αὐτῷ" ἔσται δὲ καὶ εὐθυμότερος ἐν A 3, a τῇ ταλαιπωρίῃ. σκεπτέον δὲ καὶ ἤν τι ἐρυγγάνῃ ἢ ὑπὸ φύσης ἔχηται: ταῦτα γὰρ προσήκει γίνεσθαι 228 PRORRHETIC II report the kind of over-niceties mentioned above, I listen to and just laugh at. For if the faults the people who are disobedient make are slight, I do not know how I could ever expose them; if on the other hand the faults are greater, I shall describe now the way in which one should investigate them. First you should inspect the person, in whom you are intending to detect examples of disobedi- ence, every day in the same location and at the same time—best when the sun is just beginning to shine, since at that hour the person will have been emptied down- wards, will still not have eaten anything, and will not have exerted himself except in his morning walks, in which people rarely commit faults (if indeed on rising the per- son regularly takes a walk), since a person who follows a well-balanced regimen must at that hour have the average state of his facial colouring and of his whole body, and also because at that time the examiner will have the sharpest eyes and mind. One must also take into consid- eration the inclinations of the person’s mind and the strength of his body. For different patients carry out different instructions either easily or with difficulty. First, then, if a person who is being reduced by a low diet eats or drinks too much, he will be exposed by the following: his body will appear more bulky, and his skin will be moister and of a better colour, unless there has been a pernicious excretion of the contents of his belly. The person will also be in better spirits when he exerts himself. You must also examine whether he has any eruc- tations, or suffers from the passage of wind; for these ! Aldina: ἐλέξαιμι I. 2H: τήν τε γνώμην 1. 229 18 IIPOPPHTIKON B cal [ἘΔ ΄ Ia , a ε ΄ τοῖσιν ὧδε διακειμένοισιν ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ ἁμαρτάδι. a Ἂς > , », 5 / ᾿ς Ἂς ἣν δὲ ἐσθίειν τε ἤδη ἀναγκαζόμενος συχνὰ καὶ fal “ἈΝ ταλαιπωρέειν ἰσχυρῶς, ἢ τὸ σιτίον μὴ κατα- 4 eI a vn Ν ," > Ν lal “ φάγῃ, ἢ θωρηχθῇ, ἢ μὴ περιέλθῃ ἀπὸ τοῦ δείπνου συχνοῦ, ὧδ᾽ ὑποσκέπτεσθαι: τὸ μὲν δεῖπνον εἰ μὴ 4 VA Ν Ν “4 Ἐ z καταφάγοι, περιπατήσαι δὲ τὰ μεμαθηκότα, ἡδίων ea! A τε ἂν προσιδεῖν, OEVTEPOS TE καὶ ἐργαστικώτερος ἐν τοῖσι γυμνασίοισιν: ὁ δ᾽ ἀπόπατος σμικρότερός τε \ \ , > oN , , BI Re aN Kai ξυνεστηκὼς μάλιστ᾽ ἂν τούτῳ γένοιτο. ἣν δὲ τὸ δεῖπνον καταφαγὼν μὴ περιπατήσῃ, ἐρυγγάνοι T ἂν Ἂν + Ν A > > 4 ων καὶ φυσώδης εἴη, καὶ πλῆθος οὐκ ἐλάσσων dat- Ἀν Ὁ 4 vv A “Δ ,ὔ > a νοιτο, Kai ἱδρῴη av μᾶλλον ἢ πρόσθεν ἐν TH ταλαι- 2 τ / “ΔΑ »Μ ἊΝ 2 [2 » πωρίῃ, καὶ δύσπνοος ἂν εἴη καὶ βαρύς: αἵ τε διέξ- οδοι τῆς κοιλίης μέζονές τε καὶ ἧσσον γλίσχραι τούτῳ γένοιντ᾽ ἄν. εἰ δὲ μήτε τὸ σιτίον καταναλώ- σειε, μήτε περιπατήσειε, νωθρότερος ἂν εἴη καὶ a cal ὀγκωδέστερος. εἰ δὲ μεθυσθείη, ἱδρῴη τ᾽ ἂν μᾶλλον a 4 Ν / “᾿ », ον / ἢ πρόσθεν, καὶ δύσπνοος ἂν εἴη, Kat βαρύτερος ΦΈΣΙ ε A NTE ΄, ” Pry Ν > , αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ καὶ ὑγρότερος: εἴη δ᾽ ἂν καὶ εὐθυμότε- ΕΝ ’΄ 5 A ε ᾿ς > A Ν Ν ρος, ἢν μή τι αὐτῷ ἡ κεφαλὴ ἀνιῶτο. γυναικὶ δὲ ΄ “ » δ ΄ x on ” \ ΄ χρησάμενος ἅπαξ, ὀξύτερός 7 ἂν εἴη καὶ λελυμένος Lal > Ν ’ la 4 μᾶλλον: εἰ δὲ πλειστάκις διαπρήξαιτο, σκληρότερος a » ἂν γένοιτο, Kal αὐχμηρόν TL ἔχων, Kal ἀχρούστερός τε καὶ κοπιώδης | μᾶλλον. ἀποπάτους δὲ χρὴ διαχωρέειν τοῖσι ταλαιπωρέουσιν, ἔστ᾽ ἂν ὀλιγοσι- τέωσί τε καὶ ὀλιγοποτέωσι, σμικρούς τε καὶ σκλη- ’ 5 Ἂς Ν lal ¢ Δ an Ν ‘\ 4 a“ povs, ava δὲ πᾶσαν ἡμέρην: ἣν δὲ διὰ τρίτης, ἢ τετάρτης, ἢ διὰ πλέονος χρόνου διαχωρέῃ, κίνδυνος 230 PRORRHETIC II things are likely to happen in persons following this regi- men if they commit these faults. If, again, a person who is being compelled to eat much and to work hard does not eat all his food, or becomes drunk, or does not go for his walk after his main meal, you must be on the lookout for the following. If he does not finish his dinner, but does take his accustomed walk, he will be more attractive in appearance, and sharper and more industrious in his exer- cises; this person’s stools are normally less in amount and more compact. If he eats all his dinner but does not take his walk, he will suffer from belching and flatulence, in physical bulk he will not seem to be less, but he will sweat more than previously during his exertions, be short of breath, and feel heavy. The evacuations of the cavity in such a person will be greater in amount and less viscous. If he neither finishes his meal nor takes his walk, he will be more sluggish and more turgid. If he becomes drunk, he will sweat more than before, be short of breath, and heavier and moister than usual. He will also be more cheerful, unless his head should be distressed in some way. If a man avails himself of a woman once, he will be sharper and more relaxed. If however he does so repeat- edly, he will become drier and somewhat parched, and be more pallid and weary. In persons that are subject to exertions, as long as they eat and drink but little, the stools should pass off every day in small amounts and be of firm consistency. If, however, they pass off every other day, every third day, or at even longer intervals, there 231 II[POPPHTIKON B >) Ν nv 4 > cal -“ ‘\ ε ’ὔ 4 ἢ πυρετὸν ἢ διαρροίην ἐπιλαβεῖν. ὅσα δὲ ὑγρότερά A vn ¢ A a ἐστι TOV διαχωρημάτων ἢ ὥστε ἐκτυποῦσθαι ἐν TH διεξόδῳ, ταῦτα δὲ τοῖσι πάντα κακίω. τοῖσι δὲ Ν 5 4 4 Ν ἊΝ ΄ὔ Ν συχνὰ ἐσθίουσιν ἤδη καὶ πολλὰ ταλαιπωρέουσι τὴν διέξοδον χρὴ μαλθακὴν ἐοῦσαν ξηρὴν εἶναι, πλῆθος A 3 ΄ Ν ΄ Ν 1 a TOV TE εἰσιόντων κατὰ λόγον <Kat>* τῆς ταλαιπω- pins’ διαχωρέει δὲ ἀπὸ. τῶν ἴσων σιτίων τοῖσι μὲν ἐλάχιστα ταλαιπωρέουσι πλεῖστα, τοῖσι δὲ ταλαι- πωρέουσι πλεῖστα σμικρόν, ἣν ὑγιαίνωσί τε καὶ δικαίως διαιτῶνται: ἄλλα πρὸς ταῦτα συμβάλλε- σθαι. αἱ δὲ ὑγρότεραι τῶν διαχωρήσεων καὶ ἄτερ πυρετῶν γινόμεναι, καὶ ἑβδομαῖαι, καὶ θᾶσσον κρι- νόμεναι, λυσιτελέες, ἐς ἅπαξ πᾶσαι γινόμεναι, καὶ μὴ ὑποστρέφουσαι: εἰ δ᾽ ἐπιπυρεταίνοιεν οἱ ἄνθρω- > ποι, ἢ ὑποστρέφοιεν αἱ διάρροιαι, εἰ μακραὶ / » "L » » γίνοιντο, πάντως TOVNpal, εἴ TE χολώδεες εἴησαν, εἴ τε φλεγματώδεες, εἴ τε ὠμαί, καὶ διαιτημάτων τε ἰδίων προσδεόμεναι ἕκασται, καὶ φαρμακευσίων, ἄλλαι ἄλλων. Οὖρον δὲ χρὴ κατά τε τὸ τοῦ πινομένου πλῆθος / Ν », ΡΝ ἊΝ 5 4 e 4 διουρέεσθαι, καὶ ἴσον αἰεὶ καὶ ἀθρόον ws μάλιστα, Ν ec A ΄ ΄’΄ E> τ > / > Ν » καὶ ῥοπῇ ὀλίγῳ παχύτερον ἢ οἷον ἐπόθη. εἰ δὲ εἴη ὑδατῶδές τε καὶ πλεῖον τοῦ προστασσομένου πίνε- / Ν ’ὔ ἊΝ + > ἊΝ σθαι, σημαίνει μὴ πείθεσθαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἀλλὰ fe A al \9 > ὃ , > A πλέονι ποτῷ χρῆσθαι, καὶ" ov δύνασθαι avatpady- ναι, ἔστ᾽ ἂν τὰ τοιαῦτα ποιέῃ τὸ οὖρον. εἰ δὲ κατ᾽ ΄ Ss ΄ νὴ ὀλίγον στάζοι" τὸ οὖρον, σημαίνει ἢ φαρμακεύσιος al Ἂν », a“ A Ν , δεῖσθαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἢ νόσημά τι τῶν περὶ κύστιν 292 PRORRHETIC II is a danger that fever or diarrhoea will supervene. Stools that are too liquid to have any form when they are excreted are all very bad for patients. In persons that are already eating frequently and exerting themselves strenu- ously, the evacuations should be dry but soft, and in quan- tity proportional to what is ingested and to the person's exertions. From the same amount of food there pass off, in persons exerting themselves least, the greatest quan- tity, in those exerting themselves most, but a small amount, as long as they are healthy and following a nor- mal regimen. Other cases are to be reckoned according to the same principle. Moister evacuations that occur in the absence of fevers and when the crisis is on the seventh day or sooner are advantageous if they all pass at once and do not recur. If, however, such patients later become febrile, or the diarrhoea returns and stays for a long time, such stools are absolutely malignant, whether they are bilious, or phlegmy, or raw (i.e. unconcocted), and each kind requires its own particular regimen, and different ones require different medications. Urine should be excreted in an amount proportional to what is drunk and always evenly, and as far as possible all at once; it should be slightly thicker than what was drunk. But if the urine passed is watery and greater in quantity than what the person was ordered to drink, this is a sign that the person is not obeying, but that he is taking too much drink, and he cannot be built up as long as he passes urine like this. If the urine drips a little at a time, it shows either that the person needs a medication, or that ! Littré. 2 Potter: ἢ I. 3 Potter: τρίζοι I. 233 20 IILPOPPHTIKON B ἔχειν. αἷμα δὲ οὐρῆσαι ὀλιγάκις μὲν Kal ἄτερ πυρε- A oe) ΄ 30 ν | Ν ΄ 5 Ἂν / τοῦ Kal ὀδύνης οὐδὲν | κακὸν σημαίνει, ἀλλὰ κόπων 7 4 > Ν / 5 4 a 7 λύσις γίνεται: εἰ δὲ πολλάκις οὐρέοι, ἢ τούτων TL ΄ / 5 ἊΝ 4 4 Ἂν προσγίνοιτο, δεινόν: ἀλλὰ προλέγειν, ἤν τε ξὺν 4 > A A ὀδύνῃ οὐρέηται, ἥν τε ξὺν πυρετῷ, πῦον ἐπιδιουρή- σειν, καὶ οὕτω παύσεσθαι τῶν ἀλγεόντων. παχὺ δὲ toy » ED οὖρον λευκὴν ὑπόστασιν ἔχον σημαίνει ἢ περὶ Ν BA Ν 5 A Ν y+ “Δ Ἂς ἊΝ τὰ ἄρθρα τινὰ ὀδύνην καὶ ἔπαρσιν «ἢ περὶ τὰ σπλάγχνα: χλωρὴν δέ, καθαρσίην τοῦ σώματος An ΚΑ δηλοῖ ἢ περὶ τὰ σπλάγχνα καὶ τούτων ὀδύνην τε καὶ ” 1 ε δ᾽ » ε ΄ ε > A ἔπαρσιν." at ἄλλαι ὑποστάσεις αἱ ἐν τοῖσιν οὔροισι τῶν γυμναζομένων πᾶσαι ἀπὸ τῶν νοσημά- των γίνονται τῶν περὶ τὴν κύστιν: δῆλον δὲ ποιή- Ss > / , Ἂν + ‘\ 4 σουσι, ξὺν ὀδύνῃσί τε yap ἔσονται καὶ δυσαπάλ- λακτοι. ἊΣ ‘al Ἂν 4 Ἂς 4 Ν 4 Kal ταῦτα μὲν γράφω περὶ τούτων, καὶ λέγω τοι- αῦτα ἕτερα. ὧν δὲ du’ ἀκρίβειαν κατηγορέονται τῶν προρρήσεων, τοῖσι μὲν αὐτῶν αὐτὸς ξυνεγενόμην, τῶν δὲ παισί τε καὶ μαθητῇσιν ἐλεσχηνευσάμην, aA ΩΝ ΄ ” “ Ἐν 5 ν τὰν τῶν δὲ ξυγγράμματα ἔλαβον: ὥστε, εὖ εἰδὼς οἷα “ 5 lal > ’ὔ Ν A > 4 > Lal ἕκαστος αὐτῶν ἐφρόνει, καὶ τὰς ἀκριβείας οὐδαμοῦ εὑρών, ἐπεχείρησα τάδε γράφειν. 5. Περὶ δὲ ὑδρώπων τε καὶ φθισίων, καὶ τῶν ποδαγρῶν, τῶν τε καὶ λαμβανομένων ὑπὸ τῆς ἱερῆς / ΄ ο (ὃ » Ν ΄ Ν νόσου καλεομένης,“ τάδε λέγω, κατὰ μέν τι περὶ ΄ κα 3 ΄ A πάντων TO αὐτό: ᾧ yap Evyyevés TL? τούτων τῶν ΤῊ in margin. 2 καλεομένης I above the line. 234 PRORRHETIC II he has some disease associated with his bladder. To pass blood in the urine a few times without fever or pain is not a bad sign, but rather suggests the resolution of weari- ness. However, to pass bloody urine frequently or in con- junction with one of the other symptoms is ominous. If micturition is painful or associated with fever, predict that pus will be passed along with the urine, and that this will lead to an end of the suffering. Thick urine with a white deposit indicates there will be some pain and swelling about the joints <or about the inward parts. A yellow- greenish sediment indicates a cleaning of the body or about the inward parts, and pain and swelling in them>. Other sediments in the urines of persons who exert them- selves all arise from diseases of the bladder; these condi- tions reveal themselves clearly, since they will be painful and hard to get rid of. This is what I intend to write about such matters, keeping for oral presentation other similar points. Con- cerning those physicians whose predictions are vaunted for their nicety, with some of them I have conversed directly, others I know through having spoken with their children and students, and of others I have acquired the writings, so that, knowing full well what sort of thing each of them was thinking, but still not finding any of the reputed niceties anywhere, I have set to work to give a written account of the matter. 5. About dropsies, consumptions and gouty conditions as well as persons taken by what is called the sacred disease, I say that they all have something in common, namely that in whomever these diseases are to a degree 3 Littré: ot yap ξυγγενέσι I. 235 IIPOPPHTIKON B 4 4 > VA 4 >7 νουσημάτων, ἔστιν εἰδέναι δυσαπάλλακτον ἐόντα" τὰ δὲ ἄλλα Kall’ ἕκαστον γράψω. 6. Χρὴ δὲ τὸν ὑπὸ τοῦ ὕδρωπος ἐχόμενον καὶ , , ” ΄' 3 ἧς μέλλοντα περιέσεσθαι εὔσπλαγχνόν τε εἶναι, καὶ 5 / Sal ΄ “ ΄ ΄ > ἀνατείνεσθαι Kata’ φύσιν ἅμα πέπτεσθαί τε εὐπε- τέως, εὔπνοόν T ἐόντα ἀνώδυνον εἶναι, καὶ χλιαρὸν ὁμαλῶς πᾶν τὸ σῶμα ἔχειν καὶ μὴ περιτετηκὸς περὶ τὰ ἔσχατα: κρέσσον δὲ ἐπάρματα μᾶλλον ἔχειν ἐν τοῖσιν ἀκρωτηρίοισιν, ἄριστον δὲ μηδὲ ἕτερον τού- των, ἀλλὰ μαλακά τε χρὴ καὶ ἰσχνὰ εἶναι τὰ ἀκρω- τήρια: καὶ τὴν γαστέρα μαλθακὴν εἶναι ψαυομένην:" ἴω IN Ν ἴω Ν 4 Ν Ν A βῆχα δὲ μὴ προσεῖναι, μηδὲ δίψαν, μηδὲ τὴν γλῶσ- σαν ἐπιξηραίνεσθαι, ἔν τε τῷ ἄλλῳ χρόνῳ καὶ μετὰ τοὺς ὕπνους, γίνεται δὲ ταῦτα κάρτα: τὰ δὲ σιτία «ε ΄ » ἊΝ 5 2 e Ν Ν A ἡδέως δέχεσθαι, καὶ ἐσθίοντα ἱκανὰ μὴ πονεῖσθαι: Ἂς Ν , Ν Ν Ἂς / > , Ss τὴν δὲ κοιλίην πρὸς μὲν τὰ φάρμακα ὀξέην εἶναι, \ Sy, ΄ ΄ x > τὸν δ᾽ ἄλλον χρόνον διαχωρέειν μαλθακὸν ἐκτετυ- πωμένον: τὸ δὲ οὖρον φαίνεσθαι περαιούμενον πρὸς τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα καὶ τῶν οἴνων τὰς μεταβολάς: τὴν δὲ ταλαιπωρίην εὐπετῶς φέρειν, καὶ ἄκοπον εἶναι. ἄριστον μὲν πάντα οὕτω διακεῖσθαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον, \ > , > on , ε ͵΄ > ν᾿ , ε καὶ ἀσφαλέστατ᾽ ἂν γένοιτο ὑγιής: εἰ δὲ μή, ὡς πλεῖστα τούτων ἐχέτω, ἐν ἐλπίδι γὰρ ἔσται περιγε- ΄ a > oN Ν , », 3 Ἂν Nye (δ᾽ ΄ νέσθαι: ὃς δ᾽ ἂν μηδὲν τούτων ἔχῃ, ἀλλὰ τὰ ἐναντία, ιν »7 "7 a SP AN ΄ 5Χκ 7 ἀνέλπιστον ἐόντα εἰδέναι: ὃς δ᾽ ἂν τούτων ὀλίγα ἔχῃ, ἃ φημὶ χρηστὰ εἶναι τῷ ὑδρωπιῶντι προσόντα, 5 4 > / 5 A ὀλίγαι ἐλπίδες αὐτῷ. το > ΒΝ ς ΄, Ν » Ν , Ν Ὧι δ᾽ ἂν αἱμορραγέῃ πολλὸν ἄνω καὶ κάτω, καὶ 236 PRORRHETIC II hereditary, you can be sure that they are hard to get rid of. Their other features I shall describe disease by dis- ease. 6. For a person to be attacked by dropsy and go on to survive he must have healthy inward parts, which are both expanded according to nature and at the same time digest favourably, draw his breath easily and without pain, be evenly warm over his whole body, and not be emaci- ated in the extremities—better than emaciation would be even to have swellings in the extremities, although it would be best to have neither, and that the extremities be soft and without swelling. The belly should be soft to the touch. Cough should not supervene, nor thirst, nor should the tongue become dry at any time, but especially after sleeping; these symptoms are frequent. Foods should be taken with pleasure, and after being eaten in sufficient quantity should not occasion pain. The cavity should be quick when stimulated by a medication, but otherwise pass soft, well-formed stools. The urine passed should appear appropriate to the person’s regimen and changes of wine. The patient should bear exertions easily and remain unwearied. The dropsical patient will be in the best position if all these signs are as noted, and will recover with the greatest sureness. If not all, then let as many as possible of them be favourable, for he will have a good chance of recovering. A person with none of the favourable signs, but rather their opposites, you can be sure is hopeless; one with few of the features I list as favourable in dropsy has slight hope. If a person has a copious haemorrhage both upwards 1 Littré: καὶ I. 357 24 IITPOPPHTIKON B πυρετὸς ἐπιγένηται, ὕδατος ἐμπλησθῆναι πολλαὶ ἐλπίδες τοῦτον, καὶ τῶν ὑδρώπων οὗτος ὀλιγοχρο- νιώτατός τε καὶ ἐν τοῖσιν ἀφυκτοτάτοισιν: ἄλλῳ δὲ προσημαίνειν περὶ τούτου. οἷσι δὲ οἰδήματα μεγάλα γενόμενα καταμαραίνεται, καὶ αὖθις ἐπαίρε- ται, | οὗτοι δὲ μᾶλλον περιγίνονται τῶν ἐκ τῶν αἷἱμά- των τῆς ἀναρρήξιος ἐμπιπραμένων:" ἐξαπατέουσι δὲ τοὺς ἀλγέοντας οὗτοι οἱ ὕδρωπες, ὥστε ποιέουσιν 2 τοῖσιν ἰατροῖσιν ἀπόλλυσθαι. αὐτοὺς ἀπιστέοντας 7. Περὶ δὲ τῶν φθινόντων κατὰ μὲν τὸ πτύελον Ν ἊΝ “Ὁ > as) 4 4 ἊΝ ἴω > 4 καὶ τὴν βῆχα ταὐτὰ λέγω ἅπερ περὶ τῶν ἐμπύων 2, Ν Ν Ν ΄ A 4 A ἔγραφον. χρὴ yap τὸ πτύελον τῷ μέλλοντι καλῶς > / > / > / Ἂν > ἀπαλλάξειν εὐπετέως τε ἀναβήσσεσθαι καὶ εἶναι λευκόν, καὶ ὁμαλόν, καὶ ὁμόχροον, καὶ ἀφλέγμαν- τον, τὸ δ᾽ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς καταρρέον ἐς τὰς ῥῖνας / ἊΝ Ἂν ἊΝ 4 vn A τρέπεσθαι: πυρετὸν δὲ μὴ λαμβάνειν, «ἢ τοσοῦτον λαμβάνειν,;:" ὥστε τῶν δείπνων μὴ κωλύεσθαι, μηδὲ διψῆν: ἡ δὲ γαστὴρ ὑποχωρείτω πᾶσαν ἡμέρην, καὶ ‘\ ε Si 2 ’΄ A \ Ν A τὸ ὑποχωρέον ἔστω σκληρόν, πλῆθος δὲ κατὰ τὰ εἰσιόντα: τὸν δὲ ἄνθρωπον ὡς ἥκιστα λεπτὸν εἶναι" τὸ δὲ στῆθος ἐπαινεῖν χρὴ τετράγωνόν γε ἐὸν καὶ λάσιον, καὶ ὁ χόνδρος αὐτοῦ μικρὸς ἔστω καὶ σεσαρκωμένος ἰσχυρῶς. ὅστις μὲν γὰρ ταῦτα By ἃ "Ἃ πάντα ἔχει, περιεστικώτατος γίνεται: ὃς δ᾽ ἂν μηδὲν τούτων ἔχῃ, ὀλεθριώτατος. “ x on ” ΄ ΄, ΄ὕ > > Οσοι δ᾽ ἂν ἔμπυοι γένωνται, νέοι εόντες, ἐξ ἀπο- 11: -πιπλαμένων Η. 2Η2: ἀπιόντας I. 3 H in margin. 238 PRORRHETIC II and downwards, and fever supervenes, the chances are great that he will become filled with water, and this is the most short-lived of dropsies and among the most inescapable; foretell this to someone else who is present. Persons in whom great swellings form, and then dry up, and then swell up again, are more likely to survive than those who become febrile* from a haemorrhage upwards. The latter dropsies deceive patients, so that they lose faith> in their physicians, and thus perish. 7. In consumptive patients, with regard to the sputum and cough I have the same to say as I wrote with regard to internal suppuration: namely, that for those who are going to come off well it must be coughed up easily, and be white, uniform in consistency and colour, and without phlegm; and what flows down from the head should be directed to the nostrils.° No fever should be present, <or only so little as> not to hinder the patient from taking his meals; nor should there be thirst. The belly should evacu- ate downwards every day, and the stools should be firm and in proportion to the amount of food ingested. The person should be as little thin as possible: you must com- mend a chest that is square and covered with hair, and its cartilage (xiphisternum) should be small and well covered with flesh. Now whoever has all of these signs is most likely to survive, who has none of them, most likely to die. Those who begin to suppurate internally while still 4 Or, with the reading of H, “who become hydropic”. For Foes and Grimm this loss of faith results in the patients deserting their physicians, while Littré and Fuchs ascribe fatal disobedience to the patients. © Cf. Glands 13. 239 IITIPOPPHTIKON B ΄ “᾿ ΄ ΟΡ ΕΡΕΓΦΊΑΣ, Ν A ΄ σκήψιος, ἢ σύριγγος, ἢ ἀπ᾽ adXdov τινὸς τῶν τοιού- vn Ὁ, των, ἢ ἐκ παλινδρομίης ἀποστάσιος, οὐ περιγίνον- ay A A ται, ἣν μὴ πολλὰ κάρτα αὐτοῖσιν ἐπιγένηται TOV 5 A / 5 / Ν csv. - ἀγαθῶν σημείων. ἀπόλλυνται δὲ οἱ ἄνθρωποι οὗτοι 5 Ν / > ἴων Ν Ν 5 » ΕΣ ἐς τὸ φθινόπωρον. (ἰσχυρῶς δὲ καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων νοσημάτων μακρῶν ἐς τὴν ὥρην ταύτην τελευτῶσιν ε A A my Ar «“ ΄ “ οἱ πλεῖστοι.) τῶν δ᾽ ἄλλων ἥκιστα περιγίνονται αἵ τε παρθένοι καὶ αἱ γυναῖκες, How ἀπολήψει ἐπιμη- γ ε 4 a 5 Ἂν 74 / νίων ἡ φθίσις γένηται. εἰ δὲ μέλλοι τις περιέσεσθαι a “. A a A » τῶν παρθένων ἢ τῶν γυναικῶν, τῶν TE ἄλλων σημείων τῶν [τε ἀγαθῶν δεῖ πολλὰ ἐπιγενέσθαι Ν Ν ΄ὔ΄ lal Ν fot ᾽ὕὔ καὶ τὰ ἐπιμήνια λαμπρῶς τε καὶ καθαρῶς ἐπιφαίνε- a > / 5 / ε ἊΣ 5 ων c / fal σθαι, ἢ οὐδεμία ἐλπίς. οἱ δὲ ἐκ τῶν αἱμάτων THs | 35) ἴων ἴω Lal ἀναρρήξιος ἔμπυοι γινόμενοι TOV TE ἀνδρῶν καὶ TOV γυναικῶν καὶ τῶν παρθένων περιγίνονται μὲν οὐχ ἧσσον, τὰ δὲ σημεῖα χρὴ πάντα ἀναλογισάμενον τά ἴω ᾽ὕ lal ye περὶ TOV ἐμπύων Kal τῶν φθινόντων προλέγειν τόν τε περιεσόμενον καὶ τὸν ἀπολούμενον. μάλιστα δὲ περιγίνονται ἐκ τῶν τοῦ αἵματος ἀναρρήξεων e Py > A OLOLW ἂν ἀλγήματα ὑπάρχῃ μελαγχολικὰ ἔν τε τῷ > Lal ἊΝ ᾽ὕὔ νώτῳ καὶ ἐν τῷ στήθει, καὶ μετὰ τὴν ἀνάρρηξιν ἀνωδυνώτεροι γένωνται: βῆχές τε γὰρ οὐ κάρτα ἐπι- Ν 9 a γίνονται, καὶ πυρετοὶ οὐ“ πλεῖστοι διατελέουσιν ἐόν- τες, «καὶ: δίψαν εὐπετέως φέρουσιν: ὑποστροφαὶ δὲ τῆς ἀναρρήξιος μάλιστα γίνονται τούτοισιν, εἰ μὴ ἀποστάσιες ἐπιγένωνται: ἄρισται δὲ τῶν ἀπο- στασίων αἱ αἱματηρόταται. ὁκόσοισι δὲ ἐν τοῖσι Oe ἰλγή ἔνε ὶ διὰ ὄνου λεπτύ- στήθεσιν ἀλγήματα ἔνεστι, καὶ διὰ χρόνο π 240 PRORRHETIC II young—either from a determination of humours, or from a fistulous sore or anything else like that, or from a relaps- ing apostasis—do not survive unless a good many of the favourable signs appear in them; such persons perish towards fall. (From the other chronic diseases, too, it is mainly towards that season that most patients die.) Of the others, the least likely to live are the girls and women in whom the consumption arose along with a cessation of their menses; if any of the girls or women is going to sur- vive, many of the other favourable signs must be present, and the menses must reappear vigorous and pure-flowing; otherwise, there is no hope. Those who suppurate inter- nally as the result of a haemorrhage upwards—men, women and girls—are no less likely to survive: you should consider all the signs important in internal suppuration and consumption, to predict who will survive or succumb. When the condition has arisen from haemorrhaging upwards, the most likely to survive are persons who have melancholic pains in the back and chest and after the haemorrhage are freed from their pains. For they are not subject to excessive coughing, their fevers do not in most cases persist, and they bear their thirst easily. These patients usually have a recurrence of the haemorrhage, unless apostases take place; the best apostases are those with the most blood. Persons with pains in their chest, ! Del. Kiihn. 2 Littré: of 1. SH: 4 Recc.: -povtes I. 241 28 IIPOPPHTIKON B , ‘\ / ἊΣ 7 / νονταί τε Kat βήσσουσι, Kal δύσπνοιαι γίνονται, ΕΣ ἴω 3, / οὔτε πυρετῶν ἐπιλαμβανόντων, οὔτε ἐκπυημάτων 4 7 7 (3 / ἐπιγινομένων, τούτους ἐπανερέσθαι, ὁκόταν βήσ- ΄ 3, σωσί τε καὶ δύσπνοοι ἔωσιν, et! ξυνεστραμμένον τι 4 Ν » καὶ μικρόν, ὀδμὴν ἔχον, ἐκβήσσουσιν. Ν © 8. Περὶ δὲ ποδαγρώντων τάδε: ὅσοι μὲν γέροντες “Ἃ Ἂς aA Ε 5, a ἢ περὶ τοῖσιν ἄρθροισιν ἐπιπωρώματα ἔχουσιν, ἢ 9 A ΄ \ ” τρόπον ἀταλαίπωρον" ζῶσι κοιλίας ξηρὰς ἔχοντες, οὗτοι μὲν πάντες ἀδύνατοι ὑγιέες γίνεσθαι ἀνθρω- / ο 5 5 lal \ , πίνῃ τέχνῃ, ὅσον ἐγὼ οἶδα: ἰῶνται δὲ τούτους » ΩΝ / 3\ ἄριστα | μὲν δυσεντερίαι, ἢν ἐπιγένωνται, ἀτὰρ Kai 5, 5 7 3 , ’΄ ε > Ν 7 ἄλλαι ἐκτήξιες ὠφελέουσι κάρτα αἱ ἐς τὰ κάτω ἮΝ δ» “ ἊΝ 4 ΕῚ Ν x > ὩΝ al χωρία ῥέπουσαι. ὅστις δὲ νέος ἐστὶ καὶ ἀμφὶ τοῖσιν 3, 3, / 3, ἄρθροισιν οὔπω ἐπιπωρώματα ἔχει καὶ τὸν τρόπον > ἊΝ 5 / ἊΝ nA ἊΝ / > Ν ἐστὶν ἐπιμελής τε καὶ φιλόπονος καὶ κοιλίας ἀγαθὰς > ΄ a ἔχων ὑπακούειν πρὸς τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα, οὗτος δὲ A » a ἰητροῦ γνώμην ἔχοντος ἐπιτυχὼν ὑγιὴς ἂν γένοιτο. A A A / 9. Τῶν δ᾽ ὑπὸ τῆς ἱερῆς νόσου λαμβανομένων ΄ Ν > ΄ e la >) > ἊΝ χαλεπώτατοι μὲν ἐξίστασθαι, ὁκόσοισιν ἂν ἀπὸ Ν ᾽’ὔ Ν ἴω οἷ 4 παιδὸς ξυμβήσηται Kai συνανδρωθῇ τὸ νόσημα: ϑι © a / “-“ ἔπειτα δὲ ὅσοισιν ἂν γένηται ἐν ἀκμάζοντι τῷ « ΄ “Ὁ ε a », > vv > XN 4 Ν Ψ σώματι τῆς ἡλικίης (εἴη δ᾽ ἂν ἀπὸ εἴκοσι καὶ πέντε ἐτέων ἐς πέντε καὶ τεσσαράκοντα ἔτεα)" μετὰ δὲ τού- -“ a“ TOUS, ὅσοις ἂν γένηται TO νούσημα μηδὲν προση- μαῖνον, ὁκόθεν ἄρχεται τοῦ σώματος. οἷσι δὲ ἀπὸ » lal 4 », an“ > Ν “A ἴων "᾿ τῆς κεφαλῆς δοκέει ἄρχεσθαι, ἢ ἀπὸ τοῦ πλευροῦ, ἢ La) a A / > ᾽ὔ “A ἀπὸ τῆς χειρός, ἢ τοῦ ποδός, εὐπετέστερα ἰᾶσθαι: διαφέρει γὰρ καὶ ταῦτα: τὰ γὰρ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς 242 PRORRHETIC II who over time become thin and begin to cough, and who suffer from dyspnoea, but who have neither fevers nor suppurations, you must ask whether, when they are coughing and suffering from dyspnoea, they cough up little congealed clots that give off a smell. 8. As for patients with gout, those who are old, or who have concretions about the joints, or who live a life with- out exertions and are constipated, are all incurable by the human art, as far as I know, but are best cured by dysen- tery, if it should occur; also other attenuations which incline towards the lower parts are very helpful.* Anyone, on the other hand, who is young and does not yet have concretions about his joints, who is careful about his way of life and enjoys exertion, and whose bowels respond well to his regimen, if he chances upon a physician that has understanding, will recover. 9. Of patients seized by the sacred disease, the ones who have the most difficulty to escape are those whom the disease has accompanied from their childhood and has grown up along with them; next, those in whom the disease occurs as their body reached the fullness of age (that would be from twenty-five to forty-five years); after them, persons in whom the disease occurs without giving any indications from which part of the body it is originat- ing. Those in whom the disease seems to begin from the person's head or side, or from his hand or foot, are more easily treated. But these cases differ too, for those where the disease begins from the head are the most difficult, 4 Cf. ch. 9 below. ! Littré: καὶ 1: ἢ H2. 2 Littré: radai- I. 243 30 WPOR PH RGONS Be 72 , + Ν 5 Ἂν al Ν Ν τούτων χαλεπώτατα: ἔπειτα τὰ ἀπὸ πλευροῦ: τὰ δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν χειρῶν τε καὶ ποδῶν μάλιστα οἷά τε ἐξυγι- αίνεσθαι. ἐπιχειρέειν δὲ χρὴ τούτοισι τὸν ἰητρόν, a an » » εἰδότα TOV τρόπον τῆς ἰήσιος, NY ἔωσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι ve Ν {2 Ν [72 « "2 Ν νέοι τε καὶ φιλόπονοι: πλὴν ὅσον αἱ φρένες τι κακὸν 3, a » ἔχουσιν, ἢ εἴ τις ἀπόπληκτος γέγονεν: αἱ yap Ν e 5 / > / ε Ν μελαγχολικαὶ αὗται ἐκστάσιες οὐ λυσιτελέες: αἱ δὲ » ἴω / » ἄλλαι at εἰς τὰ κάτω τρεπόμεναι πᾶσαι ἀγαθαί: ἄρι- Ν Ν 5 lal a ε ε a e / σται δὲ καὶ ἐνταῦθα πολλῷ αἱ αἱματηρόταται. ὁπό- 3, ,ὔ σοι δὲ γέροντες ἤρξαντο λαμβάνεσθαι, ἀποθνή- nv / / σκουσί TE μάλιστα, καὶ ἣν μὴ ἀπόλωνται, τάχιστα ἀπαλλάσσονται ὑπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου, ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν ἰητρῶν ἥκιστα ὠφελέονται. 10. Οἷσι δὲ τῶν παιδίων ἐξαπίνης οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ , av A , Ν 35, av 4 διεστράφησαν, ἢ μεῖζόν τι κακὸν ἔπαθον, ἢ φύματα ε Ν Ν > ΄, > ΄ W'S) | ΄ 5 ΄, ὑπὸ τὸν αὐχένα ἐφύη, ἢ ἰσχνοϊφωνότεροι ἐγένοντο, ey ~ ΕΝ ἢ βῆχες Enpat χρόνιοι προσέχουσιν, ἢ ἐς τὴν , an Ν γαστέρα μείζοσι γενομένοισιν ὀδύνη φοιτᾷ, καὶ οὐκ oY a lal , ἐκταράσσεται, ἢ ἐν τοῖσι πλευροῖσι διαστρέμματα » vn , ἔχουσιν ἢ φλέβας παχέας περὶ THY γαστέρα κιρσώ- av > ΕΝ » / deas, ἢ ἐπίπλοον καταβαίνει, ἢ ὄρχις μέγας γένονεν, “ΔΑ av "ἃ “Δ ᾽,ὕ ἢ χεὶρ λεπτὴ καὶ ἀκρατής, ἢ πούς, ἢ κνήμη ξύμ- πασα ἐχωλώθη, ἄτερ προφάσιος ἄλλης, τούτοισι » © -“ / πᾶσιν εἰδέναι OTL ἡ νοῦσος TPOEYEVETO TPO τούτων ἁπάντων, καὶ οἱ μὲν πλεῖστοι τῶν τρεφόντων τὰ παι- / > / ε / Ν Ν Ν να δία ἐρωτώμενοι ὁμολογήσουσι, τοὺς δὲ καὶ λανθάνει καὶ οὔ φασιν εἰδέναι τοιοῦτον οὐδὲν γενόμενον. 11. Τὸν δὲ περὶ τῶν ἑλκέων μέλλοντα γνώσε- 244 PRORRHETIC ΤΙ and then those where it begins from the side, whereas cases where it begins from both the hands and feet are the most possible to cure completely. The physician, if he knows the method of treatment, must take these cases on if the persons are young and active, unless their mind has some defect, or the patient is paralysed. Evacuations of dark bile in these patients are not advantageous, but all other movements that turn towards the lower parts are favourable; and best by far in that direction are ones that contain the most blood. Persons that have begun to be attacked by the disease in old age* generally succumb, but if they do not die, they recover spontaneously in a very short time, and are least benefited by physicians. 10. Children in whom the eyes suddenly look awry, or who suffer some serious accident, or in whom tubercles grow along the neck, or who become weaker in their speech, or in whom a chronic dry cough sets in, or who as they get older suffer a pain shooting to the belly unac- companied by a motion of the bowels, or who have distor- tions (cramps?) in their sides, or wide varicose veins about the belly, or in whom the omentum descends or a testicle becomes large, or a hand becomes wasted and powerless, or a foot, or the whole lower leg becomes lame without any other cause—in all these instances, then, you can be sure that epilepsy was present before all of these events. Most of those who are caring for these children, if asked, will confirm this, but others it escapes, and they say they are unaware of any such thing having occurred. 11. A person who wants to know about ulcers, how ἃ Cf. ch. 8 above. 245 32 IIPOPPHTIKON B σθαι, ὅκως ἕκαστα τελευτήσει, πρῶτον μὲν χρὴ τὰ + lal > / > / ‘ py re ‘\ εἴδεα τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐξεπίστασθαι, τὰ δὲ ἀμείνω πρὸς Ἂν “ Ν Ἂν ΄ 5, Ν ε / > / τὰ ἕλκεα καὶ τὰ κακίω: ἔπειτα τὰς ἡλικίας εἰδέναι, c / “ lal ε / 4 / ὁποίῃσιν ἕκαστα τῶν ἑλκέων δυσαπάλλακτα γίνεται: τά τε χωρία ἐπεσκέφθαι τὰ ἐν τοῖσι σώμασιν, ὅσον διαφέρει θάτερα θατέρων: τά τε ἄλλα ὁκοῖα ἐφ᾽ ἑκάστοισιν ἐπιγίνεται ἀγαθά τε καὶ κακὰ εἰδέναι. > » A Lal xn εἰδὼς μὲν yap ἄν τις ταῦτα πάντα εἰδῇ ἂν Kal ὅπως “ > , \ 50. ν Ν A > μοὶ ἕκαστα ἀποβήσεται: μὴ εἰδὼς δὲ ταῦτα, οὐκ ἂν > a WS « Now, > Ν A ε / εἰδῇ ὅπως αἱ τελευταὶ ἔσονται ἀμφὶ τῶν ἑλκέων. Εἴδεα μὲν yap ἀγαθά ἐστι τὰ τοιάδε: ἐλαφρὰ καὶ ξύμμετρα, καὶ εὔσπλαγχνα, καὶ μήτε σαρκώδεα ἰσχυρῶς μήτε σκληρά: κατὰ δὲ χρῶμα ἔστω λευκόν, av Pr, a“ > / A Ν / > Ν ἢ μέλαν, ἢ ἐρυθρόν: ταῦτα γὰρ πάντα ἀγαθὰ La 52 > ’ ” / “Ἃ / “Ἃ ἄκρητα ἐόντα: εἰ δ᾽ εἴη μιξόχλωρον, ἢ χλωρόν, ἢ Ἂν ‘\ A 4 ἊΝ Ν Ἂς “ πελιδνὸν τὸ χρῶμα, κάκιον γίνεται. Τὰ δὲ εἴδεα ὅσα ἂν τοῖσι προγεγραμμένοισι τἀναντία πεφύκῃ, εἰδέ- ἊΝ " SEL: Ἂν Ν ε A 4 Ν ναι χρὴ κακίω ἐόντα. Περὶ δὲ ἡλικιῶν, φύματα μὲν ἔμπυα [γίνεται] καὶ τὰ | χοιρώδεα, ταῦτα πλεῖστα Ν δί ὃ» ᾿ πα > Se 3 ΄ τὰ παιδία" ἴσχουσι, καὶ ῥᾷστα ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπαλλάσ- wel τοῖσι δὲ γεραιτέροισί τε τῶν παιδίων καὶ νεηνί- / Ν > 4 7 Ἂς > σκοισι φύεται μὲν ἐλάσσω, χαλεπώτερον δὲ ἐξ 3 aA > 4 a“ Ἂς 5 4 Ν Ἂς αὐτῶν ἀπαλλάσσουσι. Τοῖσι δὲ ἀνδράσι τὰ μὲν τοιαῦτα φύματα οὐ κάρτα ἐπιγίνεται: τὰ δὲ κηρία δεινά, καὶ οἱ κρυπτοὶ καρκῖνοι οἱ ὑποβρύχιοι, καὶ οἱ lal > av ἐκ TOV ἐπινυκτίδων ἕρπητες, ἔστ᾽ ἂν ἑξήκοντα ἔτεα Lal ε YS A Ν ΄ὔ΄ A Ν συχνῷ ὑπερβάλλωσι. Τοῖσι δὲ γέρουσι τῶν μὲν ’΄ 4 > Ἂς > / ες ‘\ TOLOUTOT POTT@V φυμάτων οὐδὲν επιγινεται Ob δὲ 246 PRORRHETIC II each will end, must first recognize clearly